JP2021166929A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving user's willingness to play a game by enhancing the degree of attention to the game and game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 comprises a distribution device 92 which distributes a game ball 99 introduced from an introduction port 920 to a first passage 921 or a second passage 922 by clockwise or counterclockwise rotation of a distribution member 94. The distribution member 94 is rotated clockwise with an elastic force generated by a load generation part 944 when the distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise, and the distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise with an elastic force generated by the load generation part 944 when the distribution member 94 is rotated clockwise.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 82

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Generally, a pachinko gaming machine called a digital pachi is provided with a first starting port for performing a big hit lottery when a game ball wins a prize. In addition, some gaming machines are provided with a second starting port that allows the gaming balls to win a prize by operating an electric accessory in order to enable a large number of big hit lottery with a small number of gaming balls. In addition, some gaming machines include a distribution device that alternately distributes game balls to the first starting port and the second starting port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-231902

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to raise the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game to improve the player's motivation to play the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game to improve the player's motivation to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
The first direction (counterclockwise direction) centered on the introduction port (920), the first passage (921), the second passage (922), and the rotation axis (941), and the first direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution unit (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the distribution unit (94, etc.). Alternatively, a distribution device (92) for distributing to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction is provided.
The distribution unit (94 or the like) is characterized in that it can rotate in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by rotating in the first direction.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention to the game and the interest of the game to improve the player's willingness to play a jackpot game.

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 5 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a distribution device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (B) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a distribution member of the distribution device. The cross-sectional view for demonstrating the operation of the distribution member. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the sorting device. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the sorting device. 5 (A) and 5 (B) are cross-sectional views for explaining the operation of the sorting device, and FIG. 5 (C) is a perspective view of the electric support member. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of through-gate processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a normal symbol control process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a normal electric accessory control process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the special figure game control process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of data setting processing executed in the special figure game control processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start processing executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start processing executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a main part of a special variable winning device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 34. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 34. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game control process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the open / close execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the open / close execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the feather accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the feather accessory device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 42. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a feather accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start processing executed in the special figure game control process of FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a distribution device for a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a distribution device for a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 53 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the distribution device of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 53 (B) is the distribution of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the device. FIG. 54 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the distribution device of the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 54 (B) is the distribution of the gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the device. FIG. 55 (A) is a plan view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55 (B) is a plan view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55 (C) is a plan view of an electric support member of a game machine according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. 56 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A1-A1 cutting line of FIG. 56 (A). FIG. 57 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 57 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine according to the 18th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 57 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the support member, and FIG. 57 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 58 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 58 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A2-A2 cutting line of FIG. 58 (A). FIG. 59 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 21st embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 59 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 22nd embodiment of the present invention. figure. FIG. 60 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 60 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine according to the 24th embodiment of the present invention. The perspective view which shows the main part of the support member. FIG. 61 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 25th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 61 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine according to the 26th embodiment of the present invention. The perspective view which shows the main part of the support member. 62 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 27th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 62 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 28th embodiment of the present invention. figure. 63 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 29th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 63 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line of FIG. 63 (A). FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a distribution device for a gaming machine and an electric support member according to a thirtieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 64 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. FIG. 65 (A) is a view when the electric support member is in the standby state in FIG. 64 (A), and FIG. 65 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line of FIG. 65 (A). FIG. 66 (A) is a view when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 64 (A), and FIG. 66 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A4-A4 cutting line of FIG. 66 (A). The figure which shows the main part of the game board which includes the distribution device of the game machine which concerns on 31st Embodiment of this invention, and the electric tulip accessory device. FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a gaming board including a distribution device and an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a thirty-second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 68 (B) is an embodiment of the 33rd embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the main part of the game board including the distribution device of the game machine which concerns on the form, and the electric support member. FIG. 69 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a gaming board including a distribution device for a gaming machine according to a thirty-fourth embodiment of the present invention and an electric support member in a standby state, and FIG. 69 (B) is a diagram showing a main part of the gaming board. A perspective view of the main part of A). 70 (A) is a view showing a main part when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 70 (B) is a perspective view showing a main part of FIG. 70 (A). FIG. 71 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a distribution device and an electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 35th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 71 (B) is a main part of FIG. 71 (A). The figure which shows the part. The figure which shows the main part of the game board which includes the distribution device of the game machine which concerns on the 36th Embodiment of this invention, and the electric support member. FIG. 73 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a gaming board including a distribution device for a gaming machine according to a 37th embodiment of the present invention and an electric support member in a standby position, and FIG. 73 (B) is a diagram showing FIG. 73 (B). A perspective view of the main part of A). 74 (A) is a view showing the case where the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 73 (B), and FIG. 74 (B) is a plan view showing a modification of the electric support member according to the 37th embodiment of the present invention. .. FIG. 75 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of a game board including a distribution device and an electric support member of the gaming machine according to the 38th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 75 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 76 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A5-A5 cutting line of FIG. 75 (B), and FIG. 76 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line of FIG. 75 (B). FIG. 77 (A) is a diagram showing a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the standby position, and FIG. 77 (B) is a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the operating position. The figure which shows. The perspective view which shows the modification of the electric support member in 38th Embodiment of this invention. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 39th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming board including a distribution device for a gaming machine and a second starting port shown in FIG. 79. The figure which shows the distribution part of the distribution device of FIG. 80. The figure which shows the operation of the distribution part of the distribution device of FIG. 80. The figure which shows the operation of the distribution part of the distribution device of FIG. 80. The figure which shows the operation of the distribution part of the distribution device of FIG. 80. FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing an example of an electric support member that opens and closes the second starting port of FIG. 80. FIG. 86 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line of FIG. 80, and FIG. 86 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A7-A7 cutting line of FIG. 80. 87 (A) is a diagram when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 86 (A), and FIG. 87 (B) is a diagram when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 86 (A). The figure which shows an example of the lighting timing and the extinguishing timing of a synchronous lamp. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control device of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a synchronous lamp control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 90. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 25. The figure which shows an example of the main part of the sorting apparatus in 40th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the main part of the sorting apparatus in 41st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 96 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 42nd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 96 (B) is an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 43rd embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows. The figure which shows an example of the main part of the sorting apparatus in 44th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the main part of the sorting apparatus in the 45th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 99 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 46th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 99 (B) is an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 47th embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 48th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 101 (A) is a perspective view showing an example of a distribution member of the distribution device according to the 49th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 101 (B) is a main part of the distribution device according to the 49th embodiment of the present invention. A cross-sectional view showing an example. FIG. 102 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 50th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 102 (B) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the sorting device according to the 51st embodiment of the present invention. A cross-sectional view showing an example. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 52nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 104 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 53rd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 104 (B) is a diagram showing a torsion coil spring of FIG. 104 (A). The figure which shows an example of the main part of the modified example of the sorting apparatus in the 53rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the main part of the sorting apparatus in 54th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 107 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 55th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 107 (B) is an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 56th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 107 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 57th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 58th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 108 (B) is an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 59th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 60th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 109 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 61st embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 109 (B) is an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 62nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 109 (C) shows an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 63rd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 109 (D) shows the sorting device according to the 64th embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the main part. FIG. 110 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 65th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 110 (B) is an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 66th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 110 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 67th embodiment of the present invention. 111 (A) and 111 (B) are views showing an example of a main part of the distribution device according to the 68th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 111 (C) is a distribution according to the 69th embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the main part of the apparatus. 112 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 70th embodiment of the present invention, and FIGS. 112 (B) and 112 (C) are perspective views showing the spiral spring of FIG. 112 (A). figure. 113 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A8-A8 cutting line of FIG. 112 (A), and FIG. 113 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A9-A9 cutting line of FIG. 112 (A). The figure which shows an example of the main part of the sorting apparatus in the 71st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 115 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 72nd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 115 (B) is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting device shown in FIG. 115 (A). The figure which shows the operation of the sorting apparatus shown in FIG. 115 (A). The figure which shows an example of the main part of the sorting apparatus in 73rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the lighting timing and extinguishing timing of a synchronization lamp. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a distribution member control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a synchronous lamp control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. The figure which shows an example of the sorting apparatus in 74th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the lighting timing and extinguishing timing of a synchronization lamp. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a distribution member control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a synchronous lamp control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 25. FIG. 127 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a game board including a distribution device, an electric support member, and a second starting port according to the 75th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 127 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 128 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A10-A10 cutting line of FIG. 127 (A), and FIG. 128 (B) is a view of the case where the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 128 (A). FIG. 129 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of a game board including a distribution device, an electric support member, and a second starting port according to the 76th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 129 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the game board including the second starting port. The figure which shows the main part of the game board including the electric support member in the embodiment of 77. The figure which shows an example of the game board which includes the distribution device, the electric support member and the 2nd start port in 78th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the main part of the game board including the electric support member and the 2nd start port in 79th Embodiment of this invention. 132 (A) is a view showing an example of a main part of the game board including the electric support member and the second starting port according to the 80th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 132 (B) is a perspective view and a view of the electric support member. 132 (C) is a diagram when the electric support member is in the standby position in FIG. 131 (A). The figure which shows an example of the main part of the game board including the distribution device, the electric support member, and the 2nd start port in the 81st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 134 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the sorting device according to the 82nd embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 134 (B) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the sorting device according to the 83rd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 134 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the sorting device according to the 84th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 134 (D) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the sorting device according to the 85th embodiment of the present invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments 1 to 85 of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to help the present invention be understood. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 25.

[Outline configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as a spinning machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 10) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like that is executed when the player operates the operation button 20 in a predetermined specific period in the special figure game effect.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like, as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of operation by the player.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable to provide a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation of the touch key by a player. Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable that the panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting the player's touch operation on the panel 25 are provided. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the special figure game effect is reflected in the operation button effect and the like.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 launches the game ball toward the game area at regular intervals of, for example, once every 0.6 seconds. Drive controlled. The game ball may have a firing interval set according to the game state among a plurality of predetermined firing intervals. For example, the firing interval of the game ball may be different between the special figure game state and the jackpot game state. Specifically, in the special figure game state, the game balls are launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and in the jackpot game state, the launch interval of the game balls is longer than in the special figure game state, for example, even if the interval is set to 1 second. good.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used for storing the game balls surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin so that the player can visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and output audio in a game production or the like. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect depending on a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a left first starting opening 314L, a right first starting opening 314R, a second starting opening 315, and a variable winning opening 316b. Variable winning device 316, out port 317, first through gate 318, second through gate 319, variable display unit 34, main display unit 37, distribution device 35, and electric support member 36 (movable) which is an ordinary electric accessory. An accessory member) is provided. The left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R correspond to winning openings having the same function, and hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "first starting port 314". The first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 may be collectively referred to as "starting ports 314 and 315". Further, the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319 may be collectively referred to as "through gates 318, 319". The general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b correspond to winning openings having different functions from each other.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that did not enter the various winning openings (general winning opening 313, first starting opening 314, second starting opening 315 or variable winning opening 316b) It is discharged from the out port 317.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launching handle 22 by the player, and the gaming ball is launched from the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 to the gaming board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching the game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the description of FIG. 4, openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction are formed in the general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the out opening 317. ing. Then, the general winning opening 313, the left first starting opening 314L, the right first starting opening 314R, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b each have a ball entry sensor 313a, which can individually detect the passage of the game ball. 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 10) are provided. The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes.

The through gates 318 and 319 are gates through which the game ball can pass. The through gates 318 and 319 have ball entry sensors 318a and 319a (see FIG. 10) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gates 318 and 319. The ball entry sensors 318a and 319a are, for example, proximity sensors having through holes. When the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, a lottery is performed for each ordinary symbol as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory that supports winning the second starting port 315. .. However, the lottery for a normal symbol is not executed in the big hit game state. The result of the lottery per ordinary symbol is clearly indicated by the ordinary symbol which is a combination of turning on and off the LED lamp pair on the ordinary symbol display 373, which will be described later. Hereinafter, the "ordinary symbol" may be abbreviated as the "ordinary symbol". For example, the "ordinary symbol random number storage area" is an abbreviation for the "ordinary symbol reservation area".

Here, the first through gate 318 is provided in the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 arranged in the lower center of the game board 31, and the ball entry sensor 318a detects the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352. do. In the game board 31, the game ball may pass through the first through gate 318 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the left side of the game board 31, that is, when the ball is hitting left. The first through gate 318 may be on the upstream side of the electric support member 36 in the path leading to the right first starting port 314R in the distribution device 35, for example, in the vicinity of the introduction port 350 above the distribution member 38. It may be arranged. Further, it is conceivable that the first through gate 318 is arranged in the vicinity of the life nail (navel nail) 31H outside the sorting device 35, the life nail (navel nail) 31H is omitted, and the life nail (navel nail) is omitted. ) It is also conceivable to arrange it in the portion where 31H is provided. Further, it is sufficient that the ball entry sensor 318a can detect the passage of the game ball in the specific area (in the present embodiment, the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35), and it is not necessary to configure it as a through gate. In this case, it is conceivable to attach a mark indicating that the area is a specific area to the position of the ball entry sensor 318a on the distribution device 35.

On the other hand, the second through gate 319 is provided on the right side of the game board 31 above the right portion of the variable winning device 316. In the game board 31, the game ball may pass through the second through gate 319 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the ball is hitting to the right.

The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a (see FIG. 10) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, The detection result of 319a is input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a may be referred to as winning. The ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of a game ball by another detection method. It may be any sensor.

In addition to the variable winning opening 316b, the variable winning device 316 has an opening / closing door 316c for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316b. The opening / closing door 316c is opened / closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the variable winning device 316, the opening / closing door 316c allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316b, and the opening / closing door 316c closes to limit the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316b. Will be done. The variable winning device 316 is arranged on the right side of the game board 31, and the opening / closing door 316c is opened in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the player shifts to the jackpot game state when the lottery result in the jackpot game is a jackpot, the player hits the right in the round game in which the opening / closing door 316c opens, and the game is played to the variable winning opening 316b. You can win a ball. As a result, the player can obtain more prize balls in the jackpot game than in the special figure game.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the left first starting port 314L, the right first starting opening 314R or the second starting opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314La, 314Ra or the entry sensor 315a, the main A big hit lottery is performed by the control unit 331. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 313, the left first starting opening 314L, the right first starting opening 314R, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b is the winning sensor 313a, When detected by 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first starting port 314 or the second starting opening 315 is 3, and the number of winning balls is entered into the variable winning opening 316b. If so, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and the variable winning opening 316b is opened, which will be described later. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 5, 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, the big hit lottery is executed as described above. Then, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 2R normal jackpot gaming state, a 2R probability variation jackpot gaming state, a 5R normal jackpot gaming state, a 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, and a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. In the 2R normal jackpot game state and the 2R probability variation jackpot game state, the variable winning opening 316b is opened twice until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls are won in the variable winning opening 316b. It is a gaming state including an opening / closing execution mode to be performed. The 5R normal jackpot game state and the 5R probability variation jackpot game state are game states in which the round game is performed 5 times in the open / close execution mode, and the 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state in which the round game is performed 16 times in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, it is possible to acquire the same level of game balls in any of the round games in any game state, and from the point of view of the game balls that can be acquired, the larger the number of round games in the open / close execution mode, the more the player becomes a player. It is an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variation jackpot is the most advantageous for the player in terms of the number of game balls that can be acquired, followed by the 5R normal jackpot gaming state and the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state. Yes, the 2R normal jackpot gaming state and the 2R probability variation jackpot gaming state are the most disadvantageous to the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display and the special figure according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the ball entering the first start port 314 or the second start port 315. Various displays such as a game effect display are performed. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, at the upper or lower portion of the symbol display unit 341, or at the left or right portion. The sub-display unit may be movable between a position that covers the symbol display unit 341 and a position that does not cover the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23.

For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-symbols and there are nine types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the special symbol game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols stops after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. NS. More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols fluctuate along the preset fluctuation directions (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the fluctuations of the plurality of main symbols are stopped in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

The main display unit 37 is arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31, and includes a first special symbol display 371, a second special symbol display 372, a normal symbol display 373, and a hold number display 374. The main display unit 37 may be arranged at the lower left or lower right of the game board 31.

The first special symbol display 371 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for winning a prize in the first starting port 314. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the first special symbol display 371 is referred to as the first special symbol. It should be noted that, in order to display the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the winning of the first starting port 314, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed after the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 371. It is called a design game.

The second special symbol display 372 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for winning a prize in the second starting port 315. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the second special symbol display 372 is referred to as the second special symbol. It should be noted that, in order to display the lottery result in the big hit lottery, the winning of the second starting port 315 is displayed by changing the second special symbol and then stopping it, which is called the second special symbol game.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In addition, "special symbol" may be abbreviated as "special symbol". For example, "1st special figure" and "2nd special figure" are abbreviations for "1st special symbol" and "2nd special symbol", respectively, and "1st special figure game" and "2nd special figure game". "Is an abbreviation for" first special symbol game "and" second special symbol game ", respectively. Further, the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372 are not limited to the 7-segment display, and for example, a group of LEDs in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a linear shape, a circular shape, an arc shape, a matrix shape, or the like. May be.

The ordinary symbol display 373 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory) in the main control unit 331 is operated (whether or not the support state is set) in response to the winning of the through gates 318 and 319. Clarify the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol display 373 includes a pair of LED lamps, and the lottery result is clearly indicated by an ordinary symbol which is a combination of turning on and off of these LED lamps. The ordinary symbol display 373 may be configured by another display including a 7-segment LED or the like instead of the LED lamp pair.

In the hold number indicator 374, the hold number N of the variation display of the special symbol generated by winning the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 is a plurality of LED lamps in a row (8 in this embodiment). It is displayed by the number of lights of. Such display processing for the reserved number N is executed based on the reserved number N stored in the special figure reserved number storage area NA in the special figure reserved storage area 412b of the RAM 412, which will be described later with reference to FIG.

The distribution device 35 is provided in the lower center of the game board 31. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, the distribution device 35 includes an introduction port 350, a distribution member 38, a first passage 351 and a second passage 352. In this distribution device 35, the game ball 99 that has entered through the introduction port 350 is in the left direction (counterclockwise direction of FIGS. 4 and 5 (A)) and the right direction (FIGS. 4 and 5) of the distribution member 38. By rotating in the clockwise direction of 5 (A)), the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 are alternately distributed.

The introduction port 350 is a portion that allows the game ball to enter the distribution device 35. The introduction port 350 is arranged directly below the life nail (navel nail) 31H of the game board 31. Therefore, a game ball that has passed through the life nail 31H is introduced into the introduction port 350. A game ball is guided to the life nail 31H mainly from the windmill 31F by the road nail 31M. Further, above the life nail 31H, a guide portion 31E for guiding the game ball that has fallen to the stage 31S via the warp opening 31W provided on the left side of the game board 31 to the life nail 31H is provided. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen on the stage 31S is also guided to the life nail 31H. Here, the wind turbine 31F and the warp port 31W are provided on the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the launch handle 22 is operated so that the game balls sent to the game board 31 pass through the left side of the game board 31. A game ball can be introduced into the distribution device 35 via the 350. In the game machine 10, the launch handle 22 is operated so that the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, so-called right-handed hit, the game ball is placed in the variable winning opening 316b. The nails are arranged on the life nail 31H so that the game balls do not collect, and in the case of right-handed striking, the introduction of the game balls from the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, it is easier to receive a big hit lottery by using the distribution device 35 than by right-handed hitting, and left-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than right-handed hitting (in this embodiment, modes A to C described later). (See FIG. 13 (B))), it is encouraged to play the game by left-handed.

The distribution member 38 distributes the game ball introduced from the introduction port 350 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352. The first passage 351 is open downward, and the game balls distributed to the first passage 351 are discharged in the direction toward the left first starting port 314L provided directly below the first passage 351. The second passage 352 is open downward, and the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is discharged in the direction toward the right first starting port 314R provided directly below the second passage 352.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the distribution member 38 has a rotation shaft 381, a partition 382, a ball receiving guide piece 383, and an eccentric portion 384. In the distribution member 38, the partition 382, the ball receiving guide piece 383, and the eccentric portion 384 rotate integrally around the rotation shaft 381. The section 382 extends perpendicularly to the ball receiving guide piece 383 from the center of the ball receiving guide piece 383. The ball receiving guide piece 383 has a left ball receiving guide piece 385 on the left side of the section 382 and a right ball receiving guide piece 386 on the right side of the section 382.

Further, the eccentric portion 384 changes the center of gravity of the distribution member 38, and has a moving member 387 and an accommodating portion 388 for accommodating the moving member 387. The moving member 387 is, for example, a sphere, a cylinder, or the like, and moves the accommodating portion 388 left and right according to the posture of the distribution member 38. When the partition 382 is tilted to the right with respect to the vertical direction (solid lines in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the sorting member 38 has the moving member 387 as the accommodating portion 388. The center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentric to the right side of the center by the moving member 387. As a result, the distribution member 38 can maintain the right tilted posture. On the other hand, in the distribution member 38, when the partition 382 is in a left tilted posture tilted to the left with respect to the vertical direction (states of virtual lines in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the moving member 387 has a moving member 387. It is located on the left side of the accommodating portion 388, and the center of gravity of the distribution member 38 is eccentric to the left side of the center. As a result, the distribution member 38 can maintain the left tilted posture.

In such a distribution member 38, the game ball 99 entered in the distribution device 35 is placed between the section 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385, and between the section 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386. It is accepted by one of the intervals. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6 (A) and 6 (B), when the distribution member 38 is in the right-tilted posture, the game ball 99 is received between the section 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6 (C) and 6 (D), when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99 between the partition 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385, the load of the game ball is increased. Rotates to the left (counterclockwise) and changes to a left tilted posture. As a result, the game ball 99 received by the section 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385 is guided to the left side (first passage 351 side) along the left ball receiving guiding piece 385.

As shown in FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B), the game ball 99 guided to the left along the left ball receiving guide piece 385 falls along the first passage 351 and falls in the first passage 351. You can easily win a prize in the left first starting port 314L located directly below. In FIG. 4 and the like, the first passage 351 is linear, but the first passage 351 is non-linear, such as a bent shape, a curved shape, an inclined shape, or a combination of two or more of these. It may be. In the case of such a non-linear first passage 351, the left first starting port 314L is a position where a game ball passing through the first passage 351 can easily win a prize according to the position and shape of the exit of the first passage 351. Placed in.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the distribution member 38 is in the left inclined posture, the game ball 99 is received between the partition 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99, the distribution member 38 rotates to the right (clockwise direction) due to the load of the game ball and changes to a right tilted posture. As a result, the game ball 99 received by the section 382 and the right ball receiving guide piece 386 is guided to the right along the right ball receiving guiding piece 386 and falls along the second passage 352. At this time, the game ball 99 passes through the first through gate 318. The fact that the game ball 99 has passed through the first through gate 318 is detected by the ball entry sensor 318a (see FIG. 10). As a result, an opportunity is given to perform a lottery for each ordinary symbol as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory), and when the lottery result in the lottery for this ordinary symbol is a win, the electric support member 36 Is activated. The probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will be a win, and the operating time of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win will depend on the game state (mode) as described later. (See FIGS. 13 (B) to 13 (D)).

As shown in FIGS. 8 (B) and 8 (C), the game ball 99 guided to the right along the right ball receiving guide piece 386 falls along the second passage 352, and the second passage 352 It moves toward the right first starting port 314R arranged directly below.

Here, the second starting port 315 is arranged between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. The second starting port 315 is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 formed between the left first starting opening 314L and the right first starting opening 314R, and the game ball 99 that has fallen into the ball receiving portion 391. Wins the second starting port 315. Further, a plate-shaped electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory is arranged between the second passage 352 and the right first starting port 314R. The electric support member 36 limits the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31, and also to the second starting port 315. The operating position (second position) that supports the winning of the game ball, and the standby position that limits the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 and allows the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R (the second position). It is moved in the front-rear direction at the opening 360 provided in the game board 31 from the first position).

As shown in FIG. 8C, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, since the electric support member 36 does not protrude from the game board 31, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is electric. Since it is not limited by the support member 36, the game ball falling along the second passage 352 can easily win a prize in the right first starting port 314R. The design of the second passage 352 can be changed in the same manner as the first passage 351, and the arrangement of the right first starting port 314R is also appropriately changed according to the shape of the second passage 352 and the like.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the electric support member 36 protrudes from the game board 31, and the first right start port Since the 314R is closed by the opening / closing portion 362 of the electric support member 36, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is restricted. When the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 that has fallen along the second passage 352 is guided above the ball receiving portion 391 by the guide portion 363 of the electric support member 36, and then the ball receiving portion 391. It falls to the part 391. The game ball 99 that has fallen into the ball receiving portion 391 wins a prize at the second starting port 315. Further, a game ball that flows down from above the stage 310 and the electric support member 36 provided below the variable winning device 316 and is received by the electric support member 36 can also win a prize in the second starting port 315. That is, in the present embodiment, both the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 are second by one electric support member 36. The ball can be put into the starting port 315.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 9 (C), the electric support member 36 is left between the left side of the stage 310 provided below the variable winning device 316 and above the right first starting port 314R. It is a plate-shaped member that is arranged downward. Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, a pair of wall portions 361 projecting above the edge portion in the width direction are provided. These wall portions 361 function as guides for guiding the game ball 99 from the upstream end on the right side (upstream side) to the downstream end on the left side (downstream side). A plurality of delay guides 364 (four in the present embodiment) are provided in a region on the left side (downstream side) of the central portion of the electric support member 36. The plurality of delay guides 364 extend in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361, and the tip portion is formed in an inclined shape located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. Therefore, the plurality of delay guides 364 (delay portions) move the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) in a meandering path back and forth. Here, when the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from obtaining more profit than planned, which will be described later.

The configuration of the electric support member 36 can be changed in various ways. For example, the delay portion of the electric support member 36 is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 are arranged in a staggered manner, and the electric support member 36 does not necessarily have to be a plate-shaped member. A typical modification of the electric support member 36 will be described later as the 13th to 29th embodiments with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63.

By the way, as described above, the electric support member 36 hits a normal symbol that is performed when the passage of the game ball at the through gates 318 and 319 is detected in the special figure game state in which the special figure game is executed. It is activated when the lottery result in the lottery is a win. Further, the operating time of the electric support member 36 (the time when the electric support member 36 is not in the standby position or the time from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the start of return) is when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. The operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is short (for example, 0), which is determined according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state (modes A to E (see FIG. 13B) described later). .6 seconds), in modes D and E, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds). The operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C is such that the game ball passing through the second passage 352 can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36, while the electric support member 36 is electrically operated from the stage 310 when hitting to the right. The time during which the game ball moved to the support member 36 and the game ball guided by the first retract guide nail 393 and the second retract guide nail 394 described later and received by the electric support member 36 cannot win the second starting port 315 (for example, 0). It is set to .6 seconds). For one or both of the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319, when the passage of the game ball is detected, the electric support member 36 may be operated without performing a lottery for a normal symbol.

Here, the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed is distributed to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, and the game ball in the first passage 351 wins the left first starting port 314L, and the first The game ball in the two passages 352 falls toward the right first starting port 314R. The game ball falling from the second passage 352 enters the right first starting port 314R if the electric support member 36 is not operating, and if the electric support member 36 is activated, the second starting is performed by the support by the electric support member 36. It is guided to the mouth 315. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the distribution device 35, such as when hitting right, does not win the first starting port 314 because it is not introduced into the distribution device 35, and the electric support member. If the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (modes A to C) even when the electric support member 36 is received by the operation, the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position before the game ball reaches the second starting port 315. However, the second starting port 315 does not win a prize. Specifically, since the electric support member 36 has a plate shape extending between the stage 310 and the right first starting port 314R and has a delay guide 364, it has moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36. The time for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36 is longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C. Therefore, in modes A to C in which the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, the player collects the game balls on the life nail 31H and uses the distribution device 35 to use the first start port 314 or the second start port 315. Left-handed is encouraged to win the game ball. On the other hand, in modes D and E, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is longer than the time it takes for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 that has moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36. Therefore, if the game ball is passed through the second through gate 319 and the game ball is won in the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36, the game ball may be won in the first start port 314. It is more advantageous for the player than using 35. Therefore, in modes D and E in which the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, right-handed striking is encouraged.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one provided with a distribution device that alternately distributes game balls to a first starting portion and a second starting portion having a function different from that of the first starting portion. However, when the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start portion and the second start portion by the distribution device, there is a concern that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is lowered.

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a distribution device 35 that alternately distributes game balls to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, and unlike the conventional gaming machine, the first A first starting port 314 having the same function is provided below at each exit of the passage 351 and the second passage 352. Further, in the distribution device 35, the first through gate 318 is provided only in the second passage 352 of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Then, when the passage of the game ball through the second passage 352 is detected by the through gate 318, a lottery is performed for each ordinary symbol as to whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated by the MPU 41. Therefore, when a left-handed strike is performed in order to use the distribution device 35, the game ball is guided to the left first starting port 314L by the first passage 351 and the game ball wins a prize in the left first starting port 314L. The second passage 352 may lead the game ball to the right first starting port 314R, and the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36 may guide the game ball to the second starting port 315. Further, when a right-handed hit is made, the game ball does not win a prize in the distribution device 35, and the electric support member 36 is operated when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, so that the second through gate 35 is operated. The game ball may be guided to the starting port 315. As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the monotonous one in which the gaming balls are distributed to two types of starting portions (first starting portion and second starting portion) having different functions as in the conventional gaming machine. Differently, by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, it is possible to achieve a plurality of states in which the game ball can win the first start port 314 or the second start port 315, and the game becomes monotonous. It is difficult and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine, the first starting portion is arranged at a position where a prize can be won when hitting left, while the second starting portion is located on the right side of the gaming board together with ordinary electric accessories such as a through gate and an electric support member. Many of them are placed in. In such a gaming machine, a game ball can be won in the first starting portion when a left-handed hit is made, whereas a gaming ball is not won in the second starting portion located on the right side of the gaming board. Therefore, when a right-handed hit is made, the game ball can be won in the second starting portion arranged on the right side of the game board, but the game ball is not won in the first starting portion. In general, the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, which is triggered by the winning of the game ball in the second starting portion, is more advantageous than the winning of the game ball in the first starting portion. For example, in the jackpot in the jackpot lottery that is performed when the game ball wins the second starting portion, the ratio of the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, such as the jackpot with a large number of rounds in the jackpot game, is high. In a gaming machine in which the function of the starting part that can win a prize differs between the case of left-handed and the case of right-handed, the jackpot winning probability and the winning probability per ordinary symbol are low as the gaming state, and the special figure fluctuation time and the normal figure fluctuation. It has a normal mode with a long time and a time-saving probability variation mode in which the jackpot winning probability and the normal symbol hit probability are high and the special figure fluctuation time and the normal figure fluctuation time are short. Further, in the normal mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is low and the fluctuation time of the normal figure is long, but also the support time of the normal electric accessory in the case of hitting the normal symbol is short. Therefore, in the normal mode, the support time of the normal electric accessory for winning the game ball to the second starting portion triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate is short, and the support of the ordinary electric accessory is infrequent. You can only receive it at. That is, in the normal mode, not only can you hardly receive the benefit of the support of the normal electric accessory even if you hit right, but you can not expect the game ball to win the first starting part, so you can play the game with left hit. It is a good idea to do it. On the other hand, in the time probability variation mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is high and the fluctuation time of the normal figure is short, but also the support time of the normal electric accessory in the case of hitting the normal symbol is long. Therefore, in the time saving probability variation mode, the support time of the ordinary electric accessory for winning the game ball to the second starting part triggered by the passage of the game ball to the through gate is long, and the support of the ordinary electric accessory is high. You can receive it frequently. That is, in the time saving probability variation mode, it is better to win a prize in the second starting portion by hitting right than in the case where the game ball is won in the first starting portion by hitting left. In other words, by hitting the left side in the normal mode, the game ball is won in the first starting part and the first special figure game is performed, while by hitting the right side in the time saving probability variation mode, the second special figure game is performed. The profit for the player is maximized. Further, as the probability variation mode, in addition to the time saving probability variation mode, there is also a gaming machine having a so-called latent probability variation mode in which the probability variation mode is not specified. The latent probability variation mode has a high probability of winning a big hit like the time saving probability variation mode, but generally, the support of the ordinary electric accessory is the same as the normal mode. That is, in the latent probability variation mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol with respect to the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball to the through gate is long, and the winning probability of the normal electric accessory operation in the normal symbol lottery is low. It is possible to receive the support of the ordinary electric accessory for the winning of the game ball to the starting part only in a low time and infrequently. Therefore, in the latent probability variation mode, it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the second starting portion when a right-handed hit is made. Therefore, as in the normal mode, a game ball is won in the first starting portion by a left-handed hit. It is encouraged to play special games. Not limited to the normal mode and the latent probability change mode, in a gaming state where left-handedness is encouraged, it is preferable to eliminate the advantage of right-handedness such as making it difficult to receive support from a normal electric accessory.

On the other hand, although the gaming machine 10 is provided with the distribution device 35, it is not clearly specified that the special figure gaming state is the probability variation mode (high probability mode) as in the conventional gaming machine, and left-handed pachinko is encouraged. The mode C corresponding to the latent probability change is included, and in the mode C, the electric support member 36 operates for a short time when the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a hit. Therefore, even in the gaming machine 10, it is preferable that the gaming ball does not win a prize in the second starting port 315 even when the electric support member 36 is operated by right-handed striking in mode C. Then, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay portions are provided on the electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory. Here, when the electric support member 36 is not provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay portions, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 is from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) in a linear path. Move in the direction toward. On the other hand, when the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36 as in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 meanders from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (upstream side) of the electric support member 36. Move toward the downstream side). Therefore, by providing the delay guide 364 on the electric support member 36, the moving distance of the electric support member 36 is increased, and the residence time of the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36 can be secured for a long time. The time required for the game ball to reach the second starting port 315 can be made longer than the operating time of the electric support member 36 in mode C. As a result, when the special figure gaming state is the above-mentioned mode C, and when the left-handed strike is encouraged as in mode C, that is, the mode in which the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short. In this case, even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 by the player hitting right, the electric support member 36 is before the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Since it returns to the standby state, it becomes difficult to make the game ball win the second starting port 315. As a result, when a hitting method (right-handed) other than the recommended hitting method (left-handed) is performed, it becomes difficult for the game ball to win a prize at the second starting port 315. That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of performing a right-handed strike in a gaming state in which a left-handed strike is encouraged, the player can be made to actively perform a left-handed strike.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, a plurality of nails are formed above the electric support member 36 between the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the distribution device 35. A first evacuation guide nail 393 and a second evacuation guide nail 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided. These evacuation guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36, which is the right region of the distribution device 35, in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. That is, the evacuation guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394 are provided, the game ball flowing down from above can be received at a position away from the second start port 315 of the electric support member 36, and the game ball can be received. It is possible to secure a long time until the second starting port 315 is reached. As a result, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 in modes A to C, as in the case where the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36. Since it is possible to prevent the second starting port 315 from reaching the second starting port 315 in a short period of time, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the electric support member 36 when a non-recommended striking method is performed. Further, in the game machine 10, since a large number of nails are driven into the game board 31, it is possible to provide the first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394 when driving these nails. Become. Therefore, when the electric support member 36 operates for a short time while suppressing the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the evacuation guide portion (first evacuation guide nail 393 and the second evacuation guide nail 394). It is possible to make it difficult to receive support by the electric support member 36.

As the evacuation guide portion, instead of the evacuation guide nails 393 and 394, it is conceivable to adopt a block-shaped member formed by resin molding, metal processing, a combination thereof, or the like.

On the other hand, when the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gates 318 and 319 in the mode D and the mode E is a win, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6). Seconds). For example, in the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318, the distance from the first through gate 318 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36 is short, and the electric support member 36 is operated for a short time as in mode C. However, since it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 315, the second starting port 315 is also won in modes D and E in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the second through gate 319, or the game ball that is launched before and after the game ball, has a long distance from the second through gate 319 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36, but the electric support. Since the operating time of the member 36 is long, even if the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay portion 364, the second starting port 315 wins a prize. When the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time in this way, not only the game ball that falls through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 but also the game ball that flows down the right region of the distribution device 35. The game ball that has fallen to the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b can be guided to the second starting opening 315 by the electric support member 36. However, the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 is in a gaming state in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time because the game ball is alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 as described above. Left-handed striking in modes D and E cannot fully benefit from the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in the mode D and the mode E in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time, the player passes the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the game board 31, and the electric support member 36 is operated. In order to activate 36, it is encouraged to operate the launch handle 22 to play a right-handed game.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing the ball game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

As shown in FIG. 10, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to the control device and the driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, the main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 has a general winning opening 313, a left first starting opening 314L, a right first starting opening 314R, and a second starting based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a. It is determined whether or not the ball has entered the mouth 315, the variable winning mouth 316b, and the through gates 318 and 319. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a fluctuation pattern command and a shift command to the voice lamp control device 5.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. When the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started, the variation pattern command is based on the information stored in the special symbol reservation storage area 412b described later, and the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. 22 is performed. It is set in step S1808 in. The fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The shift command controls the voice lamp that the special figure winning / failing information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the 1st special figure holding area RE1 to the 8th special figure holding area RE8 is shifted when the number of holdings N decreases. This is a command to notify the device 5. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 ms), and the MPU 41 has a main timer described later each time a rising edge (or falling edge) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the interrupt process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery, the setting of the variable display time, and the like by using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412 and the special figure reservation storage area 412b.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the loss type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a is used for setting initial values of a random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol used for lottery as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory and a random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. The initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply abbreviated as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and after reaching a preset maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 738, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the counter value (random number value) at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. On the other hand, when the counter value (random number value) is acquired, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is set as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is a low probability mode (mode A, mode B and mode D described later) in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low based on the win / loss table stored in the win / loss table storage area in ROM 411. (See FIG. 13 (B))), and two types are set corresponding to the high probability mode (mode C and mode E described later (see FIG. 13 (B))) having a high probability of becoming a big hit. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode hit / fail table corresponding to a low-probability mode, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to a high-probability mode. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (B), the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit in the low probability mode (mode A, mode B and mode D) is 3 (0 to 0). 2), and the jackpot probability is 3/739 (= about 1 / 246.3). On the other hand, in the high probability mode (mode C and mode E), the number of counter values (random values) for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 30 (0 to 29), and the jackpot probability is 10 in the low probability mode. It is 30/739 (= about 1 / 24.6), which is double. Here, in the low-probability mode winning / failing table and the high-probability mode winning / failing table, three random number values (0 to 3) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot are common, but it is also conceivable that they are not common. Further, the random value that wins the jackpot does not have to be a continuous value, and may be a part or all discrete values. If the counter value (random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the counter value (random number value) at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be missed.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b. In the game machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is individually set for each jackpot of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411. ing. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a jackpot for winning a game ball to the first starting port 314 (first special figure jackpot) and a jackpot for winning a game ball to the second starting port 315 (second special figure jackpot). ) And the jackpot type are distributed differently. Here, FIGS. 12 (C) and 12 (D) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol game triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 314, the jackpot type is divided into either a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot. The number of random numbers that become 2R probability variation jackpots is 15 from 0 to 14, and the number of random numbers that become 2R normal jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. Does not exist. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 12 (D), in the case of a jackpot in the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second starting port 315, it is either a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot. It is sorted. The number of random numbers for 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers for 16R probability variation jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers for 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. Yes, there are no random numbers that are 2R normal jackpots and 2R probability variation jackpots. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of the probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) in the first special symbol game is 75% (15/20), and the probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game (5R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot). The probability of is 75% (15/20). That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probabilistic machine in which the probability of the probabilistic jackpot is the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the first special figure jackpot and the second special figure jackpot differ in the distribution of the jackpot type, but the number of round games in the jackpot game is that the second special figure jackpot is the first special figure jackpot. In terms of the number of round games, the second special figure jackpot is more advantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, a game ball is won at the first starting port 314, which is an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game, and a game ball is entered at the second starting port 315, which is an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game. An individual jackpot type distribution table is set for each of the prizes, and the jackpot type distribution probability differs depending on whether the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315. However, it is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probabilistic machine, and may be configured as a gaming machine having specifications different from those of the so-called limit machine, ST machine, V-ST machine, type 2 type mixer, and the like. .. An example in which the gaming machine 10 is applied to a limit machine, an ST machine, a V-ST machine, and a type 2 mixer will be described later as the third to sixth embodiments with reference to FIGS. 28 to 50. ..

Then, in the MPU 41, based on the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, It is determined whether it is a 5R normal jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot, or a miss. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a miss for the winning of the first starting port 314, and the second starting port 315. It is determined whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a miss.

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R probability variable jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened is repeated twice is executed. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened is repeated five times is executed. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode (game state) according to the jackpot type. Here, FIG. 13A is a mode transition table that defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 13A, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot, the mode B is entered after the jackpot game is completed. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the mode C is entered after the jackpot game is completed. When the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the mode D is entered after the jackpot game is completed. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode E is entered after the jackpot game is completed. That is, since the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot in the winning of the first starting ports 314L and 314R is 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 12C), the winning of the first starting ports 314L and 314R In the jackpot, the mode B or mode C is entered after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, since the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot in the winning of the second starting port 315 is 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (see FIG. 12 (D)), the winning of the second starting port 315 In the jackpot, the game shifts to mode D or mode E after the jackpot game is completed.

Here, FIG. 13B shows the mode types (modes A to E) in the special figure game state in which the special symbol changes depending on the winning of the game ball to the start ports 314L, 314R, 315 in the game machine 10. It is a mode data table that defines the contents.

Mode A is a mode that shifts when the upper limit number of special figure games is completed, that is, when the time reduction is completed in mode B or mode D, which is a limited number of time reduction mode described later, and is clearly described from the explanation described later. However, it is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player among the modes A to E. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the gaming state is set to mode A even when the contents of the RAM 412 are cleared when the main power is turned on. The gaming state when the contents of the RAM 412 are not cleared when the main power is turned on becomes the gaming state stored in the RAM 412 when the main power is turned off.

Mode A (first game state) is a jackpot low probability mode in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). Will be. Further, the mode A is a non-time saving mode in which the variation display time of the normal symbol is not shortened (time reduction) and the variation display time of the normal symbol is the normal variation display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 passes through the position of the electric support member 36, the normal symbol is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery becomes a hit. Even if the electric support member 36 operates, it cannot be expected that the second starting port 315 will be won by the support of the electric support member 36. Further, the mode A is a low-probability mode per ordinary symbol in which the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed based on the low-probability normal symbol low-probability winning / failing table in which the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary symbol is low. Therefore, in mode A, the first special figure game is executed except for irregular cases such as the game ball accidentally passing through the second passage 352 at the operation timing of the electric support member 36, and the second special figure game is executed. Is practically not executed.

Here, FIG. 13C shows an example of a normal symbol low-probability hit / miss table. In the normal symbol low probability hit / fail table shown in FIG. 13 (C), one counter value (see FIG. 11) of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 (see FIG. 11) consisting of 200 counter values (random numbers) from 0 to 199. 199) corresponds to the winning of the lottery result in the ordinary symbol lottery, and the remaining 199 counter values (0 to 198) correspond to the deviation of the lottery result. That is, in the normal symbol low probability winning / failing table, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will be won is set to 0.5% (1/200). Therefore, in mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol will be won is low, and the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol will be won, and the second starting port 315 will be supported by the electric support member 36. Expectations for winning a game ball are low. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the ordinary winning lottery based on the ordinary symbol low probability winning / failing table will be won is especially if there is a clear probability difference from the probability that the lottery result based on the ordinary symbol high probability winning / failing table will be won. There is no limit, and the probability that the lottery result will be won may be 0%, and it is also conceivable that the lottery per symbol is not normally performed in mode A. Further, in mode A, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the lottery for the normal symbol is not performed. It is also possible to make it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), in the mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a win. Then, as described above, above the electric support member 36, the evacuation guide nail 393, which guides the game ball flowing down from above the electric support member 36 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35 (second starting port 315). 394 (see FIGS. 4 and 5 (A)) is provided. Therefore, in the mode A, even if the lottery result in the normal symbol hit lottery is a hit as described above, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is for the game ball that flows down the right side of the game board 31 by right-handed hitting. In the case of right-handed striking, it is difficult for the electric support member 36 to support the winning of the second starting port 315. In addition to this, since the probability that the lottery result in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol lottery will be a win is low, in mode A, the game ball wins the second starting port 315, which is distributed to the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Can hardly be expected. Further, in the case of right-handed hitting, not only the support of the electric support member 36 cannot be expected, but also the introduction of the game ball into the distribution device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, in mode A, the game ball is caused to flow down on the left side of the game board 31 by left-handed, the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35, and a big hit lottery is received by winning the game ball to the first starting ports 314L and 314R. Is encouraged.

In this way, in mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will be a hit is low, and the operation timing of the electric support member 36 is different from the passing timing of the game ball. Therefore, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in mode A, most of the jackpot lottery is performed for winning a game ball in the first starting ports 314L and 314R, and most of the jackpot types in mode A are 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variable jackpot. As a result, the mode A is extremely easy to shift to the mode B or the mode C after the end of the jackpot game, and does not substantially shift to the mode D and the mode E.

Mode B (fourth game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than mode A. be.

Similar to mode A, mode B is a jackpot low probability mode in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). .. Further, unlike the mode A, the mode B is a time-saving mode in which the variation display time of the normal symbol is a shortened variation display time shorter than the normal variation display time (for example, 30 seconds) in the non-time reduction mode. The mode is continued until the maximum number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 50 times). That is, although the mode B is a time-saving mode in which an upper limit is set for the number of times of time-saving, it is a mode more advantageous than the mode A because it is a time-saving mode. Here, the shortened variation display time is set to a time during which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can win a prize in the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, and the first through gate 318 and the electric support member 36 are set. It is set according to the positional relationship (distance, etc.) with and the operating time of the electric support member 36, and is set to, for example, about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. In this embodiment, the effect means of the symbol display unit 341 or the like may execute an effect that clearly indicates that the mode is B (time saving mode). In this case, the production may be performed by the production means as a chance zone suggesting the possibility of a probability change. If the maximum number of special figure games are played in mode B without the lottery result in the big hit lottery becoming a big hit, the mode A is entered.

Further, in mode B, the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed based on the high probability winning / failing table of the ordinary symbol, which has a high probability that the lottery result in the lottery per ordinary symbol will be won. be. Here, FIG. 13 (D) shows an example of a normal symbol high probability hit / miss table. In the normal symbol high probability hit / fail table shown in FIG. 13 (D), 199 (0 to 198) of the counter values (random number values) of the normal symbol per random number counter C4 (see FIG. 11) are selected by lottery per normal symbol. Corresponding to the hit of the lottery result, the remaining one (199) corresponds to the deviation of the lottery result. That is, in the normal symbol high probability hit / fail table, the counter value (random value) of hit and miss is opposite to that of the normal symbol low probability hit / fail table, and the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery will be won is 99.5. It is set to% (199/200). Therefore, in the mode B, it can be expected that the game ball wins the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 due to the fact that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a win. The probability that the lottery result in the ordinary winning lottery based on the ordinary symbol low probability winning / failing table will be won does not have to be 99.5%, and may be another percentage. Further, in mode B, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the lottery for the normal symbol is not performed. It is also possible to make it. Further, in mode B, the winning probability in the lottery per normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be set to 100%, and the normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318. The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in mode B, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%: 50. %become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), in the mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds) when the lottery is won for the normal symbol as in the mode A, and the right-handed strike is performed. It cannot be expected that the game ball will win the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 of the above. Therefore, in mode B, left-handed strike is encouraged as in mode A.

In this way, in mode B, since the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, left-handed strike is encouraged instead of right-handed strike, but unlike mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery will be won. Therefore, with respect to the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, it can be expected that the game ball will win the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. Specifically, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 as described above, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. The game ball distributed to the first passage 351 wins a prize in the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 passes through the first through gate 318. At this time, in the mode B, the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed based on the high probability hit / miss table of the ordinary symbol per ordinary symbol, triggered by the passage of the game ball through the first through gate 318. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 and passing through the first through gate 318 is supported by the electric support member 36 with a high probability (99.5% in the present embodiment) and reaches the second starting port 315. Win a prize. If the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is out of order, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 wins the right first starting port 314R.

Then, in mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning a game ball to the left first starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of winning a game ball to the second starting port 315. On the other hand, there is a 0.25% probability that the game ball will win the right first starting port 314R. As a result, in the jackpot in mode B, about half (50.25%) become 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot, and shift to mode B or mode C after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed. In addition, in the jackpot in mode B, about half (49.75%) becomes 5R normal jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to mode D after the jackpot game for 5R normal jackpot ends, and 5R probability variable jackpot and After the jackpot game for the 16R probability variation jackpot is completed, the mode E is entered (see FIG. 13 (A)). That is, in mode B, the support of the electric support member 36 allows about half of the special figure games to receive a big hit lottery for winning the game ball to the second starting port 315. It can be expected that the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot will be won, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed, the mode D and the mode E in which the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long will be entered as described later. Therefore, in mode B, unlike mode A, there is a possibility that the player wins an advantageous jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot game for the advantageous jackpot, the mode shifts to a mode that is more advantageous than mode B. In terms of points, it is a mode (gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the mode A.

As described above, the mode C is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R probability variation jackpot game (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the mode A and the mode B. Mode C is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variation game state) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12B). In this respect, it is a mode (gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the mode A and the mode B. Further, the mode C is a time saving mode like the mode B, but unlike the mode B, the time saving mode is continued until the lottery result in the big hit lottery becomes a big hit. That is, the mode C is a jackpot guarantee time saving mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, and is also a mode (gaming state) that is more advantageous than the mode B in this respect. In this embodiment, the mode C (high probability mode) is not clearly indicated in the production by the production means such as the symbol display unit 341 for the special figure game or the jackpot game. That is, the mode C is a so-called latent probability change mode. Of course, in mode C, it may be clearly indicated in the effect means that it is a high-probability mode, and as in mode B, it is clearly indicated in the effect means that it is a time-saving mode, suggesting the possibility of probabilistic change. As a chance zone, the production may be performed by the production means.

Further, in mode C, as in mode B, the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed based on the normal symbol high probability winning / failing table, but as in mode A and mode B, the electric support when the lottery per ordinary symbol is won. Since the operating time of the member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds), it cannot be expected that the game ball will win the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 by right-handed striking. Therefore, left-handed is encouraged even in mode C. In mode C, when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, while when the game ball passes through the second through gate 319, the lottery for the normal symbol is not performed. It is also possible to make it. Further, in mode C, the winning probability in the lottery per normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be set to 100%, and the normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318. The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in mode C, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the ball entry ratio between the left first starting port 314L and the second starting port 315 is 50%: 50. %become.

As described above, in mode C, as in mode A and mode B, left-handed striking is encouraged because the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, but there is a probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery will be won. Since it is expensive, the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 can be expected to win a prize in the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, and in this respect as well, it is higher than the mode A. This is an advantageous mode (gaming state). Then, in mode C, as in mode B, the jackpot lottery has a 50% probability of winning the game ball in the left first starting port 314L, and a 49.75% probability of going to the second starting port 315. It is performed for the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R with a probability of 0.25% with respect to the winning of the game ball of. Therefore, the jackpot type expected for the jackpot in mode C and the mode of the transition destination after the jackpot game is completed are the same as in mode B. That is, in mode C, as in mode B, about half of the special figure games can receive a big hit lottery for winning a game ball to the second starting port 315, so 5R normal big hits and 5R with a large number of expected acquisitions. It can be expected that the probabilistic jackpot and the 16R probabilistic jackpot will be won, and after the jackpot game for these jackpots is completed, the mode D and mode E in which the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long will be entered as described later. Therefore, in mode C, unlike mode A, and as in mode B, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot that is advantageous for the player.

As described above, the mode D is a mode (see FIG. 13 (A)) that shifts after the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the mode A and the mode B. Mode D is a jackpot low probability mode in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low as in mode A and mode B, and the jackpot lottery is based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). Is done. Further, the mode D is a time-saving mode for a limited number of times as in the mode B, and shifts to the mode A when the upper limit number of special figure games is performed. Further, the mode D is performed based on the high-probability winning / failing table in which the lottery result in the ordinary symbol-based lottery has a high probability of winning, and this point is also the same as the mode C. In mode D, it is clearly indicated that the mode is a time saving mode in the production by the production means such as the symbol display unit 341. In this case, the production may be performed by the production means as a chance zone suggesting the possibility of a probability change.

However, unlike modes A to C, mode D has a longer operating time (for example, 6 seconds) of the electric support member 36 when a lottery is won for a normal symbol, which is more advantageous than modes A to C in this respect. Mode (game state). In mode D, since the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, the game ball flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 and the game ball falling on the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b are electrically driven as described above. It can be guided to the second starting port 315 by the support member 36. Therefore, right-handed striking is encouraged in order to operate the electric support member 36 by passing the game ball through the second through gate 319 arranged on the right side of the game board 31. Further, in mode D, since it is difficult to introduce the game ball into the distribution device 35 when hitting to the right, the game ball hardly wins the first starting openings 314L and 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). A game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 315 and a big hit lottery is held. Therefore, the jackpot in mode D is a 5R normal jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot with a high probability (approximately 100%). Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, the mode shifts to mode D after the jackpot game for this jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode after the jackpot game for these jackpots ends. Move to E (see FIG. 13 (A)). That is, in mode D, unlike modes A to C as described above, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, and a big hit lottery is received exclusively for winning a game ball to the second starting port 315. can. Therefore, in mode D, the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is either a 5R normal jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot with a large number of expected acquisitions of game balls. After the jackpot game for the jackpot is completed, the electric support member 36 shifts to the mode D or the mode E in which the operating time is long, so that the mode (game state) is more advantageous than the modes A to C in these respects.

Mode E is a mode that shifts after the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot game or the 16R probability variation jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13 (A)), and is the mode most advantageous to the player among modes A to E. be. Similar to mode C, mode E is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variation game state) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is a high probability mode win / fail table (see FIG. 12B). ), And it is also a jackpot guarantee time saving mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed. In mode E, it is clearly indicated that the game is in a probabilistic game state (high probability mode) in the production by the production means such as the symbol display unit 341.

However, unlike the mode C, the mode E has a long operating time (for example, 6 seconds) of the electric support member 36 when the lottery is won per normal symbol as in the mode D. Therefore, in mode E, right-handed striking is encouraged as in mode D. Then, in mode E, since it is difficult to introduce the game ball into the distribution device 35 when hitting to the right, the game ball hardly wins the first starting openings 314L and 314R, and the probability is high (approximately 100%). A game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 315 and a big hit lottery is held. Therefore, the jackpot type expected for the jackpot in mode E and the mode of the transition destination after the jackpot game is completed are the same as in mode D. That is, in mode E, since the jackpot lottery is exclusively received for the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, there is a high probability that either the 5R normal jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, which has a large number of expected acquisitions, will be won. Win (approximately 100%).

In addition, it is conceivable that the electric support member 36 operates a plurality of times for a hit in one ordinary symbol hit lottery. For example, in modes D and E, it is conceivable that the total operating time of the electric support member 36 is set to 6 seconds by performing the operation of operating the electric support member 36 for 1.2 seconds five times. However, the one-time operation time and the number of operations of the electric accessory 36 described above are examples and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operating time of the electric support member 36 in the mode D and the mode E is not limited to 6 seconds and can be changed as appropriate. Further, when a normal jackpot such as a 5R normal jackpot is won in mode E, the mode A, which is a non-time saving mode, or mode B, in which the operating time of the electric accessory 36 is short, is shifted to mode B instead of mode D. You may. In these cases, mode D is omitted.

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, a time-saving mode in which an ordinary electric accessory such as an electric support member operates frequently and for a long time makes it easy to win a prize at the second starting port, and an ordinary electric accessory operates in a low frequency and short time. Some have a non-time saving mode. In this type of gaming machine, the non-time saving mode is set in the normal gaming state where the jackpot lottery probability is low, and the time saving mode is set in the probabilistic gaming state where the jackpot lottery probability is high.

However, the theoretical probability that a conventional gaming machine can receive support from an ordinary electric accessory in the time saving mode is constant, the gameplay in the time saving mode is poor, and it is difficult to create a new gameplay. ..

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 includes modes A, mode C, and mode E as special figure gaming states. In these modes A, C and E, the expected value of the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion is different. Specifically, in mode A, the ball entry ratio to the first starting port 314 is approximately 100%, and in mode C, the ball entry ratio between the first starting portion and the second starting portion is approximately 50%: 50%. In mode E, the ball entry ratio to the second starting port 315 is approximately 100%. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10, the game playability is improved based on the three modes A, C, and E in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first starting portion and the second starting portion are different. It becomes possible to create playability.

For example, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a loop probabilistic machine, but in the conventional loop probabilistic machine, a mode in which the ball entry ratio to the first start port 314 is approximately 100% and the ball entry to the second start port 315 are performed. Although it had a mode in which the ratio was approximately 100%, the ball entry ratio between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 as in mode C of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment was approximately 50%: 50. It did not have a% mode. On the other hand, the mode E, which is most advantageous to the player who wins the jackpot to which a large amount of game value is given, is typically shifted to the high probability mode mode C by the first hit in the mode A, and in this mode C. It is necessary to win a big hit by a big hit lottery triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 315 with a probability of about 50%. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to go through the stage of acquiring the jackpot at the second starting port 315 in the mode C before shifting to the mode E, and the barrier to be overcome in order to shift to the most advantageous mode E is overcome. The new playability of having is given to the loop probabilistic machine. As a result, it is possible to improve the playability and the interest while suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, since the gaming machine 10 further includes the mode B and the mode D, which are the time-saving modes for which the number of times is limited, as the special figure gaming state, it becomes easy to create a new gaming property with improved game performance. Specifically, the mode E is typically shifted from the high-probability mode mode C as described above, but is also shifted from the low-probability mode mode B and mode D. That is, there is a possibility that the mode B and the mode D, which are shifted when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, are also shifted to the mode E. Since the modes B and D are in the low probability mode, the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit is lower than that in the mode C, so that the mode B and the mode D are shifted to the mode E. Needs to overcome higher barriers than when transitioning from mode C to mode E. Further, in mode D, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is long, whereas in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short, so that it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 315 in mode B and mode D. Because of the difference, the height of the barrier to be overcome in order to shift to the mode E differs between the mode B and the mode. As described above, by having the mode B and the mode D as the special figure gaming state, the game playability having a plurality of barriers (three types of barriers in the present embodiment) having different difficulties to be overcome in order to shift to the mode E can be achieved. It is given to the loop probability changer. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability and the interest while suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

Returning to the description of FIG. 11, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variation display on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, due to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in the ROM 411, the front-rear detachment reach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the reach other than the front-back deviation in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the complete deviation in which reach does not occur, is set. Here, the reach indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. Further, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processing.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation type such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. as a special figure game effect. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed once by the MPU 41 with reference to FIG. 17, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the special figure reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 refers to the low-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table, the high-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table, or the out-of-probability mode jackpot fluctuation table, which is stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of ROM 411 according to the lottery result, to display the fluctuation pattern. Specify the type. It should be noted that these fluctuation tables may be provided depending on whether the current gaming state is the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode, or may be provided individually for each of modes A to E.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the first special symbol display 371, the second special symbol display 372, and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the fluctuation pattern and the jackpot lottery A variation pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the voice from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. , Turn off the lights.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table for the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341. It will be. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

The random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is used for a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated for a predetermined time. For example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 199 to reach the maximum value. It is a loop counter that is returned to 0 after the operation. The normal symbol per random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 described later, and the counter value (random number value) is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. Then, based on this counter value (random number value), a lottery is usually performed per symbol. In the normal symbol winning lottery, when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), and the big hit game is performed. It is performed every time the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, provided that it is not executed and the electric support member 36 is not operating. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the lottery for hitting a normal symbol is not held as in the lottery for big hits. On the other hand, when the count value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired for the ordinary winning lottery, the counter value of the random number initial value counter CIN2 per ordinary symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol. ..

The special figure holding storage area 412b includes the first special figure holding area RE1, the second special figure holding area RE2, the third special figure holding area RE3, the fourth special figure holding area RE4, the fifth special figure holding area RE5, and the sixth. The special figure holding area RE6, the 7th special figure holding area RE7, the 8th special figure holding area RE8, the special figure holding number storage area NA, and the special figure execution area AE are included.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, the special figure hit / miss information is stored in any of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8. The winning of the game ball for the first starting port 314 and the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 315 are stored in the order of winning without distinction. The special figure hit / fail information includes numerical information which is a counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired when the game ball wins the starting ports 314 and 315. Start port information (special figure information) that can distinguish whether it is for a prize in the first start port 314 or a prize in the second start port 315, and a mode when the special figure pass / fail information is acquired. Includes mode information for the type (mode A to mode E).

The lottery counter 412a (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 correspond to each of the winning of the first starting port 314 and the winning of the second starting port 315. Etc.) may be provided individually.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is any of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8. It is stored in the crab. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game executed based on the special figure winning / failing information stored in the 1st special figure holding area RE1 to the 8th special figure holding area RE8, it is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. It is possible to determine in advance the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the starting ports 314 and 315, the special figure holding area RE1, the second special figure holding area RE2, the third special figure holding area RE3, and the fourth It is stored in a vacant area in the order of priority of the special figure holding area RE4, the fifth special figure holding area RE5, the sixth special figure holding area RE6, the seventh special figure holding area RE7, and the eighth special figure holding area RE8. In the special figure reservation number storage area NA, the number of the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 in which the special figure reservation information is stored is stored as the reservation number N. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 can be used as a winning history of the game balls to the starting ports 314 and 315. It is possible to hold up to eight special figures winning / failing information in the order of winning.

The special figure execution area AE is a memory used to move the special figure winning / failing information stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. The area. Then, at the start of one first special figure game or the second special figure game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery based on the numerical information and the mode information stored as the special figure hit / miss information in the special figure execution area AE. If the lottery result is a big hit, a big hit type distribution lottery is performed based on the start port information (special figure information) stored as the special figure winning / failing information. Further, when the special figure winning / failing information of the first special drawing holding area RE1 is moved to the special drawing execution area AE, the special figure winning / failing information of the second special figure holding area RE2 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 is prioritized. The first special figure holding area RE1 to the seventh special figure holding area RE7, which are one higher in rank, are shifted. That is, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special figure winning / failing information is displayed in the order of winning regardless of the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 314 and the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 315. ~ The special figure execution area is stored in the 8th special figure reservation area RE8, and the special figure success / failure information is stored in the order of winning regardless of whether the game ball is won for the first start port 314 and the game ball is won for the second start port 315. By shifting to AE, the special figure game for the special figure hit / miss information is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is so-called MAX8 with respect to the holding and holding digestion (execution of the special drawing game) of the special drawing winning / failing information.

The normal figure random number storage area 412c is a random number counter C4 per normal symbol acquired by the MPU 41 at the timing when the passing of the game ball is detected by the ball entry sensors 318a and 319a when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. This is a storage area in which the counter value (random number value) of is stored. The counter values (random number values) of the random number counters C4 per a plurality of ordinary symbols are not stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c, and the ordinary symbols change at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. Through gate 318, provided that it is not displayed (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), the jackpot game is not executed, and the electric support member 36 is not operating. , 319 Each time the game ball passes, the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is stored. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the lottery for hitting a normal symbol is not held as in the lottery for big hits. Further, when the count value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is acquired, the counter value of the random number value initial value counter CIN2 per ordinary symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 10, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. Execute the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in special figure game production, jackpot game production, and lamp blinking patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 commands the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51. (Control signal) is output to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the game effect.

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. Another embodiment is also conceivable in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment is also conceivable in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and a motor driver 39c are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, and the illumination unit. It is also possible to control the blinking mode of 27 and the like.

The MPU 51 executes a predetermined arithmetic process based on commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern and the effect type based on, for example, the variation pattern command, and transmits the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6. Then, the variable display of the main symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variable pattern command is a big hit lottery and the lottery result indicates a deviation, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, if the variable pattern command is a big hit lottery and the lottery result shows a big hit, the combination of the main symbols according to the big hit type is displayed. When the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 stores the information on the jackpot type in the RAM 512, and when the jackpot game start command is received, the RAM 512 stores the information on the jackpot game effect. Refer to the information about the stored jackpot type.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the variation display of the main symbol and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5. ..

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also has a built-in other circuit such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 has a variable symbol such as a main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a missed effect image, and an opening used in a jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as an effect image, an opening / closing execution effect image, and an ending effect image are stored. The image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the variation display and the effect display of the main symbol.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to generate a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium having an IC chip built-in. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds. As described above, the firing interval of the game ball may be different between the special figure game state and the jackpot game state.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with his thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means for being charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Further, when it is determined that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge that there is. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the ongoing control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 24. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on, a start-up process, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining the detection state of the sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a and the like is determined. At this time, when the passage of the game ball is detected by any of the ball entry sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
In step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. do.

<Step S1003>
In step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal symbol per random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal symbol per random number counter C4, and the counter values reach the maximum value. If so, the counter value is set to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
The MPU 41 executes a start winning process (step S1004) associated with winning a prize in the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the launch control process, the launch of the game ball is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process to enable. On the other hand, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes the through-gate process. In the through gate processing, the MPU 41 monitors whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, the MPU 41 is stored in the random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. Update the stored information. The details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 15, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 14 will be described.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting openings 314 and 315 based on the detection results of the ball entry sensors 314La, 314Ra and 315a. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the start ports 314 and 315 (step S1101: Yes), the process shifts to step S1102 and determines that the game ball has not won the start ports 314 and 315. Then (step S1101: No), the start winning process is completed, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the special figure hold number storage area NA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (8 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1102: No), 1 is added to the hold number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 stores the special figure winning / failing information in the high-priority free holding area of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 of the special figure holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 14, and a variable type counter updated in step S1302 in the main process of FIG. 17 described later. The counter values with CS1 are acquired, and the counter values (numerical information) are sent to the high-priority free holding area of the 1st special figure holding area RE1 to the 8th special figure holding area RE8 in the RAM 412. Store as. Further, in the MPU 41, based on the detection results of the ball entry sensors 314La, 314Ra, 315a, the starting prize this time is for any of the left first starting port 314L, the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315. In addition to specifying whether or not there is, the start port information for the specified start ports 314 and 315 is stored in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 as special figure winning / failing information. Further, the MPU 41 turns on the game states (modes A to E) in the reserved game for which numerical information has been acquired in steps S1912, S1919, S1923, S1928 and S1931 of the game state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24 described later. The mode is specified based on the set mode type flags (mode A flag to mode E flag), and the mode information for the specified mode is used as the special figure winning / failing information in the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure. Store in the hold area RE8.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines the content of the special figure winning / failing information before the special figure winning / failing information acquired in step S1104 becomes the target of determining the winning / failing of the jackpot in S1802 or S1803 of the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 22 described later. Confirm and execute the hold command setting process to set the hold command based on this confirmation result. When the process in step S1105 is completed, the start winning process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

[Through gate processing]
Here, the through-gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG. In the through gate processing, it is monitored whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, the normal symbol hits the normal symbol random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412. The counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 is stored.

<Step S1201>
First, in step S1201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319 based on the detection results of the ball entry sensors 317a and 318a. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319 (step S1201: Yes), the process shifts to step S1202 and determines that the game ball has not passed through the through gates 318 and 319. (Step S1201: No), the through gate process is completed.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 is displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (LED lamp of the normal symbol display 373) based on the flag in the normal symbol variable display set to be turned on in step S1412 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. Determine if the pair is blinking). When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S1202: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through-gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the lottery per normal symbol during the variable display of the normal symbol, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S1202: No), the process shifts to step S1203.

<Step S1203>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is operating based on the electric accessory operating flag set to be turned on in step S1508 of the ordinary electric accessory control process of FIG. 19 described later. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is operating (step S1203: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not normally execute the lottery per symbol while the electric support member 36 is operating. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is not operating (step S1203: No), the process shifts to step S1204.

<Step S1204>
In step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. Whether or not the jackpot game is in progress is determined based on, for example, whether or not the jackpot game state flag set to be on in step S1907 of the game state transition process of FIG. 23 is set to on. When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is in progress (S1204: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through-gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the normal symbol winning lottery during the jackpot game, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the process proceeds to step S1205.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the normal symbol hit lottery and the electric support member 36 is stopped during the jackpot game, but the normal symbol hit lottery and the electric support member 36 are stopped only in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The operation may be stopped, or the operation of the normal symbol per lottery and the electric support member 36 may be stopped in the opening and opening / closing execution modes. That is, at the ending, the lottery per normal symbol and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be performed.

<Steps S1205 and S1206>
When the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1202: No), the electric support member 36 is not in operation (S1203: No), and the jackpot game is not in progress (S1204: No), the MPU 41 is a random number counter C4 per normal symbol. The counter value (random number value) of (step S1205) is acquired (step S1205), the counter value (random number value) is stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c (step S1206), and the through-gate process is terminated. That is, in order to perform a lottery for a normal symbol to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 on the condition that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the electric support member 36 is not in operation, and the jackpot game is not in progress. Acquires the random value of and stores the random value.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 are executed as periodic processes of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes of steps S1309 to S1311 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1308 to the next cycle. NS.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 or the previous main process to a control device such as a sub control unit 332 or a peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process. For example, when a command such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, or a shift command is set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, when the prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variable type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1 and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316b, or the like, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. Further, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been generated in the variable winning opening 316b based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening winning command in the RAM 412. This variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 of the main processing. As a result, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 can cause the symbol display unit 341 to display the number of payouts of the game balls (ball payout display) in the jackpot game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol control process. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 operates the electric support member 36 based on the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. A winning lottery will be held. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a normal electric accessory control process. In the ordinary electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 for an operating time according to the mode type (mode A to mode E) of the special figure gaming state. The details of the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a special figure game control process for controlling a game in a variable game. The details of the special figure game control process will be described later, but in the special figure game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the fluctuation pattern command required for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1311. Based on each value, a variation pattern command indicating the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is set in the RAM 412, and the variation display of the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372 of the main display unit 37. And control the stop display.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, an open / close execution mode for controlling the opening / closing of the opening / closing door 316c is executed. In this open / close execution mode, a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316b is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. As a result, the player can acquire a large number of game balls in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening), at the start of the open / close execution mode, at the end of the open / close execution mode (at the start of the ending), and at the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the ending). ) Etc. are set with various flags and commands. For example, the MPU 41 sets commands such as a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, an open / close execution mode start command, and an open / close execution mode end command in the RAM 412 according to the progress of the jackpot game, and sets a jackpot game start flag and a jackpot game. Controls the on / off of flags such as the end flag, the open / close execution mode start flag, and the open / close execution mode end flag.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the determination result of the jackpot lottery in step S1804 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22 described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state and modes A to E when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The details of the game state transition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that it is the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: Yes), the process shifts to step S1301 and each process after S1301 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that it is not the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: No), it is until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. During the remaining time, steps S1309 to S1311 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that it is the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: Yes).

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol per random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. To.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1309.

[Normal symbol control processing]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 hits the normal symbol whether or not to operate the electric accessory 36 based on the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol random number storage area 412c. Along with performing a lottery, the variable display of ordinary symbols is controlled.

<Steps S1401 and S1402>
First, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to perform a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36. When the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 has a counter value (random number value) stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c. ) Is deleted (step S1402), and the process proceeds to step S1403. On the other hand, when the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1413.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode type is mode A, that is, whether or not the lottery per normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol low probability hit / miss table (see FIG. 13C). When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol low probability hit / miss table (see FIG. 13C). The process proceeds to step S1404. On the other hand, the MPU 41 is in the case where it is determined that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, in any of modes B to E, and the lottery per ordinary symbol is performed in the ordinary symbol high probability winning / failing table (FIG. 13 (D). ), The process proceeds to step S1407.

<Steps S1404 to S1406>
When it is determined that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the counter value of the non-time saving mode in the normal symbol variation display counter (step S1404). This counter value defines the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving mode, and is set as a value corresponding to, for example, 30 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a lottery for each normal symbol based on the normal symbol low probability hit / miss table (see FIG. 13C) (step S1405), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1406). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win depending on whether or not the counter value (random number) stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c is 199.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a win (step S1406: Yes), the process shifts to step S1410, and when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (step S1406). : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Steps S1407 to S1409>
When it is determined that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, when it is determined that the gaming state is any of modes B to E, the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol variation display counter to the counter value of the time saving mode. Is set (step S1407). This counter value defines the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the time saving mode, and is the time during which the game ball passing through the first through gate 318 can win the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. For example, it is set to about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs a lottery for each normal symbol based on the normal symbol high probability hit / miss table (see FIG. 13 (D)) (step S1408), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1409). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win depending on whether or not the counter value (random number) stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c is 0 to 198.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a win (step S1409: Yes), the process shifts to step S1410, and when it is determined that the lottery result is out of order (step S1409). : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Step S1410>
When it is determined that the lottery result in the ordinary symbol lottery is a win (Yes in step S1406 or step S1409), the MPU 41 sets the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the lottery result is a win (step S1410). ). The normal-figure hit flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 in step S1503 of the ordinary electric accessory control process of FIG. 19 described later.

<Steps S1411 and S1412>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (blinking of the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373), further sets the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol to ON (step S1412), and controls the normal symbol. End the process. The normal symbol variation display started here is the variation of the normal symbol set according to the mode type when the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol set in step S1404 or step S1407 becomes 0. After the display time has elapsed, the stop display is displayed in step S1415 described later.

<Step S1413>
When the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal figure random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol set in step S1404 or step S1407. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S1413). When the value of the variable display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the process shifts to step S1414, and when the value of the variable display time counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), the process shifts to step S1418. ..

<Step S1414>
When it is determined that the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set to ON (step S1414). .. The flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal figure indicates whether or not the normal symbol is changing, and is set to ON in step S1412. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set to ON when the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol is 0 (step S1414: Yes). , It is judged whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the normal symbol. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1415 when the normal map variation display flag is set to on (step S1414: Yes), and when the normal map variation display flag is set to off (step S1414: Yes). No), the normal symbol control process is terminated.

<Steps S1415 to S1417>
When the counter value of the fluctuation counter of the normal symbol is 0 (step S1413: Yes) and the flag for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set to on (step S1414: Yes), it is the stop display timing of the normal symbol, so MPU41 Is to stop and display the normal symbol by turning on or off the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 (step S1415). That is, the MPU 41 clearly indicates the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol in step S1405 or S1408 by the stop display symbol of the normal symbol. Further, the MPU 41 sets the normal map fluctuation display flag indicating that the normal symbol is changing to off (step S1416) and sets the normal map fluctuation stop flag to on (step S1417). The normal figure fluctuation stop flag is a flag indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol has been stopped, and whether or not it is the timing to operate the electric support member 36 in step S1501 of the normal electric accessory control process described later. Referenced to determine.

<Step S1418>
When the counter value of the fluctuation counter of the normal symbol is not 0 (step S1413: No), it is not the stop display timing of the normal symbol, so the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the fluctuation display time counter of the normal symbol and the normal symbol is concerned. End the control process.

[Ordinary electric accessory control processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ordinary electric accessory control process executed in step S1305 in the main process of FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 as the ordinary electric accessory for the operating time according to the mode type (modes A to E).

<Step S1501>
First, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal figure fluctuation stop flag set to be turned on in step S1417 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. 18 is set to ON, that is, at the timing of operating the electric support member 36. Determine if it exists. When the normal fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to off (step S1502), and shifts the process to step S1503. On the other hand, when the normal map fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1509.

<Steps S1502 and S1503>
When the normal fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to off (step S1502), and whether or not the normal fluctuation stop flag is set to on. Is determined (step S1503). The normal symbol hit flag indicates that the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a win, and is set to ON in step S1410 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1504 when the normal figure hit flag is set to on (step S1503: Yes), and when the normal figure hit flag is set to off (step S1503: Yes). The normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S1504 to S1506>
When the normal figure hit flag is set to on (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode type is any of modes A to C. When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is any of modes A to C (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 is used to short-operate the electric support member 36 as the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter. The value is set (step S1505), and the process proceeds to step S1507. The initial value in the case of short-circuit operation is a value corresponding to, for example, 0.6 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode type is neither mode A to mode C (step S1504: No), that is, in mode D or mode E, the electric support is used as the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter. A value for operating the member 36 for a long time is set (step S1506), and the process shifts to step S1507. The initial value in the case of long operation is, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds.

<Steps S1507 and S1508>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the electric support member 36, and further sets the electric accessory operating flag to ON (step S1508). The electric accessory operating flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is operating, and in order to determine whether or not to return the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position in step S1511 described later. Referenced.

Here, when the operation of the electric support member 36 is started, the electric support member 36 moves to an operating position protruding from the game board 31, and the right first starting port 314R is covered by the electric support member 36 (FIG. 9 (FIG. 9). B) See). In this state, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is restricted from winning the right first starting port 314R. On the other hand, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36. When the game ball released from the second passage 352 is received by the electric support member 36, the game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36. Further, the game ball flowing down the right side of the distribution device 35 can also be received by the electric support member 36.

<Steps S1509 and S1510>
When the normal figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter whose initial value is set in step S1505 or S1506 is 0. Determine (step S1509). The electric accessory operation counter indicates the remaining time for the electric support member 36 to operate. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is not operating and the electric support member 36 is in the standby position. When the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1511. On the other hand, when the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is not 0 (step S1509: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter (step S1510), and ends the normal electric accessory control process. do.

<Step S1511>
When the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), that is, when the electric support member 36, which is a normal electric accessory, is not operating, the MPU 41 has the electric accessory operating flag turned on. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S1511). The electric accessory operating flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is operating, and is set to ON in step S1508. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory operating flag is set to ON when the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes). It is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the operation of the support member 36, that is, whether or not it is the timing to return the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1512 when the electric accessory operating flag is set to on (step S1511: Yes), and when the electric accessory operating flag is set to off (step S1511: Yes). No), the normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S1512 and S1513>
When the electric accessory operating flag is set to ON (step S1511: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position (step S1512). That is, the MPU 41 limits the game ball from winning the second starting port 315. Further, the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory operating flag indicating that the electric support member 36 is operating to off (step S1513), and ends the normal symbol control process.

Here, by returning to the standby position of the electric support member 36, the right first starting port 314R is opened by the electric support member 36 (see FIG. 8C). In this state, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is allowed to win the right first starting port 314R, but cannot be received by the electric support member 36. Therefore, the game ball released from the second passage 352 is restricted from entering the second starting port 315. Further, the game ball flowing down on the right side of the distribution device 35 cannot be received by the electric support member 36, and the ball entering the second starting port 315 is restricted.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, as a starting part that triggers a big hit lottery to shift to a big hit game, a first starting part that allows a game ball to enter without receiving support from an ordinary electric accessory and a first starting part. Some have a second starting part that allows a game ball to enter with the support of an ordinary electric accessory. Further, as a gaming machine, there is also a gaming machine that alternately distributes a game ball to a first starting portion and a second starting portion by a distribution device.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35. If this is the case, the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated. Specifically, when the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 is in the standby position without the electric support member 36 operating (see FIG. 8C), the game ball to the right first starting port 314R The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted while the entry of the ball is allowed. Further, when the electric support member 36 is activated and is in the operating position (see FIG. 9B), the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 314R is restricted, while the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted. Entering a game ball is allowed. Further, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, in addition to the game ball launched in the right region of the game board 31, the game ball discharged from the distribution device 35 is also guided to the second starting port 315. be able to. As described above, the gaming machine 10 is different from the one that distributes the game ball to the first starting port and the second starting port by the conventional sorting device. Further, unlike the conventional ordinary electric accessory, the electric support member 36 of the gaming machine 10 not only allows or limits the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting port 315, but is also distributed to the second passage 352. Allowing or limiting the entry of the game ball into the right first starting port 314R of the game ball is performed at the same time. Further, one electric support member 36 can guide the game ball in the second passage 352 and the right-handed game ball to the second starting port 315. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 cooperate with each other to change the ball entry ratio between the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide a gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has a new game property according to the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36. For example, the electric support member 36 is operated short in modes A to C, while it is operated long in modes D and E (see FIG. 13B), which is the most advantageous mode E for the player as described above. In order to shift to, the gaming machine 10 can be provided with a game property having a plurality of barriers having different difficulties. Further, the electric support member 36 is a plate-shaped member and can be easily formed by resin molding or the like. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned effect can be realized at low cost by a simple configuration.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the special figure game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described. In the special symbol game control process, the first special symbol display 371 or the second special symbol display 372 controls the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol, sets the data of the special symbol hold storage area 412b, and manages the number of time reductions. Etc. are executed.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and if it is in the jackpot game (step S1601: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated and the gaming machine 10 is not in the jackpot game. In the case (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. For example, whether or not the jackpot game is executed is determined based on the jackpot game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets on at the start of the jackpot game and turns off at the end of the jackpot game.

<Step S1602>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the variable display, and if the symbol is in the variable display (step S1602: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1603. If the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1602: No), the process shifts to step S1607. For example, whether or not the special symbol is in the variable display is set to ON in step S1810 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 described later, and when the variable display time elapses (step S1603: Yes), The determination is made based on whether or not the special figure variation display flag set to off in step S1605 is set to on.

<Step S1603>
In step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time since the start of the variable display of the special symbol has elapsed the variable display time determined according to the lottery result in the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the variable display is performed. If it is determined that the time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1604, and if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1603: No), the special figure game control process is performed. To finish.

<Steps S1604 to S1606>
When the variation display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the MPU 41 is the special symbol display 371, 372 in the variation display of the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372. The symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special figure game is stopped and displayed (step S1604). Further, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation display flag to off (step S1605), and sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the change of the special symbol has been stopped to on (step S1606).

<Step S1607>
When the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S1602: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number N stored in the special figure hold number storage area NA of the special figure hold storage area 412b is 0. (Step S1607). Here, when the hold number N is 0 (step S1607: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the special game control process. On the other hand, when the number of holds N is not 0 (step S1607: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1608.

<Step S1608>
In step S1608, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the special figure winning / failing information stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1608, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1609. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1609>
In step S1609, the MPU 41 causes the special symbol indicators 371 and 372 to execute the variation display based on the special figure accuracy information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and causes the symbol display unit 341 to display the variation based on the special symbol accuracy information. The variation start process for setting the variation pattern command to be executed is executed, and the special figure game control process is terminated. The details of the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1608 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. In the data setting process, the data in the special figure holding storage area 412b of the RAM 412 is updated and the process is executed.

<Steps S1701 and S1702>
First, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds N stored in the special figure hold storage area NA of the special figure hold storage area 412b (step S1701), and further subtracts 1 from the first special figure hold area of the special figure hold storage area 412b. The special figure hit / miss information is moved from RE1 to the special figure execution area AE (step S1702).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure hit / miss information of the second special figure holding area RE2 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 one by one. Specifically, in step S1703, the special figure hold area RE2 of the second special figure hold area RE2 is moved to the first special figure hold area RE1, and the special figure hold area RE3 of the third special figure hold area RE3 is moved to the second special figure hold area RE1. Move to area RE2, move the special figure hold area RE4 of the 4th special figure hold area RE4 to the 3rd special figure hold area RE3, and move the special figure hold area RE5 of the 5th special figure hold area RE5 to the 4th special figure hold area RE4. Moves the special figure hold area RE6 to the 5th special figure hold area RE5, and moves the special figure hold area RE7 to the 6th special figure hold area RE6. The special figure reservation information of the 8th special figure reservation area RE8 is moved to the 7th special figure reservation area RE7.

<Step S1704>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the special figure hit / miss information of the first special figure holding area RE1 to the eighth special figure holding area RE8 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1704 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 will be changed. When the process of step S1704 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and shifts the process to the special figure variation start process of step S1609 of FIG.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Here, an example of the special figure variation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1609 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
First, the MPU 41 sets the gaming state at the time of acquisition of the hit / miss information to mode C or mode E based on the mode information in the special figure hit / miss information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure hold storage area 412b of the RAM 412. (Step S1801). Here, in modes C and E, the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the special figure hit / miss information stored in the special figure execution area AE is the jackpot winning based on the high probability mode hit / miss table. This mode is used to determine whether or not the values correspond to each other (see FIGS. 12 (B) and 13 (B)). That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the mode is such that the hit / fail determination is performed based on the high probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 12B). When the special figure game state is mode C or mode E (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 makes a hit / fail determination based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 12B) (step S1802). On the other hand, when the gaming state is not mode C or mode E (step S1801: No), that is, when the gaming state is mode A, mode B or mode D, it is based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). (Step S1803).

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
In step S1804, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit. When the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit (step S1804: Yes), the MPU 41 has a counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 included as numerical information in the special figure hit / miss information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and a special figure. The jackpot type is sorted based on the start port information (special figure information) included in the hit / fail information, and the process proceeds to step S1806. For example, when the start port information (special figure information) indicates the first start port (first special figure), either the 2R normal jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot is selected according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2. Sort the jackpot types. When the starting port information (special figure information) indicates the second starting port (second special figure), the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 16R probability variable jackpot are hit according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2. Sort the jackpot type to one of. On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing determination is not a big hit (step S1804: No), that is, when the lottery result is wrong, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1806 without performing the big hit type distribution (step S1805).

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 performs a lottery result flag setting process for setting a lottery result flag according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, that is, the winning / failing determination in step S1802 or S1803, and the distribution result of the jackpot type in step S1805. Run. In this lottery result flag setting process, the 2R normal jackpot flag is when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot 2R normal jackpot, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is when the 2R probability variable jackpot is, and the 5R is 5R when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot. When the normal jackpot flag is a 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set, when it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set, and when it is off, a miss flag is set. Here, the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag are flags that indicate the jackpot type as well as the lottery result, and are shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. In the game state transition process, it is referred to when shifting the game state from the jackpot game state to modes B to E after the end of the jackpot game, and is set to off when the game state is shifted to the target mode after the end of the jackpot game. NS. Further, the off flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, and is set to off in step S1813 described later. Then, in this step S1806, when the lottery result flag is set, the stop display symbol of the special figure display 371, 372 of the main display unit 37 is also set according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
In step S1807, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern indicating the variation display time of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 371 and 372 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, and sets the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter. Determined based on the counter value of CS1. Then, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern command in the RAM 412 based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S1807 (step S1808). This variation pattern command may include the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special figure game. Of course, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery may be set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command without being included in the fluctuation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern command set in step S1808 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in step S1301 (see FIG. 17) of the next main process executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 5 executes the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1809 and S1810>
When the variation pattern is set, the MPU 41 starts the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 371 and 372 (step S1809), and sets the special symbol variation display flag to on (step S1810). Here, the special symbol whose variation display is started is stopped after the variation display time (variation pattern) set in step S1807 elapses in the special figure game control process of FIG. 20 (step S1603: Yes and FIG. 20). S1604). At this time, the special symbol stops at the stop display symbol set in step S1806 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

<Step S1811>
In step S1811, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving flag set to be turned on in S1917 or S1926 in the game state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24 described later is set to on, and the time saving flag is turned on. If it is set (step S1811: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1812, and if the time saving flag is set to off (step S1811: No), the special figure variation start process is terminated.

<Step S1812>
When the time saving flag is set to ON (step S1811: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the off flag is set to ON (Step S1812: Yes). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1813 when the disengagement flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), that is, when the result of the pass / fail determination in step S1802 or S1803 is disappointing. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1817 when the disengagement flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit.

<Steps S1813 to S1816>
When the disengagement flag is set to on (step S1812: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the disengagement flag to off (step S1813), and S1917 or S1926 in the game state transition process of FIGS. 23 and 24 described later. The counter value of the time saving counter set when the time saving flag set to be turned on is set to ON is subtracted by 1 (step S1814), and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving counter after the subtraction is 0. (Step S1815). The counter value of the time reduction counter indicates the remaining number of time reductions. The MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to on when the counter value of the time saving counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when the remaining time saving number is 0 and it is necessary to end the time saving mode. (Step S1816), the process proceeds to step S1817. The time saving end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1909 of the game state transition process of FIG. 23 in order to determine whether or not to end the time saving mode. On the other hand, when the counter value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), the MPU 41 ends the special figure fluctuation start process.

<Step S1817>
The MPU 41 is set to the time saving flag when the off flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, or when the time saving end flag is set to on (step S1816). Is set to off (step S1817), and the special figure fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Game state transition process]
Here, the game state transition process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. In the game state transition process, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the game state is shifted from the special figure game state consisting of modes A to E to the jackpot game state including the opening / closing execution mode, and in the jackpot game state. After the end of the jackpot game, the process of shifting from the jackpot game state to any of the modes B to E of the special figure game state is executed according to the type of the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state ( See FIG. 13 (A)). Further, in the game state transition process, in the mode B or mode D of the special figure game state, after executing the special figure game of the upper limit number of times, the process of shifting to the mode A is executed (see FIG. 13 (A)). Since the details of modes A to E have already been described, the description of modes A to E will be omitted here.

<Steps S1901 and S1902>
First, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop flag set to be turned on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20 is set to on, that is, the special figure game is completed. It is determined whether or not it is time to shift the gaming state to another gaming state. When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag to off (step S1902), and shifts the process to step S1903. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the process shifts to step S1914.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the variable display of the special symbol whose variable display has been stopped is a jackpot. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. Whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot is determined by the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation, which are set to be turned on in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. It is judged by whether or not one of the jackpot flags is set to on.

When the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is a big hit (step S1903: Yes), shifts the process to step S1904, and determines that the lottery result is not a big hit (missing) (step S1903: No). The process proceeds to step S1909.

<Steps S1904 and S1905>
In step S1904, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time saving flag set to be turned on in step S1917 or S1926 described later is set to on. The time saving flag indicates that the time saving mode is limited in number of times. When the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to on (step S1904: Yes), that is, when it is a big hit in mode B or mode D, the time saving flag is turned off to end the time saving mode for a limited number of times. (Step S1905), and the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving flag is set to off (step S1904: No), that is, when it is a big hit in mode A, mode C or mode E, the process shifts to step S1906.

<Steps S1906 and S1907>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, and further sets the jackpot gaming state flag to ON (step S1907). The jackpot game state flag indicates that the jackpot game is in progress, and is referred to, for example, in step S1204 in the through gate process of FIG. 16 to determine whether the jackpot game is in progress.

<Step S1908>
In step S1908, the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to off (step S1908) and sets the mode type flag to off (step S1908). The mode type flag indicates which of the modes A to E is the mode type in the special figure game state, and is set to ON when shifting to the jackpot game state in this step S1908. Set the current mode type flag to off.

The mode type flag is set to be ON in step S1912 and is a mode A flag, is set to ON in step S1919 and is a mode B flag, and is a mode B flag in step S1923. A mode C flag that is set to ON and indicates that it is in mode C, a mode D flag that is set to ON in step S1928 and indicates that it is in mode D (see FIG. 24), and is set to ON in step S1931. It also includes a mode E flag (see FIG. 24) indicating that it is in mode E.

<Step S1909>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is wrong (step S1903: No), whether or not the time saving end flag set to be on in step S1816 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on in the MPU 41. Is determined (step S1909). The time-saving end flag indicates that the upper limit number of special symbol games has been executed in the time-saving mode with a limited number of times (the remaining number of time-saving times is 0), and is a flag for ending the time-saving mode.

When the MPU 41 determines that the time saving end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1910. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time saving end flag is set to off (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process without shifting to the mode A.

<Steps S191 to S1913>
When it is determined that the time saving end flag is set to on (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time saving end flag to off (step S1910). Then, the MPU 41 shifts the mode type from mode B or mode D, which is a time saving mode, to mode A (step S1911). At this time, the MPU 41 sets the mode A flag on (step S1912) and sets the mode B flag or mode D flag indicating the mode before shifting to the mode A to off (step S1913), and the game state. End the migration process.

<Steps S1914 and S1915>
In step S1914, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 is set to on in the jackpot game control process of step S1307 in the main process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game end flag is set to on, that is, whether or not it is the timing to shift to any of modes B to E when the jackpot game ends.

When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to on (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game end flag to off (step S1915), and shifts the process to step S1916. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to off (step S1914: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process without shifting to modes B to E.

<Step S1916>
In step S1916, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag set to be on in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the finished jackpot game is a 2R normal jackpot. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to on (step S1916: Yes), and processes when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set to off (step S1916: No). To step S1921.

<Steps S1917 to S1920>
In step S1917, the MPU 41 sets the time saving flag, which indicates that the time saving mode is limited to a limited number of times, to on. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit of the number of time reductions as the time reduction counter. The number of time reductions is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time reduction counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode B (step S1918) and sets the mode B flag to on (step S1919). Further, the MPU 41 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag to off (step S1920), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S1921>
In step S1921, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R probability variation jackpot flag set to be on in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the completed jackpot game is a 2R probability variation jackpot. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1922 when the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is set to on (step S1921: Yes), and processes when the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off (step S1921: No). To step S1925 of FIG. 24.

<Steps S1922 to S1924>
In step S1922, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode C and further sets the mode C flag on (step S1923). Then, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variation jackpot flag to off (step S1924), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S1925>
In step S1925 shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag set to be on in step S1806 of the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 22 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the finished jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to on (step S1925: Yes), and processes when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to off (step S1925: No). To step S1930.

<Steps S1926 to S1929>
In step S1926, the MPU 41 sets the time saving flag, which indicates that the time saving mode is limited to a limited number of times, to on. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit of the number of time reductions as the time reduction counter. The number of time reductions is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time reduction counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode D (step S1927) and sets the mode D flag to on (step S1928). Further, the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to off (step S1929), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S1930 to S1932>
In step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode E and further sets the mode E flag on. That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to on (step S1914: Yes), and both the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 5R normal jackpot flag are set to off (steps S1916, S1921, and S1925). It can be determined that either the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON. Therefore, in step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts to the mode E, which is the transition destination mode after the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot game and the 16R probability variation jackpot game, and sets the mode E flag to on. Then, the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag set to ON to off (step S1932), and ends the game state transition process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S1951), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S1952), a counter update process (step S1953), and a command determination process (step S1953). S1954), the special figure game effect processing (step S1955), and the jackpot game effect process (step S1956) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
In the operation detection process of step S1951, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the operation button 20, and executes, for example, a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be judged whether or not there is.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the operation detection pattern determination process in step S1952, the MPU 51 sets, for example, an operation pattern flag according to the operation state for the operation button 20 from the operation history for the past three times. The operation state for the operation button 20 can be determined by this operation pattern flag. Examples of the operation state include a start state of the operation for the operation button 20, a continuation state of the operation for the operation button 20, an end state of the operation for the operation button 20, and a non-operation state in which the operation button 20 is not operated.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process of step S1953, the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter, the fluctuation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and the effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value on the fluctuation display counter becomes 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Set. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the decorative symbol is changing, that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of step S1954, the MPU 51 determines a command received from the main control device 4 and executes a process corresponding to the command. For example, examples of the command received from the main control device 4 include a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, and the like. Commands other than these commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but the description of these commands will be omitted.

The variation pattern command is a command indicating the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is used in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 22 based on the information stored in the special symbol hold storage area 412b when the special symbol display is started to be variablely displayed on the special symbol indicators 371 and 372. It is set in step S1808. When the MPU 51 receives the variation pattern command, the MPU 51 determines the special figure game effect and the jackpot game effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like according to the content specified by the variation pattern command.

The hold command is a command indicating the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern, and the hold number N in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b increases. The hold command is set in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 15 based on the information stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b when the number of holds N increases.

The shift command is a command indicating that the special figure winning / failing information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the 1st special figure holding area RE1 to the 8th special figure holding area RE8 has shifted when the number of holdings N decreases. be. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

[Special figure game production processing]
In the special figure game effect processing of step S1955, in the special figure game, for example, the special figure game effect determined when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process is transmitted to the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. Let it run.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing of step S1956, in the jackpot game, for example, the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening / closing execution mode effect, and ending effect) determined when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like are used to execute the command.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a conventional gaming machine provided with a distribution device for distributing game balls to a first starting portion and a second starting portion having a function different from that of the first starting portion. Unlike the machine, a first starting port 314 having the same function is arranged below the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, although the gaming machine 10 is provided with an ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) as in the conventional gaming machine, the electric support member 36 is downstream of the stage 310 in which game balls are collected when hitting to the right. It extends in a series between the side and the lower part of the exit of the game ball in the second passage 352 (above the right first starting port 314R), and is formed in a plate shape having a delay portion 364. As a result, the electric support member 36 enables the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 at the time of left-handed strike and distributed to the second passage 352 to win a prize at the second starting port 315, and at the same time, the stage at the time of right-handed strike. It is possible to make the game balls collected in 310 win a prize in the second starting port 315. In other words, the electric support member 36 allows or limits the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, and at the same time limits or limits the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R, depending on the presence or absence of operation. Tolerate. That is, unlike the ordinary electric accessory of the conventional gaming machine, the electric support member 36 limits the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, so that the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R can be obtained. On the other hand, by allowing the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is restricted. Further, the gaming machine 10 includes a normal mode (mode A), a latent probability variation mode (mode C), and a time saving probability variation mode (mode E), which are adopted in the conventional gaming machine, as the special figure gaming state. By cooperating with the device 35 and the electric support member 36, the playability in the latent probability variation mode (mode C) is improved.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, left-handed hitting is encouraged in modes A and C, and when left-handed hitting is performed, game balls enter the distribution device 35, and these game balls enter the first passage 351. And the second passage 352 are alternately distributed. On the other hand, in mode E, right-handed hitting is encouraged, and by hitting right-handed, the support by the electric support member 36 can be received for a long time and with high frequency, and the second special figure game until the state shifts to the jackpot game state. Only the special figure game is executed. That is, in mode E, the ball entry ratio to the second starting port 315 is 100%, as in the time saving probability variation mode of the conventional gaming machine in which the high probability mode is executed by right-handed hitting without using the distribution device 35. Is.

Then, in the mode A, the game ball distributed to the first passage 351 wins a prize in the left first starting port 314L. Further, since the mode A is not the time saving mode, the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 wins a prize in the right first starting port 314R before the electric support member 36 operates. That is, in mode A, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, but the game ball introduced into the distribution device 35 is the first start port 314 (left). The first starting port 314L or the right first starting port 314R) is won. Therefore, in the mode A, the rate of entering the ball into the first starting port 314 is 100%, substantially the same as in the normal mode of the conventional gaming machine.

On the other hand, in mode C, as in mode A, left-handed hitting is encouraged, and when left-handed hitting is performed, game balls enter the distribution device 35, and these game balls enter the first passage 351. The game balls are alternately distributed to the second passage 352, and when the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351, the game balls are awarded to the left first starting port 314L. Further, since the mode C is a time saving mode unlike the mode A, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are restricted from entering the right first starting port 314R by the electric support member 36 operating. As a result, the second starting port 315 wins a prize. That is, in mode C, by hitting left, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start port 314 (left first start port 314L) and the second start port 315 by the distribution device 35. Therefore, although the mode C is the latent probability variation mode, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315, and the first starting port (left first starting port). The ball entry ratio between the starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 is 50%: 50% unless the result of the lottery per drawing is out of order.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the mode A (expected value is 0%), the mode C (expected value is 50%), and the mode C (expected value is 50%) in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different. It has three gaming states of mode E (expected value is 100%). Therefore, it is possible to create a new game playability with improved playability based on three game states in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 are different. In particular, since the gaming machine 10 is configured as MAX8, the hold is exhausted in the order of winning. Therefore, in mode C, the jackpot lottery at the first starting port 314 and the jackpot lottery at the second starting port 315 are alternated. With a probability of 1/2, you can receive a jackpot type distribution by winning a prize at the second starting port 315, and with a probability of 1/2, you can receive a jackpot type distribution by winning a prize at the first starting port 314. Can receive.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming balls distributed to the second passage 352 enter the right first starting port 314R in the mode A, while entering the second starting opening 315 in the mode C. Ball. This is because the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are allowed to enter the right first starting port 314R when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position where the electric support member 36 is not operating. 2 The entry of the game ball into the start port 315 is restricted, and when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the entry of the game ball into the right first start port 314R is restricted, while the second start is performed. This is realized by arranging the electric support member 36 so that the game ball can enter the mouth 315, and causing the operating time of the electric support member 36 to be different between the mode A and the mode C. .. In this way, the electric support member 36 not only allows or limits the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315, but also allows the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 to the right first starting port 314R. Allow or limit the entry of game balls at the same time. That is, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 cooperate to change the ball entry ratio of the game balls between the right first start port 314R and the second start port 315 in modes A and C. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having a new game property according to the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36.

Then, in the gaming machine 10, the delay guide 364 is provided on the electric support member 36 that guides the gaming ball to the second starting port 315, so that the player is, for example, in a gaming state (mode A or mode C) in which left-handed strike is encouraged. Even if the game ball is received by the electric support member 36 by hitting the ball to the right, the delay guide 364 can secure a long time for the game ball to reach the second starting port 315. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the electric support member 36 from reaching the second starting port 315 from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the return to the standby position. By eliminating the advantage of hitting right in the state, the player can be made to hit left positively.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the same reference numerals and the same step numbers are assigned to the same configurations and the same steps as the processing procedure of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above. The following description will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing procedure of the above-mentioned first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second to sixth embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, a case is described in which a special symbol game is executed in any of the five gaming states of modes A to E, which is configured as a loop probabilistic machine of the gaming machine 10. On the other hand, in the second to sixth embodiments, the specifications of the gaming machine 10 are different from those in the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the second to sixth embodiments will be described individually.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of modes A to E has been described. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the special symbol game is executed in any of the three gaming states of mode A, mode C, and mode E. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the special figure gaming state does not include the mode B and the mode D, which are the time-saving modes for which the number of times is limited. Further, since the special figure game state is composed of three modes A to C, the mode transition is also different from the above-described first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 26B is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 26C is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. 26 (D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 26 (A) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. That is, also in the present embodiment, the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 is divided into either the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, and the second starting port 315 is won. 2 The jackpot in the special figure game is divided into 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot. Of course, the distribution of the jackpot types may be different from that of the first embodiment described above. For example, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C, and mode E, and the contents of these modes A, mode C, and mode E are the contents of the first embodiment described above. This is the same as the above, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E, mode C, and mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 26C defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 2R normal jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, the mode A is shifted to after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. If the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the mode C is entered after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode E is entered after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. That is, after the end of the jackpot game executed when the lottery result is a jackpot, in the case of a normal jackpot, the mode is changed to mode A, and in the case of a probability variation jackpot in winning a prize for the first starting ports 314L and 314R. The mode is changed to mode C, and in the case of a probability change jackpot in winning a prize for the second starting port 315, the mode is changed to mode E.

FIG. 26 (D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the jackpot type distribution in the first special figure game is 25% for 2R normal jackpot and 2R probability variation jackpot. It is 75%. Therefore, the mode A basically shifts to the mode A or the mode C after the jackpot game ends, and the transition probability to the mode A is 25% and the transition probability to the mode C is 75%.

In mode C, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are alternately executed by hitting the left side. Further, as described above, the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 25% for the 2R normal jackpot and 75% for the 2R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game is 25% for the 5R probability variation jackpot, 50% for the 16R probability variation jackpot, and 25% for the 5R normal jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to shift from mode C to any of mode A, mode C, and mode E after the jackpot game is completed, and the transition probability to mode A is 25% and the transition probability to mode C is 37.5%. , The transition probability to mode E is 37.5%.

In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game is 25% for the 5R probability variation jackpot, 50% for the 16R probability variation jackpot, and 25 for the 5R normal jackpot. %. Therefore, the mode C basically shifts to the mode A or the mode E after the jackpot game ends, and the transition probability to the mode A is 25% and the transition probability to the mode E is 75%.

[Game state transition process]
Here, since the gaming machine 10 does not execute the mode B and the mode D, which are the time-saving modes for which the number of times is limited, in the gaming state transition processing of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 27, in step S1606 of the special drawing game control processing of FIG. When the special figure fluctuation stop flag set to be turned on is set to on (step S1900: Yes), steps S1903 and S1904 relating to the time saving flag in the game state transition process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 23). ) Is omitted, and if the lottery result is out of order, the game state transition process is terminated without performing the mode transition.

On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1900: No), and when the jackpot game end flag set to be on in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17 is set to on (step S1900: No). Step S1914: Yes), the jackpot game end flag is set to off (step S1915), and a process of shifting from the jackpot game state to any of mode A, mode C, and mode E is executed (step S1915). S2001-S2009). Hereinafter, steps S2001 to S2009 will be described.

<Steps S2001-S2003>
When the jackpot game end flag is set to on and the jackpot game flag is turned off (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 is in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state. It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) (step S2001). Whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot is determined by whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22 or the 5R normal jackpot is set to ON. ..

When the lottery result is a normal jackpot (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot game state to mode A in the special figure game state (step S2002), sets the mode A flag to on (step S2003). ), The process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the process proceeds to step S2004.

<Steps S2004 to S2006>
When the lottery result is not a normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2004). ). Whether or not the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by whether or not the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, which is set to be on in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22, is set to on.

When the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2004: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot game state to mode C in the special figure game state (step S2005), sets the mode C flag to on (step). S2006), the process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2004: No), the process proceeds to step S2007.

<Steps S2007 and S2008>
The MPU 41 can determine that the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot when the lottery result is neither a normal jackpot (step S2001: No) nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2004: No). Therefore, the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot game state to the mode E of the special figure game state (step S2007), sets the mode E flag to on (step S2008), and shifts the process to step S2009.

<Step S2009>
When the mode type flag is set to on (steps S2003, S2006 and S2008), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag to off (step S2009). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag set to on among the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to off. When the jackpot type flag is set to off, the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure gaming state is composed of three modes, mode A, mode B, and mode E, and there is no time saving mode (mode B, mode D) for a limited number of times as the time saving mode. If the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the mode A shifts to the non-time saving mode after the jackpot game for the jackpot is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the stay ratio in the time saving mode is lower than that in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, since the time saving mode is a mode in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 can be expected, the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot that triggers the transition to mode E is expected. can. Therefore, since the stay ratio in the time saving mode is lowered, it is difficult to shift to the mode E which is the time saving mode, and it is easy to fall into the mode A. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a sharpness to the mode transition and also has a sharpness to the prize balls that the player can obtain.

In the present embodiment, the case of three modes of mode A, mode C and mode E has been described, but in the case of three modes, the three modes of mode A, mode B and mode D, mode A, mode B and There may be three modes of mode E, or three modes of mode A, mode C and mode D. Further, the special gaming state may be 4 modes or 6 modes or more. As an example when the special game state is 4 modes, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode D, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode E, mode A, mode B, mode There are four modes, D and mode E.

Further, the special figure game state may include modes other than modes A to E. For example, the special figure game state includes, in addition to modes A and E, a fine time reduction mode in which the number of time reductions is limited, for example, the number of time reductions is about 1/40 to 1/10 of the jackpot probability. May be good. The minute time reduction mode may include a difficult support minute time reduction mode in which the support of the electric support member 36 is difficult to receive, and an easy support minute time reduction mode in which the support of the electric support member 36 is easily received. The difficult support minute time saving mode shifts to the big hit game for the jackpot in mode A, and the easy support minute time saving mode shifts to the big hit game for the big hit in the difficult support minute time saving mode. Further, the mode A shifts to the mode A after digesting a predetermined number of special figure games in the minute time reduction mode, and the lottery result is a big hit in the big hit lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 315 in the mode E. In some cases, the game shifts after the jackpot game for the jackpot is completed. The gaming machine 10 having four special gaming states including such a difficult support minute time saving mode and an easy support minute time saving mode can be used as a jackpot winning / failing table as a jackpot winning / failing table so that it can fall from mode E to mode A, for example. It is preferable to configure it as ST or V-ST having an upper limit on the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed based on the table.

<Third embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special figure game state is composed of five modes A to E and there is no upper limit to the number of continuations of the probability variation jackpot has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the special figure gaming state has three modes of mode A, mode C and mode E, and the low probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 12 (A)). It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of jackpots from the so-called first hit, which is a jackpot, continues up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a limit machine in which the special figure gaming state is configured as three modes of mode A, mode C, and mode E.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30 focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 28 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 28 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 28 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. 28 (D) is a diagram showing a mode transition example, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the special figure variation start processing executed in step S1609 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20, and FIG. 30 is FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1308 of a main process.

The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 28 (A) defines the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Unlike the first embodiment described above, there are three types of jackpots in this embodiment: 2R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, and all jackpots are probability variation jackpots. However, when the number of jackpots from the first hit reaches the upper limit, the jackpot is usually treated as a jackpot, and after the jackpot game is completed, a jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12 (A)). Is forcibly shifted to mode A in which

In addition, the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 is distributed to either the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 2R probability variation jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot is 75:25. be. That is, in the jackpot in the first special figure game, there is no distribution of the 16R probability variation jackpot that can be expected to acquire a large amount of game balls, and the distribution of the 2R probability variation jackpot that the expected value of the acquired game ball is small is large. You cannot expect to get a lot of game balls. On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special figure game by winning the second starting port 315 is distributed to either the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the distribution ratio between the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot is 50:50. be. That is, in the jackpot in the second special figure game, there is no distribution of the 2R probability variation jackpot, and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be acquired.

As shown in FIG. 28B, the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C, and mode E, and the contents of these modes A, mode C, and mode E are the contents of the first embodiment described above. This is the same as the above, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E, mode C, and mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 28C defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the jackpot for the number of jackpots set at the time of the first hit is won, and the mode A is entered after the end of the final jackpot game. Until the jackpot for the number of jackpots set at the time of the first hit is won, the player does not fall into mode A unless the remaining jackpots stored in the RAM 412 are erased. In addition, except after the end of the last jackpot game, mode C is entered after the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first start port 314, and the prize is given to the second start opening 315. The mode E is entered after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the second special figure game is completed.

FIG. 28D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, as described above, it is not possible to expect a prize in the second starting port 315, and the first special figure game is executed by winning a prize in the first starting port 314. Therefore, in mode A, an irregular case. Except for, the mode shifts to 100% mode C. Since the mode A shifts to the mode A after the end of the last jackpot game, the mode A does not shift to the mode A after the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the mode A.

In mode C, by hitting left, the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 and the second special drawing game by winning the second starting port 315 are alternately executed. Therefore, except after the end of the last jackpot game, in the case of a jackpot in the first special figure game, the mode C is entered after the end of the jackpot game, and in the second special figure game by winning a prize at the second starting port 315. In the case of a big hit, the mode E is entered after the big hit game is completed. Further, in mode C, since the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately, the transition probability to mode C is 50% and the transition probability to mode E is 50% except in irregular cases. Is 50%.

In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, so that mode E shifts to mode E after the jackpot game is completed.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a limit machine, the special figure variation start process is different from the special figure variation start process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above, steps S1811 to S1817 relating to the time reduction flag and the time reduction counter are omitted. Then, when the special figure variation display flag is set to ON (step S1810), the game state transition process is terminated. Further, the special figure fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment includes a step S1805 for sorting the jackpot type and a fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1807) in the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. In place of the lottery result flag setting process (step S1807), when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the big hit type flag and the special figure type that is the target of the big hit lottery are set. The difference is that the flags are set (steps S2101 and S2102), and the steps of monitoring the number of probability variation jackpots (steps S2103 to S2107) are executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the mode B and the mode D, which are the time-saving modes for which the number of times is limited, are not included as the special figure gaming state. Hereinafter, steps S2101 to S2107 in the fluctuation start processing will be described.

<Step S2101>
The MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag when the jackpot type is sorted (step S1805) (step S2101). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets either the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to ON according to the jackpot type distributed in step S1805. In this step S2101, unlike the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 in the first embodiment described above, the deviation flag required for counting the number of time reductions is set. Not done.

<Step S2102>
The MPU 41 sets a special figure type flag that specifies the special figure type that is the target of the jackpot lottery (step S2102). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to on when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first special figure game is a big hit, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the second special figure game. When is a big hit, the second special figure big hit flag is set to on.

<Steps S2103 to S2107>
In step S2103, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the remaining set number M with respect to the jackpot upper limit number (initial set number Mmax) set in the next step S2104 is 0. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not this jackpot is the first hit. When the remaining number of sets M is 0 (step S2103: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial number of sets Mmax as the remaining number of sets M (step S2104), and shifts the process to step S1807. The initial set number Mmax is, for example, a predetermined number of sets from a range of 3 to 10 times.

On the other hand, in the MPU 41, when the remaining number of sets M is not 0 (step S2103: No), 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of sets M (step S2105), and whether or not the remaining number of sets M after the subtraction is 0. (Step S2106). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot. The MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag on when the remaining number of sets M after subtraction is 0 (step S2106: Yes), that is, when the jackpot this time is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot. (Step S2107), the process shifts to step S1807. The jackpot limit flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot has been won the number of times corresponding to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104, that is, the current jackpot is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot. This jackpot limit flag is referred to in step S2202 in the game state transition process of FIG. 30, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to shift to mode A. Further, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON when the remaining number of sets M after subtraction is not 0 (step S2106: No), that is, when the jackpot this time is not the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S1807.

[Game state transition process]
Here, since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment does not include the mode B and the mode D, which are the limited number of time-saving modes, as the special figure gaming state, the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 30 is described above. In the gaming state transition process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, the step related to the time saving mode is omitted, and the step of shifting to the mode B and the mode D is omitted. Further, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment, when the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot is the final jackpot, the mode A is entered, and the jackpot lottery that triggers the transition to the jackpot game state is performed. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it shifts to mode C or mode E according to the above (steps S2201 to S2212). Hereinafter, steps S2201 to S2212 will be described.

<Step S2201>
When the jackpot game end flag is set to on and the jackpot game flag is turned off (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 is set to on in step S2101 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 29. The jackpot type flag is set to off (step S2201). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag, which is set to on among the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, to off when the jackpot game ends.

<Steps S2202-S2205>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot limit flag set to be turned on in step S2105 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 29 is set to on (step S2202). That is, in the MPU 41, the jackpot game is the last jackpot with respect to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104 of the special figure variation start processing of FIG. 29, and the mode A in the special figure game state after the jackpot game is completed. Determine if the jackpot limit flag for transitioning to is set to on. When the jackpot limit flag is set to on (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to off (step S2203), shifts the jackpot game state to mode A (step S2204), and modes. The A flag is set to on (step S2205), and the game state transition process is terminated.

<Steps S2206 to S2209>
In the MPU 41, the jackpot limit flag is set to off (step S2202: No), and the first special figure jackpot flag set to be on in step S2102 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 29 is set to on. Whether or not it is determined (step S2206). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition of the jackpot game is for the first special figure game.

In the MPU 41, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to on (step S2206: Yes), the first special figure jackpot flag is set to off (step S2207), and the mode C in the special figure gaming state is set. (Step S2208), the mode C flag is set to ON (step S2209), and the game state transition process is completed. On the other hand, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to off (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2010.

<Steps S221-10 and S2212>
When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to off (step S2206: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the second special figure jackpot flag is set to on, so that the second special figure jackpot flag is turned off. At the same time as setting (step S2210), the mode E is shifted to the special figure game state (step S2211), the mode E flag is set to on (step S2212), and the game state transition process is completed.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has three modes of mode A, mode C, and mode E in which the special figure gaming state has different advantages for the player, and the number of jackpots from the first hit is predetermined. Continue up to the specified maximum number. The mode transition destination of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment differs depending on whether it is a jackpot in the first special figure game or a jackpot in the second special figure game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, with the remaining number of sets after the first hit (initial number of sets Mmax-1), in mode E where a large number of game balls can be expected to be acquired, how many sets of jackpots are left. It is possible to provide a game machine 10 having a game-like property of shifting to or after shifting to mode E, how many are distributed to 16R jackpot games.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in the first special figure game in mode A, 100% shifts to mode C after the end of the big hit game, but in the case of a big hit in the first special figure game in mode A. Mode C may be entered at a certain rate, for example, 50%, and mode A may be looped at the remaining rate. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game property in which mode A, which is disadvantageous for the player, may loop, and as a result, a large amount of games are left with a large number of jackpots when shifting to mode C. Not only the game nature of shifting to mode E where the acquisition of game balls can be expected, but also the game nature of how to shift to mode C where the transition to mode E can be expected while leaving a large number of jackpots. 10 can be provided.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of modes A to E has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the mode A, the mode C'and the mode E', which are high-probability modes with a high probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit and a time-saving mode with a limited number of times, are set as the special figure game state. There are 3 modes including. Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is an ST machine in which all the jackpot types have probabilistic jackpots, and after the jackpot game is completed, the game machine 10 shifts to a time-saving mode (mode C'or mode E') for a limited number of times.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 31 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 31 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. 31 (D) is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A) as a jackpot type distribution table, the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 is distributed to the 2R probability variation jackpot, and by winning the second starting port 315. The jackpot in the second special figure game is distributed to the 16R probability variation jackpot. That is, in the present embodiment, all jackpots are probabilistic jackpots, and jackpot types are sorted according to the special figure type. Of course, in the distribution of jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate. It is also conceivable that they will be sorted according to the ratio of.

As shown in FIG. 31 (B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C'and mode E'. The content of the mode A is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. The mode C'and the mode E'are the same as the mode C and the mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that the time saving mode is limited in number of times. That is, the modes C'and E'are high-probability modes in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery has a high probability of becoming a big hit, and the time-saving mode is limited in number of times. Here, the upper limit of the number of time reductions in modes C'and E'is set to be about the same as the upper limit of the number of time reductions in modes B and D of the first embodiment described above, for example, 50 times. Then, the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E', mode C', and mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 31 (C) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in modes C'and E', the game shifts to mode A. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the mode C'is shifted to after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. When the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode is changed to E'after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as a trigger. That is, after the end of the time-saving mode for a limited number of times, the mode C'or the mode E'is dropped to the mode A, and in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot in the winning of the first starting port 314L, 314R, the mode is changed to the second mode C'. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot in winning a prize for the starting port 315, the mode is changed to E'.

FIG. 31 (D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting the left side, and the jackpot type distribution in the first special figure game is 100% for the 2R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, the mode A shifts to the mode C'after the end of the jackpot game executed triggered by the jackpot.

In mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are alternately executed by hitting left. Further, as described above, in the first special figure game, 100% is distributed to the 2R probability variation jackpot, and in the second special figure game, 100% is distributed to the 16R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, from mode C', if the lottery result becomes a big hit by the end of the time saving mode, the mode is changed to either mode C'or mode E'after the end of the big hit game executed with the big hit as a trigger. NS. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode C'is shifted to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the 16R probability variation jackpot is 100% in the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game, so from mode E', the jackpot After the end of the jackpot game executed with the above as an opportunity, the mode shifts to mode E'. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', the mode E'shifts to mode A.

[Game state transition process]
Here, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that there are two types of jackpots, a 2R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. , A 2R probability variation jackpot flag, a 16R probability variation jackpot flag, or a missed flag is set as the lottery result flag according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure game state has three modes of mode A, mode C'and mode E', in the game state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the above-mentioned first The process for mode transition is different from the game state transition process (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment (steps S2301 to S2308). Hereinafter, steps S2301 to S2308 will be described.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301 shown in FIG. 32, when the time saving mode ends and the mode C'or mode E'shifts to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the MPU 41 is set to the mode C'flag or mode. Set the E'flag to off.

<Steps S2302-S2305>
In step S2302 shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag and the time reduction when the jackpot game end flag set to be on in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17 is set to on. When the flag is set to off (step S1914: Yes, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variation jackpot flag set in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on. .. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variation jackpot.

The MPU 41 is special when the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is set to on (step S2302: Yes), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variation jackpot. Figure The game state shifts to mode C'(step S2303), and the mode C'flag is set to on (step S2304). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variation jackpot flag to off (step S2305), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S2306 to S2308>
The MPU 41 is special when the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off (step S2302: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Figure The game state shifts to mode E'(step S2306), and the mode E'flag is set to on (step S2307). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to off (step S2308), and ends the game state transition process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to shift to the mode E'which is most advantageous to the player, it is necessary to go through the mode C'. That is, in order to shift to the mode E', it is necessary to make a big hit in the second special figure game after shifting to the mode C'at the first hit and before the end of the time saving mode. Since the first hit in mode A and the jackpot in the first special figure game in mode C'are 2R probability variation jackpots, a small amount of game balls can be obtained in the jackpot game and stay in mode A and mode C'. During that time, the number of game balls cannot be expected to increase. On the other hand, in the mode E'when hitting to the right, a 100% 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained, so that a large amount of game balls can be expected to be acquired in the jackpot game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after shifting to mode C'after the first hit, how quickly the game shifts to mode E', which is expected to win a big hit in the second special figure game and to acquire a large amount of game balls. It is possible to provide a game machine having a game property, and further having a game property of how many jackpots are acquired and a large number of game balls are acquired in the time saving mode after shifting to the mode E'.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of modes A to E has been described. On the other hand, unlike the first embodiment described above, the present embodiment has three modes of the special figure gaming state, mode A, mode C'and mode E', as in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment. Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shifts to the time saving mode for a limited number of times after the completion of the probabilistic jackpot game on the condition that the game ball wins the V winning opening of the special variable winning device in the specific round of the probabilistic jackpot game. It is a V-ST machine.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 34 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 35 (A), 35 (C) and 35 (E) are the game machines 10 shown in FIG. 34. 35 (B) and 35 (D) are plan views showing the main parts of the special variable winning device 82, and FIG. 36 (A) is a jackpot classification table. 36 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 36 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, and FIG. 36 (D) is a diagram and a diagram showing an example of mode transition. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are procedures of the open / close execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37. A flowchart showing an example, FIGS. 40 and 41 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 34, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a special variable winning device 82 provided on the gaming board 31. The special variable winning device 82 is provided below the variable winning opening 316b. As shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to 35 (D), the special variable winning device 82 closes the introduction port 821 for introducing the game ball 99 into the special variable winning device 82, and the introduction port 821 for closing the introduction port 821. A movable tongue portion 822 that moves back and forth with respect to the game board 31 by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31 is provided between the position and the open position that opens the introduction port 821. As shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B), when the movable tongue portion 822 is in the standby position and the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822, the game ball 99 is a special variable winning device. It is not introduced inside the 82. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 35 (C) and 35 (D), when the introduction port 821 is opened by the movable tongue portion 822 in the open position, the game ball 99 is inside the special variable winning device 82. Can be introduced in. In the state where the special variable winning opening 39 is not operated, the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue portion 822. On the other hand, the introduction port 821 is opened by operating the movable tongue portion 822 in the V winning round described later in the jackpot game.

As shown in FIGS. 35 (C) and 35 (E), a movable claw portion 823, a V winning opening 824, and a normal winning opening 825 are provided inside the special variable winning device 82. Each of the V winning opening 824 and the normal winning opening 825 is provided with a winning ball sensor (not shown), and it is detected by these winning sensors that a game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 824 or the normal winning opening 825. Will be done. The movable claw portion 823 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between the left inclined position for guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 and the right inclined position for guiding the game ball 99 to the normal winning opening 825. Will be done. When the special variable winning opening 39 is not operated, the movable claw portion 823 is in a left inclined state and stands by in a state of guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824. Then, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has won the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round described later in which the special variable winning device 82 is operated, the movable claw portion 823 changes from the left tilted state to the right tilted state. It is rotated. Further, when the V winning round for operating the special variable winning device 82 is completed, the movable claw portion 823 returns to the left inclined state and stands by in a state of guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824.

As shown in FIG. 36 (A) as a jackpot type distribution table, the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 is sorted into a 4R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variation jackpot. In the 4R normal jackpot game, the first to fourth round games are executed as a game in which a game ball is won for the variable winning opening 316b, and the V winning round game in which the special variable winning device 82 wins the game ball is not executed. .. Therefore, in the 4R normal jackpot game, the game ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 824, and the mode is not shifted to the time saving mode. On the other hand, in the 5R probability variation jackpot game, for example, the first to fourth rounds are executed as a game in which a game ball is won for the variable winning opening 316b (see FIG. 4), and the fifth round game is a V prize. Performed as a round game. Therefore, in the 5R probability variation jackpot game, the player may shift to the time saving mode after the jackpot game is completed by winning the game ball 99 in the V winning opening 824 of the special variable winning device 82 in the fifth round game. can. Further, by executing the 5th round game as a V winning round game, whether or not the 5th round game, which is a V winning round game, is executed after the end of the 4th round game, is a 4R normal jackpot or 5R. You can know if it is a probabilistic jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by executing a promotion effect (including a failure effect) after the end of the 4-round game.

On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special figure game by winning the second starting port 315 is distributed to the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot. In the 10R probability variation jackpot game and the 16R probability variation jackpot game, a specific round game is regarded as a V winning round game. The specific round game may be at least one, and may be two or more. Further, when the jackpot type in mode E'is 10R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, for example, 10 rounds are regarded as a specific round game. By doing so, it is possible to know whether or not there are 11 rounds after executing the V winning round game, that is, whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot after the end of the V winning round game. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by executing or executing the promotion effect from the 10R probability variation jackpot to the 16R probability variation jackpot after the execution or completion of the 10-round game. As for the distribution of jackpot types, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 36 (B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C'and mode E'. The content of the mode A is the same as that of the first embodiment described above. Further, in the mode A, since the first special figure game is executed by hitting the left side, the probability change expectation degree when the lottery result becomes a big hit in the mode A is 50%. The modes C'and E'are the same as the mode C and the mode E of the first embodiment described above, except that they are the time saving modes for a limited number of times, and are the same as the fourth embodiment described above. .. Further, in mode C', the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 by hitting left, so the probability change expectation when the lottery result becomes a big hit in mode C'is It is 75%. In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, so the probability change expectation when the lottery result is a big hit in mode E'is 100%. As described above, in the present embodiment, there are three modes having different probabilistic expectations, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E', mode C', and mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 36 (C) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the maximum number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode C'and mode E', when the lottery result is a 4R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot. In this case, when the jackpot game ends without the game ball 99 winning in the V winning opening 824, the mode A is entered. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the mode C'is entered after the jackpot game is completed on condition that the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game. When the lottery result is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode E'is entered after the jackpot game is completed on condition that the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game.

FIG. 36 (D) shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the jackpot type distribution in the first special figure game is 50% for 4R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot. It is 50%. Therefore, the mode A shifts to the mode A at a rate of 50% and the mode C'at a rate of 50% after the jackpot game ends.

In mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are alternately executed by hitting left. In addition, as described above, in the 1st special figure game, the ratio is 50% for the 4R normal jackpot and 50% for the 5R probability variation jackpot, and in the 2nd special figure game, 25% for the 10R probability variation jackpot and 75% for the 16R probability variation jackpot. It is sorted by the ratio of. Therefore, from the mode C', if the lottery result becomes a big hit by the end of the time saving mode, the mode A, the mode C', and the mode E'are shifted to after the end of the big hit game. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode C'shifts to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting right, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game is 25% for the 10R probability variation jackpot and 75% for the 16R probability variation jackpot. From E', the mode shifts to mode E'after the end of the jackpot game on the condition that the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game. As described above, when the maximum number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', and in the V winning round game of the jackpot game, the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 824. When the jackpot game is completed without fail, the mode shifts from mode E'to mode A.

[Big hit game control process]
Here, in the present embodiment, there are four types of jackpots: 4R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, which are different from the first embodiment described above. In the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the start process, the 4R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, the 10R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the miss flag are used as the lottery result flags according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Is set. Then, in the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the game ball can be entered into the variable winning opening 316b or the special variable winning device 82 according to the jackpot type. Execute the round game multiple times Control to perform the jackpot game is executed.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag set to be on in step S2600 of the game state transition process of FIG. 40, which will be described later, is on, that is, whether or not it is the timing to start the jackpot game. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that it is the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the process shifts to step S2402, and when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the jackpot game (step S2401: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2407.

<Steps S2402 to S2404>
When it is time to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 specifies the jackpot type (step S2402) and determines whether or not the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (step S2403). The jackpot type is a jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 10R probability variation jackpot flag, and 16R probability variation jackpot flag) set to be turned on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. It is identified based on whether the flag) is set to on.

Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (step S2403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a V winning round that operates the special variable winning device 82 according to the number of rounds of the probabilistic jackpot (step S2404). ), The process proceeds to step S2405. For example, the MPU 41 sets 5 rounds as a V winning round in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, and sets 10 rounds as a V winning round in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (step S2403: No), the process shifts to step S2405 without setting the V winning round that operates the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2405 and S2406>
In step S2405, the MPU 41 is based on the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 10R probability variation jackpot flag, and 16R probability variation jackpot flag) set to be turned on in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. Then, the number of round games R to be executed in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game is set. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round game number R to "4" when the 4R normal jackpot flag is on, and sets the round game number R to "5" when the 5R probability change jackpot flag is on, and sets the 10R probability change. When the jackpot flag is on, the round game number R is set to "10", and when the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is on, the round game number R is set to "16" and stored in the RAM 412. As a result, the MPU 41 executes a round game having the number of round games R according to the jackpot type in the opening / closing execution mode control process in step S2416 described later. Next, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to ON (step S2406), and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in step S2407 described later to determine whether or not to start timing the opening time.

<Step S2407>
In step S2407, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag set on in step S2406 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening has been started. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2408 when the opening flag is set to on (step S2407: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2415 when the opening flag is set to off (step S2407: No). Transition.

<Step S2408>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time is being clocked, which will be started in step S2409 described later (step S2408). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2410 when the opening time is being timed (step S2408: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2409 when the opening time is not being timed (step S2408: No).

<Step S2409>
In step S2409, the MPU 41 starts timing the opening execution time and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time at which timing is started in step S2409 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to end the opening and shift to the open / close execution mode in step S2410 described later.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time at which timing starts in step S2409 has reached a predetermined predetermined time required for executing the opening. When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2411, and when the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2410: No), the jackpot game control process To finish.

<Steps S2411 to S2414>
When the opening time has reached a predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the timing of the opening time (step S2411), and sets the opening flag to off (step S2412). Next, the MPU 41 sets the open / close execution mode flag on (step S2413) and sets the one-round start flag on (step S2214). The open / close execution mode flag is referred to when determining whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode process in step S2415 described later. Further, the 1-round start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the first round of the open / close execution mode in step S2501 of the open / close execution mode process of FIG. 38, which will be described later.

<Step S2415>
In step S2415, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode flag set to be on in step S2413 is set to on. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2416 when the open / close execution mode flag is set to on (step S2415: Yes), and processes when the open / close execution mode flag is set to off (step S2415: No). To step S2417.

<Step S2416>
In step S2416, the MPU 41 executes the open / close execution mode control process. In the open / close execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes a round game for operating the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. The details of the open / close execution mode control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

<Step S2417>
In step S2417, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag set to be turned on in step S2524 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39, which will be described later, is set to on. When the ending flag is set to on (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2418, and when the ending flag is set to off (step S2417: No), the jackpot game control process To finish.

<Step S2418>
When the ending flag is set to ON (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time is being clocked, which will be started in step S2419 described later (step S2418). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2420 when the ending time is being timed (step S2418: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2419 when the ending time is not being timed (step S2418: No).

<Step S2419>
In step S2419, the MPU 41 starts timing the ending time after starting the ending, and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time measured in step S2419 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to end the ending (big hit game) in step S2420 described later.

<Step S2420>
In step S2420, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time at which timing starts in step S2419 has reached a predetermined predetermined time required for executing the ending. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2421 when the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), and when the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2420: No), the jackpot game control process. To finish.

<Steps S241 to S2423>
When the ending time has reached a predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending flag set to on in step S2524 in the open / close execution mode control process of FIG. 39 described later to off (step S2421). ). Further, the MPU 41 ends the time counting of the ending time (step S2422), sets the jackpot game end flag to on (step S2423), and ends the jackpot game control process. As a result, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. The jackpot game end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1914 in the game state transition process of FIG. 41, and the MPU 41 is a jackpot type when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes). The game state is changed from the jackpot game state to any of mode A, mode C'and mode E'according to the above.

[Open / close execution mode control process]
In the opening / closing execution mode control process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, a round game in which the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 is operated as described above is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type.

<Steps S2501 and S2502>
In step S2501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the one-round start flag set to be on in step S2414 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to start the open / close execution mode (whether or not to start the first round in the round game). When the 1-round start flag is set to on (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2506 after setting the 1-round start flag to off (step S2502). On the other hand, when the 1st round start flag is set to off (step S2501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2503.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening opening flag set to be on in step S2510 of the opening / closing execution mode control process is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening 316b of the variable winning device 316 is open. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2511 of FIG. 39 when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to on (step S2503: Yes), and when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S2503). : No), the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device operation flag set to be on in step S2508 of the open / close execution mode control process is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is in operation. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2514 of FIG. 39 when the special variable winning device operation flag is set to on (step S2504: Yes), and when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S2504: Yes). S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2505.

<Step S2505>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S2503: No) and the special variable winning device operation flag is set to off (step S2504: No), the MPU 41 starts timing in step S2522 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the interval time to be set exceeds a predetermined predetermined time (step S2505). Here, the interval time is a pause time from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game. That is, in this step S2505, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to end the interval and start the round game. When the MPU 41 determines that the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the process shifts to step S2506, and when it determines that the interval time does not exceed the predetermined time (step S2505: No), the interval The opening / closing execution mode control process is terminated in order to continue.

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
When the interval time exceeds a predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the round game to be started is the V winning round set in step S2404 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 (step S2505: Yes). Step S2506). When the MPU 41 determines that it is a V winning round (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 41 operates the special variable winning device 82 (step S2507). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the movable tongue portion 822 of the special variable winning device 82 from a standby position for closing the introduction port 821 to an open position for opening the introduction port 821. Further, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to ON (step S2508), and ends the open / close execution mode control process. The special variable winning device operation flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is operating in step S2504 described above.

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
If the round game scheduled to start is not a V winning round (step S2506: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the round game scheduled to start is a round game that opens the variable winning opening 316b, and therefore the opening / closing door of the variable winning device 316. By operating the 316c, the variable winning opening 316b is opened (step S2509). Further, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening opening flag to ON (step S2510), and ends the opening / closing execution mode control process. The variable winning opening opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the variable winning opening device 316 is operating (whether or not the variable winning opening 316b is open) in step S2503 described above.

<Step S2511>
When the variable winning opening open flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), in step S2511 of FIG. 39, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is satisfied. .. Specifically, in the MPU 41, has a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the variable winning opening 316b was opened, or has the number of game balls winning in the variable winning opening 316b exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9)? Judge whether or not. When the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2512 and when the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is not satisfied. (Step S2511: No), the open / close execution mode control process is terminated in order to maintain the open state of the variable winning opening 316b.

<Steps S2512 and S2513>
When the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316b by returning the opening / closing door 316c (step S2512), and further, the variable winning opening 316b is closed. The release flag is set to off (step S2513).

<Steps S2514 to S2516>
When the special variable winning device operation flag is set to ON (step S2504: Yes in FIG. 38), in step S2514, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won the V winning opening 824 of the special variable winning device 82. To judge. Whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 824 is determined based on a detection result by a ball entry sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning opening 824. In the special variable winning device 82, since the variable claw portion 393 is tilted to the left at the start of operation, the game ball first introduced into the special variable winning device 82 is the variable claw portion 393 in the left tilting state. Is guided to the V winning opening 824. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the V winning opening 824 (step S2514: Yes), the V winning flag is set to on (step S2515), and the variable claw portion 393 of the special variable winning device 82 is tilted to the left. It is rotated from the state to the right tilted state (step S2516). That is, in the MPU 41, when the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 824 is confirmed, the game ball introduced in the special variable winning device 82 is guided to the normal winning opening 825 by the variable claw portion 393 in the right tilted state. ..

<Step S2517>
When the game ball has not won the V winning opening 824 (step S2514: No), or when the game ball has won the V winning opening 824, the V winning flag is set to on and the movable claw portion 823 is tilted to the right. When activated in the state (step S2514: Yes and steps S2515 and S2516), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied (step S2517). Specifically, the MPU 41 has a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is started (after the introduction port 821 is opened by starting the operation of the movable tongue portion 822). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls introduced into the special variable winning device 82 (total number of game balls won in the V winning opening 824 and the normal winning opening 825) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 9). .. When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2518 and the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82. If is not satisfied (step S2517: No), the opening / closing execution mode control process is terminated in order to continue the operation of the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2518 to S2520>
When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the operation of the special variable winning device 82 (step S2518). Specifically, the MPU 41 closes the introduction port 821 by returning the movable tongue portion 822, and returns the movable claw portion 823 to the left tilted state, and when the operation of the next special variable winning device 82 starts, the game is played. The ball is guided to the V winning opening 824. Further, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to off (step S2519), and shifts the process to step S2520.

<Steps S2520 and S2521>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to off (step S2513), or when the special variable winning device operation flag is set to off (step S2519), the MPU 41 subtracts the number of round games R stored in the RAM 412 by 1. After that (step S2520), it is determined whether or not the round game number R after subtraction is "0" (step S2521). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the previously completed round game is the final round game in the open / close execution mode. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2523 when the subtracted round game number R is "0" (step S2521: Yes), and when the subtracted round game number R is not "0" (step S2521: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2522.

<Step S2522>
When the number of round games R after subtraction is not "0" (step S2521: No), the MPU 41 starts timing the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S2522), and the opening / closing execution mode control process is performed. To finish. The interval time at which timing is started in step S2522 is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2505 of FIG. 38 to determine whether it is time to activate the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2523 and S2524>
When the number of round games R after subtraction is "0" (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 is executed because it can be determined that the previously completed round game is the final round game in the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode flag is set to off (step S2523) to end the mode, and the ending flag is set to on (step S2524) to end the open / close execution mode control process. This ending flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2417 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 to determine whether to start the ending.

[Game state transition process]
Here, in the present embodiment, there are two types of jackpots, a 2R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start processing of FIG. 22, a lottery is performed according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. As a result flag, one of a 2R probability variation jackpot flag, a 16R probability variation jackpot flag, and a missed flag is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the flowchart regarding the procedure of the special figure variation start processing is omitted. Further, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment, the jackpot game start flag is set to on after the jackpot game state flag is set to on in step S1906 (step S2600 in FIG. 40). The jackpot game start flag indicates that the jackpot game is started, and is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2401 of the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the special figure game state has three modes of mode A, mode C'and mode E', in the game state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the above-mentioned first The process for mode transition is different from the game state transition process (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment (steps S2601 to S2610). Hereinafter, steps S2601 to S2610 will be described.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601 shown in FIG. 40, when the time saving mode ends and the mode C'or mode E'shifts to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the MPU 41 is set to the mode C'flag or mode. Set the E'flag to off.

<Steps S2602 to S2604>
In step S2602 shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to be turned on in step S2515 of the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39 when the jackpot game ends (step S1914: Yes and steps S1915 and S1917). Determines whether or not is set to on (step S2602). When the V winning flag is not set on (step S2602: No), the MPU 41 shifts to mode A in the special figure gaming state (step S2603), and further sets the mode A flag on (step S2604). ), The process proceeds to step S2610. That is, the MPU 41 is neither a time saving mode nor a high probability mode after the end of the jackpot game when the 4R normal jackpot or when the game ball is not won in the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round in the probability variation jackpot game. Migrate to.

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the V winning flag is on (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 41 is set to turn on the 5R probability variation jackpot flag that is set to be on in the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S2605). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variation jackpot. When the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2605: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to mode C'in the special figure gaming state (step S2606), and further sets the mode C'flag to ON. (Step S2607), the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, in the MPU 41, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot, and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the time saving mode and the high probability after the jackpot game is completed. The mode shifts to mode C', which is a mode.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the V winning flag is on and the 5R probability change jackpot flag is off (step S2602: Yes and step S2605: No), the MPU 41 is turned on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure change start process of FIG. Since it can be determined that either the 10R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag set in is set to ON, the mode E'of the special figure game state is shifted from the jackpot game state (step S2608). Further, the mode E'flag is set to on (step S2609), and the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, in the MPU 41, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, and a game ball is won in the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the time is shortened after the jackpot game is completed. Shift to mode E', which is a mode and a high probability mode.

<Step S2610>
The MPU 41 is a jackpot type flag set to be turned on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22, that is, a 4R normal jackpot flag, a 5R probability variation jackpot flag, a 10R probability variation jackpot flag, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. The flag is set to off (step S2610), and the game state transition process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to shift to the mode E'which is most advantageous to the player, after shifting to the mode C'which is distributed with a probability of 50% at the first hit, the time saving mode is set to the mode C'. By the end, it is necessary to win a big hit in the second special figure game that is distributed by the distribution device 35 with a probability of 50%. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of the probability variation jackpot is 50% in mode A, 75% in mode C', and 100% in mode E', except when the mode falls due to the end of the time saving mode, and there are three stages. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a probability variation ratio.

In the present embodiment, the case where the special variable winning device 82 having the V winning opening 824 is provided separately from the variable winning device 316 has been described. However, the openable and closable V winning opening 824 is provided in the variable winning device 316 to make a big hit. The V winning opening 824 may be opened in the V winning round of the game.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of modes A to E has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, the special figure gaming state is the three modes of mode A, mode C'and mode E'. Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a type 1 and type 2 mixing machine that performs a type 1 game which is a special figure game by the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 and a type 2 game by the feather accessory device. Is.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 50, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 42 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 43 and 44 are cross-sectional views showing a main part of the feather accessory device 83 of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 42. FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot winning / failing table, FIG. 45 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table at the time of one type of jackpot, and FIG. A diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table, FIG. 45 (D) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, FIG. 45 (E) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table, and FIG. 46 is executed by the main control device 4. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main process to be performed, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the feather accessory device control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46, and FIG. 48 is the special figure game control process of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure variation start process to be executed, FIGS. 49 and 50 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 46.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a feather accessory device 83 provided on the gaming board 31. The feather accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning device 316 and on the right side of the symbol display unit 341. As shown in FIG. 43, the feather accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 inside the feather accessory device 83, and a closing position for closing the introduction port 831 (the position of the solid line in FIG. 43). ) And the open position (the position of the virtual line in FIG. 43) for opening the introduction port 831, the movable wing portion 832 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). When the introduction port 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832 because the movable wing portion 832 is in the standby position, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B, when the movable wing portion 832 is in the open position and the introduction port 831 is opened, the movable wing portion 832 can receive the game ball. Is. The game ball received by the movable wing portion 832 can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831. The movable vane 832 is operated to the open position when the lottery result in the big hit lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 315 is a small hit (see FIG. 45 (A)), and the introduction port 831 is operated for a predetermined time. For example, the feather accessory device 83 is opened for a time (about 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds) when 1 to 3 game balls enter the feather accessory device 83. Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of a small hit may be set as appropriate, and is not limited to the time shown above.

Inside the feather accessory device 83, a V winning opening 833, a normal winning opening 834, and a V winning opening opening / closing portion 835 are provided. Each of the V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 is provided with a winning ball sensor (not shown), and it is detected by these winning sensors that a game ball has won the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. Will be done. The V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 has a solenoid (FIG. 44 (A)) between the closed position (FIG. 44 (A)) in which the V winning opening 833 is closed and the open position (FIG. 44 (B)) in which the V winning opening 833 is opened. It is rotated by a driving means such as (not shown). The V winning opening opening / closing section 835 normally stands by at a closed position that closes the V winning opening 833. For example, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a small hit, the movable vane 832 is operated to the open position. When the vane accessory device 83 is operated for a predetermined time shorter than the operating time of the movable vane 832 in synchronization with the timing, for example, in the E mode as many times as the number of time reductions, there is a 50% to 80% probability that the V winning opening 824 is operated. The V winning opening 833 is opened only for the time when the game ball wins.

As shown in FIG. 45A as a jackpot winning / failing table, the jackpot winning / failing table of the present embodiment is not classified into a high probability mode and a low probability mode as in the first embodiment described above (FIG. FIG. 12 (A) and FIG. 12 (B)), the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 and the second special figure game by winning the second starting port 315 are classified. In the first special figure game, three of the counter values (random number values) of the jackpot random number counters from 0 to 738 are jackpots, and the remaining 736 of the remaining 3 to 738 are out of order. The jackpot probability in the figure game is 3/739 (= about 1 / 246.3) in the first embodiment described above as in the low probability mode. On the other hand, in the second special figure game, as in the first special figure game, three counter values (random number values) of 0 to 2 out of the counter values (random number values) of the jackpot random number counters of 0 to 738 are jackpots. Yes, the jackpot probability is 3/739 (= about 1 / 246.3). That is, regardless of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the big hit in the big hit lottery is the big hit in the first kind game. In addition, 723 pieces of 3 to 735 are small hits, and 3 pieces of 736 to 738 are missed. Here, the small hit is a hit in which two types of games are executed in which the movable wing portion 832 of the feather accessory device 83 is opened for a predetermined time. Then, when the feather accessory device 83 is operated by the small hit and the game ball wins the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, it becomes a big hit in the two kinds of games. That is, in the second special figure game, the jackpot in the second type game is the main, and the probability of becoming a big hit in the first type game is low as in the second special figure game. Below, the jackpot in the 1st class game where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot is "1st class jackpot", and the jackpot due to the game ball winning in the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is "2nd class jackpot". May be called.

As shown in FIG. 45 (B) as a jackpot type distribution table, the type 1 jackpot is divided into 4R time-saving jackpot or 8R time-saving jackpot. Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (C) as a jackpot type distribution table, the two types of jackpots are sorted into 4R time-saving jackpots, 8R time-saving jackpots, or 16R time-saving jackpots. Here, the number of time reductions in each time reduction jackpot is set according to the lottery probability in the jackpot lottery, the small hit probability, the operating time of the feather accessory device 83 at the time of the small hit, the operating time of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835, and the like. In this embodiment, it is set to, for example, 50 times. Further, in the present embodiment, all jackpots are time-saving jackpots for both type 1 jackpot and type 2 jackpot, but the jackpot types are sorted so as to be non-time-saving jackpots at a certain ratio (for example, 20% to 50%). You may. In this case, the probability that the game ball will win the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the end of the time saving mode in mode E'is right-handed without making a special hit such as a stop hit or a twist hit. As long as the above is performed, the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 may be operated so as to be 90% or more, preferably substantially 100%. Further, in mode E', the probability that the game ball will win the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 by the end of the time saving mode is substantially 100%, and the number of jackpots from the first hit is set to an upper limit. You may. That is, the gaming machine 10 as the type 1 and type 2 mixer according to the present embodiment may be combined with the specifications of the limit machine according to the third embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 45 (D), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure game state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C'and mode E'. The contents of the mode A, the mode C'and the mode E'are the same as those in the fourth embodiment described above, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of the mode E', the mode C'and the mode A.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 45 (E) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in the mode C'and mode E'which are the time saving modes, the mode A is shifted. Further, in the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode C'is transitioned to after the jackpot game is completed, and in the case of a type 2 jackpot, the mode E'is transitioned to after the jackpot game is completed.

Here, in mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by hitting left, and the jackpot in the first special figure game is one kind jackpot, so from mode A After the jackpot game is over, the mode shifts to mode C'.

In mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are alternately executed by hitting left. That is, in the mode C', the first special figure game in which the type 1 jackpot is 100% and the second special figure game in which the type 2 jackpot is the main are alternately executed. Therefore, from mode C', on condition that the time saving mode does not end, there is a probability of approximately 50% (more accurately, a probability slightly exceeding 50%) after the end of the jackpot game, and the mode shifts to mode C', which is approximately 50%. (To be exact, the probability is slightly less than 50%), and the mode E'is entered. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode C', the mode C'shifts to mode A.

In mode E', the second special figure game is executed by hitting the right side, and the type 2 jackpot is the main, and the type 1 jackpot is performed with a low probability (about 1 / 246.3 in this embodiment). Therefore, the mode E'is generally shifted to the mode E'after the jackpot game is completed, and falls to the mode C'with a low probability. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state in mode E', the mode E'shifts to mode A. Further, in the case of a type 1 jackpot in mode E', the mode E'may be looped without falling into the mode C'.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a jackpot winning / failing table different from that of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 45 (A)), and can execute two types of games for operating the feather accessory device 83. , A part of the main process is different from the above-described first embodiment, and the special figure variation start process and the game state transition process in the special figure game control process executed as the main process are different.

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 46, in the main process of the present embodiment, the feather accessory device control process is executed between the special figure game control process of step S1306 and the jackpot game control process of step S1307 (step S2701). The details of the feather accessory device control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

[Feather device control process]
<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the feather accessory device control process, first, in the MPU 41, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop flag set to be turned on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20 is set to on. Is determined (step S2801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to execute the two types of games when the special figure game is completed. When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), it shifts the process to step S2802 and determines that the feather accessory device operation flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2802>
When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: Yes), the feather accessory device operation that is set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 48, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the flag is set to ON (step S2802). When the MPU 41 determines that the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S2802: Yes), it can determine that it is the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83, so that the process proceeds to step S2803. .. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S2801: No), it can determine that it is not the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83, so that the feather accessory device control process To finish.

<Steps S2803 to S2808>
When the feather accessory device operation flag is set to on (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation flag to off (step S2803), and at the same time, the movable vane portion of the feather accessory device 83 is set. The operation of 832 is started (step S2804), and the movable vane operating flag is set to on (step S2805). As a result, in the feather accessory device 83, the introduction port 831 is opened, and the movable wing portion 832 makes it possible to introduce the game ball into the wing accessory device 83. Next, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V winning opening opening / closing part 835 (step S2806), and sets the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag to ON (step S2807). As a result, the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83 is opened, and the game ball introduced inside the feather accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831 is in a state where it can win a prize in the V winning opening 833. Further, the MPU 41 starts timing the operating time (step S2808). The time counting in step S2808 is for determining whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 to the standby state and close the V winning opening 833 in step S2810 described later, or in step S2814. It is referred to by the MPU 41 to determine whether it is time to return the movable vane 832 and close the inlet 831.

<Step S2809>
The MPU 41 is a V winning opening opening / closing part set to be turned on in step S2807 when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S2801: No), that is, when it is not the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83. It is determined whether or not the operating flag is set to on (step S2809). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning opening 833 is open. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2810 when the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to on (step S2809: Yes), and when the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to off. (Step S2809: No), the process shifts to step S2815.

<Step S2810>
When the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the timing time at which the timing is started in step S2808 is relative to the predetermined first predetermined time. Is determined (step S2810). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 to the standby position and close the V winning opening 833. When the MPU 41 determines that the time counting time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), the process shifts to step S2813, and when it is determined that the timing time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes). S2810: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the MPU 41 determines that the time counting time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won the V winning opening 833 (step S2811). Whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 833 is determined by, for example, whether or not the game ball is detected by a ball entry sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning opening 833. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won a prize in the V winning opening 833 (step S2811: Yes), the type 2 jackpot flag is set to on (step S2812), and the feather accessory device control process ends. Here, the type 2 jackpot flag indicates whether to execute the jackpot game based on the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 833, and the jackpot game state in step S3005 in the game state transition process of FIG. 49 described later. Referenced by the MPU 41 to determine whether or not to transition to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won in the V winning opening 833 (step S2811: No), the MPU 41 ends the feather accessory device control process without setting the type 2 jackpot flag on.

<Steps S2813 and S2814>
When the MPU 41 determines that the time counting time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the timing to close the V winning opening 833, the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening opening / closing unit 835 to the standby position. (Step S2813), the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to off (step S2814), and the feather accessory device control process is terminated.

<Step S2815>
When the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to off (step S2809: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the movable vane operating flag set to be turned on in step S2805 is set to on. Determine (step S2815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V winning opening 833 is open. The MPU 41 determines whether or not the introduction port 831 of the feather accessory device 83 is open. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2816 when the movable wing operating flag is set to on (step S2815: Yes), and when the movable wing operating flag is set to off (step S2815: Yes). No), the feather accessory device control process is terminated.

<Step S2816>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the timing time at which the timing is started in step S2808 has reached a predetermined second predetermined time when the movable vane operating flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes). (Step S2816). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the movable vane portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. When the MPU 41 determines that the time counting time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the process shifts to step S2817, and when it is determined that the timing time has not reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes). S2816: No), the feather accessory device control process is terminated in order to maintain the open state of the introduction port 831 of the feather accessory device 83.

<Steps S2817 to S2820>
When the time counting time reaches the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable vane 832 to the standby position and closes the introduction port 831 (step S2817), and the movable vane operating flag. Is set to off (step S2818). As a result, the two types of games when the lottery result in the big hit lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 is a small hit are completed. Further, the MPU 41 ends the timing of the operation time of the feather accessory device 83 started in step S2808 (step S2819), sets the feather accessory device operation end flag to on (step S2820), and sets the feather combination. The object device control process is terminated. The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates that the operation of the feather accessory device 83 has been completed, that is, the two types of games have been completed, and the two types in step S3003 of the game state transition process of FIG. 49, which will be described later. It is referred to by the MPU 41 to determine whether or not to shift to the jackpot game state after the end of the game.

[Special figure fluctuation start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a type 1 type 2 type mixer, the special figure fluctuation start processing is different from the special figure fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. Has a point. As shown in FIG. 48, the special figure variation start process of the present embodiment is different from the special figure variation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above until the lottery result flag is set. (Steps S2901 to S2908). Further, in the present embodiment, as a lottery result other than the big hit in the big hit lottery in the second special figure game, there is a small hit in addition to the loss. It is assumed that the cases where the steps S1811 and S1817 (see FIG. 22) relating to the deviation in the special figure fluctuation start processing of the embodiment of the above embodiment are small hits are taken into consideration (steps S2909 and S2910). Hereinafter, steps S2901 to S2910 will be described.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
In the special figure change start processing of the present embodiment, when the special figure change is started, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the special figure game to be started is the first special figure game (step S2901). When the MPU 41 determines that the first special figure game is to be started (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 41 makes a hit / fail determination based on the first special figure jackpot hit / fail table (see FIG. 45 (A)) (step S2902), and performs processing. The process proceeds to step S2904. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the first special figure game is not started (step S2901: No), that is, when it is determined to start the second special figure game, the second special figure jackpot winning / failing table (FIG. 45 (A)). A pass / fail determination is made based on (see step S2903), and the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2905 when the lottery result is a big hit (step S2904: Yes), and when the lottery result is not a big hit (step S2904: No), that is, when the lottery result is a small hit or a miss. The process proceeds to step S2906.

<Step S2905>
When the lottery result is a big hit (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 41 sorts the big hit types based on the special figure big hit table (see FIG. 45 (B)) (step S2905), and shifts the process to step S2908. .. Specifically, the MPU 41 distributes the jackpot type to either the 4R time-saving jackpot or the 8R time-saving jackpot according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter.

<Steps S2906 and S2907>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a small hit when the lottery result is not a big hit (step S2904: No), that is, when the lottery result is a small hit or a miss (step S2906). When the lottery result is a small hit (step S2906: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation flag to on (step S2907), and shifts the process to step S2908. The feather accessory device operation flag is a flag for operating the feather accessory device 83, and in step S2802 of the feather accessory device control process of FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not to operate the feather accessory device 83. Referenced by MPU41 for. On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a small hit (step S2906: No), that is, when the lottery result is out of order, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2908 without setting the feather accessory device operation flag to ON.

<Step S2908>
When the MPU 41 executes the process according to the lottery result (steps S2904 to S2907), the lottery result flag is set to on. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag on when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 4R time-saving jackpot or an 8R time-saving jackpot, and sets the small hit flag on when it is a small hit. , Set the off flag to on if it is off.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
When the lottery result flag is set to ON (step S2908), the MPU 41 executes a predetermined process (steps S1807 to S1811) in the same manner as in the first mode described above, and then is set to ON in step S2908. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2809). When the miss flag or the small hit flag is set to on (step S2909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the miss flag or the small hit flag to off (step S2810), and shifts the process to step S1815. On the other hand, when the off flag or the small hit flag is set to off (step S2909: No), the process proceeds to step S1818. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S1815 to S1818 of the special figure variation start process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above are executed, and the special figure variation start process is completed.

[Game state transition process]
Since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop probabilistic machine, in the gaming state transition processing of the first embodiment described above, at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the type 1 game). ), It is determined whether or not the time saving mode ends, and the mode A is shifted to after the time saving mode ends (see steps S1909 to S1913 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 1-type and 2-type mixer, the operation of the feather accessory device is performed not only at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the 1-type game). At the end (at the end of the two-kind game), it is determined whether or not the time saving mode ends, and the mode A is shifted to after the time saving mode ends (steps S3001 and S3002 in FIG. 49). It is different from the game state transition process of the embodiment. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the game shifts to the jackpot game state triggered by the jackpot of the special figure game (type 1 jackpot), but in the present embodiment, not only the jackpot of type 1 but also the feather accessory device It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it shifts to the jackpot game state by two kinds of jackpots based on the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 833 of 83 (steps S3003 to S3005 in FIG. 49). Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the mode transition destination is determined according to the jackpot type (see steps S1914 to S1932 in FIG. 13A), but in the present embodiment, one type is used. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the mode transition destination is determined depending on whether it is a jackpot or a two-kind jackpot (steps S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50). Hereinafter, steps S3001 to S3012 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

<Step S3001>
In step S3001 shown in FIG. 49, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1900: Yes and step S1901), the special figure of FIG. Figure It is determined whether or not the type 1 jackpot flag set to be on in step S2908 of the fluctuation start process is set to on (step S3001). The type 1 jackpot flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process to shift to the jackpot gaming state (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002 when the type 1 jackpot flag is set to off (step S3001: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a small hit or a miss.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the feather accessory device operation flag set to be on in step S2907 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 48 is set to on. The feather accessory device operation flag indicates that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a small hit, that is, the feather accessory device 83 is operated. When the feather accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is not the timing to shift the gaming state because it is necessary to operate the feather accessory device 83. The game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when the feather accessory device operation flag is set to off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 executes a process of whether or not to shift to either mode A, mode C'or mode E'. (Steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Steps S3003 to S3004>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1900: No), the MPU 41 turns on the feather accessory device operation end flag set to be on in step S2820 of the feather accessory device control process of FIG. 47. It is determined whether or not it is set to (step S3003). The feather accessory device operation end flag indicates that it is the timing to end the operation of the feather accessory device 83, that is, the timing to return the movable vane portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. be. When the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation end flag to off (step S3004), and shifts the process to step S3005. On the other hand, when the feather accessory device operation end flag is set to off (step S3003: No), the process shifts to step S1914 of FIG.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 is at the timing to end the operation of the feather accessory device 83 (step S3003: Yes and step S3004), the two-kind jackpot flag set to ON in step S2812 of the feather accessory device control process of FIG. 47 is set. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (step S3005). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state after the operation of the feather accessory device 83 is completed. The MPU 41 is in the jackpot game state as in the case where it is determined that the 2nd class jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3005: Yes) and the 1st class flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes). (Steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the type 2 jackpot flag is set to off (step S3005: No), it is the same as when the feather accessory device operation flag is set to off (step S3002: No). , Mode A, mode C'or mode E'(steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Step S3006>
In step S3006 shown in FIG. 50, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game state when the jackpot game end flag set to be on in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17 is set to on. When the process is executed (Step S1914: Yes, Steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the type 1 jackpot flag set to be ON in step S2908 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 48 is set to ON. .. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the transition destination after the end of the jackpot game is either mode C'or mode E'in the special figure game state. When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3007. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010 when the type 1 jackpot flag is not set to on (step S3002: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot flag is set to on.

<Steps S3007 to S3009>
When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to mode C'in the special figure game state (step S3007), and further sets the mode C'flag to ON. (Step S3008). That is, the MPU 41 is in a time saving mode and a high probability mode after the end of the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and alternates between the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315. The mode shifts to mode C'where the game ball can enter. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 jackpot flag to off (step S3009), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
When the type 1 jackpot flag is set to off (step S3006: No), that is, when the type 2 jackpot flag is set to on, the MPU 41 shifts to mode E'in the special figure gaming state (step S3006: No). Step S3010), and further set the mode E'flag to on (step S3011). That is, in the case of a two-kind jackpot by winning a game ball into the V winning opening 833 of the feather accessory device 83, the MPU 41 is in a time saving mode and a high probability mode after the jackpot game is completed, and is supported by the electric support member 36. The game ball shifts to the mode E', which makes it easy for the game ball to win a prize at the second starting port 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 2 jackpot flag to off (step S3012), and ends the game state transition process.

<Step S3013>
In the case of a type 1 jackpot, the mode C'is shifted to the mode C'after the jackpot game is completed, and the mode C'flag is set to on (steps S3007 and S3008). Since the mode E'flag is set to on (steps S3010 and S3011), if the mode A is shifted to by the end of the time saving mode (steps S1908 to S1910 in FIG. 49), it is turned on in step S3008. The mode C'flag set to or the mode E'flag set to on in step S3010 is set to off.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment changes from mode A to mode C', from mode C'to mode A, to any of mode C'and mode E', from mode E'in the special figure gaming state. It shifts to either mode A or mode E'. That is, how to continue the time saving mode by the type 1 jackpot or the type 2 jackpot in the mode'C and mode E'which are the time saving modes after the first hit in the mode A and before the fall to the mode A due to the end of the time saving. Has game characteristics. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine 10 having a game property similar to that of an ST machine, even though it is a type 1 type 2 type mixer. Further, in mode C', the first special figure game and the second special figure game can be alternately executed by left-handed hitting, while in mode E', the second special figure game is basically executed by right-handed hitting. At the same time, the probability of becoming a type 1 jackpot in the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game is compared with the probability of becoming a type 2 jackpot due to the operation of the feather accessory device due to the small hit in the 2nd special figure game. Is high. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in mode E', there is a lower possibility of falling to mode A due to the end of the time saving mode as compared with mode C', and as a result, it is advantageous for the player to have a big hit. Modes C'and E'will have two modes with different expectations for continuation, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

[7th to 12th embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38 which is alternately rotated in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by the game ball. The gaming machine 10 including the distribution device 35 has been described. On the other hand, in the seventh to twelfth embodiments, the configuration of the distribution unit of the distribution device is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the seventh to twelfth embodiments will be described individually with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54.

<7th Embodiment>
The distribution device of the present embodiment is common to the first embodiment described above in that it includes a distribution unit that is alternately rotated in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, but the distribution unit is a solenoid or the like. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is alternately rotated in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by a driving means (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (B), the distribution device 35A of the present embodiment includes a distribution member 38A (distribution unit) rotatably fixed directly below the introduction port 350. .. The distribution member 38A is formed in a claw shape, and is rotated by a driving means (not shown) between the right inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (A) and the left inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (B). It is driven by motion. When the distribution member 38A is located at the right inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (A), the game ball 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 is guided to the first passage 351 by the distribution member 38A. As a result, the game ball 99 wins the left first starting port 314L. On the other hand, when the distribution member 38A is located at the left inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (B), the game ball 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 is placed in the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38A. Be guided. As a result, the game ball 99 wins the second starting port 315 when it receives the support of the electric support member 36, and wins the right first starting port 314R when it does not receive the support of the electric support member 36. In the distribution device 35A of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the game ball from being launched so that the game ball enters the second passage 352, for example, the distribution device 35A is made opaque. It is preferable to make the distribution member 38A invisible from the outside.

Further, the distribution member 38A may be driven by the driving means so as to rotate alternately between the left tilt position and the right tilt position, for example, at regular time intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Conceivable. Of course, the distribution member 38A does not necessarily have to be rotated at a fixed cycle, and may be driven to perform a patterned irregular rotation motion, and may be driven by a plurality of different rotation patterns for a fixed time or indefinitely. It may be changed every hour to operate. For example, the rotation pattern that makes it easy to enter the first passage 351 and the rotation pattern that makes it easy to enter the second passage 352 may be changed at regular time intervals or indefinite time intervals. As a rotation pattern that makes it easy to enter the first passage 351, a pattern in which the time when the distribution member 38A stops at the right inclination position is longer than the time when the distribution member 38A stops at the left inclination position, and the distribution member 38A is left from the right inclination position. A pattern in which the speed (time) of rotating to the inclined position is slower (longer) than the speed (time) of rotating from the left inclined position to the right inclined position can be considered. When a plurality of rotation patterns are used in combination, the distribution member 38A is rotationally driven so that the game ball 99 is finally distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical value of 1: 1. Is preferable. However, the distribution member 38A may be rotationally driven so that the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is other than 1: 1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed according to the game state. For example, the mode C can be configured so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352 than the mode B, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350 is detected by the entry sensor, the distribution member 38A is distributed when the distribution member 38A is in the left inclined position. While rotating the member 38A to the right inclined position, it is also conceivable to rotate the distribution member 38A to the left inclined position when the distribution member 38A is in the right inclined position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the distribution member 38A is rotated at a predetermined timing by the driving means, the ratio of the game ball 99 being distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is temporarily set. It can be accidentally or intentionally biased. As a result, when the special figure game state is mode B or mode C, the game ball 99 is guided to either the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, that is, the game ball 99 supports the electric support member 36. In response to this, it is possible to enjoy the game while being happy and worried about whether or not to win the second starting port 315, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<8th Embodiment>
In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution portion is rotated between the right tilting position and the left tilting position by a driving means such as a solenoid, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above. In that respect, it is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a different shape of the distribution portion from the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment described above.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (B), the distribution device 35B of the present embodiment includes a distribution member 38B (distribution unit) rotatably fixed directly below the introduction port 350. .. The distribution member 38B is formed in a substantially T-shape or an anchor shape having an arc portion 382B and a shaft portion 383B, and has a right tilt position shown in FIG. 52 (A) and a left tilt position shown in FIG. 52 (B). It is rotationally driven to and from the position by a drive means (not shown). The distribution member 38B of the present embodiment is different from the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment only in shape, and is the same as the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment in other respects. Yes, it has the same effect as that of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above. Further, the distribution member 38B of the present embodiment can be redesigned in the same manner as the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above.

Further, the shape and the like of the distribution portion that distributes the game ball 99 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by being rotated by the driving means are the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. The design is not limited to the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment shown in 52, and the design can be changed in various ways. For example, the shape may be the same as or similar to that of the distribution member 38 of the first embodiment described above, and in the distribution member 38B of the eighth embodiment, a flat plate portion or a bent portion is provided instead of the arc portion 382B. It may be a configuration.

<9th and 10th embodiments>
The distribution device 35 of the ninth and tenth embodiments rotates the game ball 99 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by interfering with the game ball 99 as a distribution unit, thereby passing the game ball 99 in the first passage 351. Alternatively, it differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is provided with a rotating body that is distributed to any of the second passages 352.

As shown in FIG. 53 (A), in the game machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the distribution unit of the distribution device 35C has a columnar shape that can freely rotate in both the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. It is configured as a roller 38C (rotating body) and is arranged directly below the introduction port 350.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53B, in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the distribution unit of the distribution device 35D is a wind turbine capable of freely rotating in both the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. It is configured as 38D and is located directly below the introduction port 350. The wind turbine 38D is a rotating body 382D fixed by a nail 381D (fixed portion) so as to be freely rotatable. The end of the nail 381D is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the nail 381D is made of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since the nail 381D of the wind turbine 38D can be plastically changed, the nail 381D is set to the initial setting position when the position of the nail 381D deviates from the initial setting position and the position of the rotating body 382D deviates from the initial setting position. It becomes possible to return to. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 381D.

Further, also in the game machine 10 according to the ninth and tenth embodiments, rotating bodies such as a roller 38C and a windmill 38D that freely rotate clockwise or counterclockwise due to interference of the game balls 99 are distributed. Since it is adopted as a unit, the ratio of the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment described above, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the gaming ball 99 becomes the first passage 351 and the first passage 351 and the first. Since it is possible to enjoy the game while being delighted about which of the two passages 352, that is, whether or not the game ball 99 wins the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. You can improve your interest. Further, when the distribution unit is a rotating body such as a roller 38C or a windmill 38D, the player tends to distribute the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the rotating body as the distribution unit (individuals between the gaming machines). It is also possible to read the difference). As a result, the player can find a firing stroke in which the gaming ball is easily distributed to the second passage 352 by adjusting the firing intensity (launching stroke) of the gaming ball by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. Because it becomes possible, it is fun to search for a launch strength that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed to the second passage 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed from the plurality of game machines 10 to the second passage 352. Will be able to be obtained.

The configuration of the rotating body as the distribution unit is not limited to the columnar roller 38C shown in FIG. 53 (A) and the wind turbine 38D shown in FIG. 53 (B), and the design can be changed. For example, the rotating body has a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular column or a square column, a flat cross-section member such as an elliptical column member or a flat plate member, a rotating body having irregularities on the outer peripheral surface such as a gear, and a plurality of wings. It may be a propeller-shaped member or the like.

Further, the rotating body such as the columnar roller 38C and the windmill 38D may be configured to be rotatable in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by a driving means such as a solenoid connected to the rotating body. In this case, it is conceivable that the rotational drive of the rotating body alternately switches between the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction at regular intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Of course, the rotating body does not necessarily have to switch the rotation direction at regular time intervals, and may switch the rotation direction at irregular patterned time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the rotation direction of the rotating body so that the game ball 99 is distributed between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical value of 1: 1. The rotation direction of the rotating body may be switched so that the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball to 352 is other than 1: 1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be changed according to the game state. For example, the mode C can be configured to drive the rotating body so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352 than the mode B, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 350, and when the entry sensor detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350, the rotating body is rotated in the direction opposite to the previous rotation direction. It is also possible.

<11th and 12th embodiments>
In the distribution device of the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the game ball 99 is passed through the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by the immovable and non-rotatable distribution portion (fixed distribution portion) regardless of rotation or rotation. It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is distributed to any of the above.

As shown in FIG. 54 (A), the distribution device 35E of the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment has a top portion 389E directly below the introduction port 350 and distributes as a symmetrical mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E. The part is formed. In the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E, the game ball 99 that interferes with the top portion 389E or its vicinity is distributed to the left and right, so that the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), in the distribution device 35F of the gaming machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the apex nail 389F (fixed portion) is located directly below the introduction port 350, and is a symmetrical triangle. A distribution portion formed by the nail 38F is formed. In this triangular nail 38F, the game ball 99 that interferes with the apex nail 389F is distributed to the left and right, so that the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Each end of the triangular nail 38F is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the triangular nail 38F is made of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 38F can be plastically changed, the triangular nail 38F can be returned to the initial setting position when the position of the triangular nail 38F deviates from the initial setting position. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the triangular nail 38F.

Further, also in the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, since the distribution portion is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution portion such as a mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E or a triangular nail 38F, the gaming ball 99 is used. The ratio of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment described above, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the gaming ball 99 becomes the first passage 351 and the first passage 351 and the first. Since it is possible to enjoy the game while being delighted about which of the two passages 352, that is, whether or not the game ball 99 wins the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36. You can improve your interest. Further, when the distribution portion is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution portion such as a mountain-shaped fixed portion 38E or a triangular nail 38F, the player distributes the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the fixed distribution portion. It is also possible to read the tendency of (individual difference between gaming machines). As a result, the player can find a firing stroke in which the gaming ball is easily distributed to the second passage 352 by adjusting the firing intensity (launching stroke) of the gaming ball by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. Because it becomes possible, it is fun to search for a launch strength that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed to the second passage 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed from the plurality of game machines 10 to the second passage 352. Will be able to be obtained.

The configuration of the distribution portion for distributing the game ball 99 to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E shown in FIG. 54 (A) and the triangular nail 38F shown in FIG. 54 (B). The design can be changed. For example, the distribution portion may have another symmetrical shape such as a dome-shaped mountain portion, and four or more nails such as a square nail (diamond nail) in which the apex nail is located directly below the introduction port 350. It may consist of a nail or a single nail. Of course, by making the shape asymmetrical to the left and right, the distribution ratio of the game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be biased.

[13th to 29th Embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory has a plurality of delay guides 364 from the wall portion 361 in an inclined shape in which the tip portion is located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. By providing these plurality of delay guides 364 in a staggered manner, the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric accessory 36 can be secured for a long time. On the other hand, in the 13th to 29th embodiments, the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is secured for a long time by a configuration different from that of the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the 13th to 29th embodiments will be described individually with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63.

<Thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments>
In the first embodiment described above, the delay portion of the electric support member 36, which is an ordinary electric accessory, extends in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361, and the tip portion is located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. By providing a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 and moving the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 along a meandering path, the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is secured for a long time. On the other hand, also in the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, the game ball 99 is configured to move in a meandering path by the delay portion in the electric support member as in the first embodiment described above. However, the configuration of the delay portion is different from that of the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (C). Here, FIG. 55 (A) is a plan view of the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (B) is a plan view of the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 55 (C) is a plan view of the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 55 (A), in the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364A as delay portions is an equilateral triangle in a plan view, and the right side ( The sloping sides are located on the upstream side), and they are arranged in a staggered pattern as a whole. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), in the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364B as delay portions is semicircular in a plan view. It is arranged in a staggered pattern as a whole. In the plurality of delay guides 364A and 364B shown in FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (B), the game balls 99 interfere with the delay guides 364A and 364B in the electric support members 36A and 36B, so that the game balls 99 It moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering.

The plurality of delay guides as delay portions are not limited to those having an equilateral triangle or semi-circular shape in a plan view, and are not particularly limited as long as the game ball 99 can meander. For example, a plurality of delay guides are formed in a square shape such as an isosceles triangle, a right triangle, a trapezoid, or a parallel quadrilateral, and arranged in a staggered pattern so that the inclined side is located on the right side (upstream side). Is formed into a shape having a parabolic or arcuate outer circumference such as a quadrant, a semi-ellipse, or a quadrant, and staggered so that the parabolic or arcuate outer periphery is located on the right side (upstream side). It may be arranged or the like.

As shown in FIG. 55 (C), in the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the delay portion is formed as a meandering groove 364C. Even with such a meandering groove 364C, the game ball 99 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering in the electric support member 36C. The shape of the meandering groove 364C as the delay portion can be various as long as the shape of the meandering groove 364C is such that the game ball 99 can meander.

As described above, in the electric support members 36A to 36C of the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, the game balls 99 meander in the electric support members 36A to 36C as in the game machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. By moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side), it is possible to secure a long residence time of the game balls 99 in the electric support members 36A to 36C. As a result, also in the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, as in the first embodiment described above, when the player makes a right-handed strike when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the motor is electrically operated. It becomes difficult to receive support by the support members 36A to 36C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the expected profit of the gaming machine 10 from being obtained when the right-handed hit is made in a situation where the left-handed hit is encouraged.

<16th to 29th embodiments>
In the first embodiment described above, as the delay portion of the electric support member 36, a plurality of inclined portions extending from the wall portion 361 in a staggered manner and the tip portion is located on the left side (downstream side) of the base end portion. By providing the delay guide 364 and moving the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 along a meandering path, the moving distance of the game ball in the electric support member 36 is increased, and the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is increased. Was secured for a long time. On the other hand, in the 16th to 29th embodiments, as a delay portion of the electric support member, the game ball is linearly moved in the electric support member, and the residence time of the game ball in the electric support member is long. It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is configured so that the above-mentioned one can be secured for a long time.

Hereinafter, the 16th to 29th embodiments will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 63, but the electric support members of these embodiments can also secure a long residence time of the game ball, and thus are described above. It has the same effect as that of the first embodiment. That is, if the player makes a right-handed hit while the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, it becomes difficult to receive support from the electric support member, so that the right-hand side is encouraged in a situation where left-handed hitting is encouraged. It is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the expected profit in the gaming machine 10 from being obtained in the case of hitting.

(16th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 56 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36D of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 56 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A1-A1 cutting line of FIG. 56 (A). be.

As shown in FIGS. 56A and 56B, in the sixteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear convex portions 364D extending in a series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36D. Has been done. The plurality of linear convex portions 364D extend in parallel with each other at regular intervals. Each linear convex portion 364D has a horizontal plane 365D and a vertical plane 366D, and has a uniform cross section of a triangle. In the electric support member 36D of the present embodiment, the horizontal plane 365D is provided, so that the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on the horizontal plane 365D.

The horizontal plane 365D may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but a rough surface having a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes a pear-skin surface due to embossing and an uneven surface due to embossing or the like. Further, the moving resistance of the game ball may be increased by arranging the elastic member on the horizontal plane or forming the horizontal plane with the elastic material.

The linear convex portion 364D may be provided with a slightly inclined surface whose left side (downstream side) is slightly lower or higher than the right side (upstream side) instead of the horizontal plane 365D. In this case, if the inclination angle of the slightly inclined surface with respect to the horizontal is smaller than the inclination angle of the electric support member 36D with respect to the horizontal, the delay function is performed. preferable. Further, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear convex portions as delay portions, and there may be one.

(17th to 19th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 57 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member 36E of the gaming machine 10 according to the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 57 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine 10 according to the 18th embodiment. FIG. 57 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the support member 36F, and FIG. 57 (C) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member 36G of the gaming machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment.

The electric support members 36E to 36G of the 17th to 19th embodiments are provided with a plurality of linear convex portions 364E to 364G having horizontal planes 365E to 365G, and the electric support members of the 16th embodiment described above are provided. Common with 36D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the linear convex portion 364E of the 17th embodiment is provided with an inclined surface 366E in place of the vertical surface 366D of the 16th embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the linear convex portion 364F of the eighteenth embodiment has a horizontal plane 365F, but an arcuate surface 366F is provided in place of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. In that respect, it differs from the above-described 16th embodiment. The surface of the electric support member 36D of the 16th embodiment that substitutes for the vertical surface 366D is not limited to the inclined surface 366E and the arc surface 366F, and may be a surface having another shape.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), in the eighteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear convex portions 364G are provided adjacent to each other, and the horizontal plane 365G and the vertical plane 366G are alternately continuous. It is different from the linear convex portion 364D of the 16th embodiment described above. Of course, also in the eighteenth embodiment, instead of the vertical surface 366G, a surface having another shape such as an inclined surface or an arc surface may be adopted.

The linear convex portions 364E, 364F, and 364G of the 17th to 19th embodiments can be changed in the same manner as the 16th embodiment described above.

(20th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 58 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36H of the gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 58 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A2-A2 cutting line of FIG. 58 (A). ..

The electric support member 36H of the twentieth embodiment shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B) is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is provided as a plurality of linear recesses.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 56 (B), in the twentieth embodiment, a plurality of linear recesses 364H extending in a series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36H. ing. The plurality of linear recesses 364H extend in parallel with each other at regular intervals. Each linear recess 364H has a horizontal surface 365H and a vertical surface 366H, and has a uniform cross section of a triangle. In the electric support member 36H of the present embodiment, the horizontal plane 365H is provided, so that the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on the horizontal plane 365H. As the linear recess 364H, instead of the horizontal surface 365H and the vertical surface 366H, a surface having another shape may be adopted as in the above-described 16th to 19th embodiments. Further, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear recesses as delay portions, and there may be one.

(21st to 26th Embodiments)
Here, FIG. 59 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36I of the gaming machine 10 according to the 21st embodiment, and FIG. 59 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36J of the gaming machine 10 according to the 22nd embodiment. A perspective view, FIG. 60 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member 36K of the gaming machine 10 according to the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 60 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine 10 according to the 24th embodiment. A perspective view showing a main part of the support member 36L, FIG. 61 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member 36M of the gaming machine 10 according to the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 61 (B) is a 26th embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main part of the electric support member 36N of the gaming machine 10 which concerns on a form.

The electric support members 36I to 36N of the 21st to 26th embodiments shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 are provided as a plurality of convex portions 364I to 364N in which delay portions are discretely arranged. It is different from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the 21st embodiment, the delay portion of the electric support member 36I is formed as a plurality of convex portions 364I, and these convex portions 364I are arranged in a rectangular grid pattern. Each convex portion 364I has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36I along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the 16th embodiment described above (A1-A1 in FIG. 56 (A)). The shape is similar to the cross-sectional shape along the cutting line (see FIG. 56 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 59 (B), in the 22nd embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364J having the same shape as the 21st embodiment described above are formed in an orthorhombic grid shape (diamond grid shape, triangular grid shape, etc.). It is arranged in an isosceles grid pattern).

As shown in FIG. 60 (A), in the 23rd embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364K are formed in a square columnar shape, and these convex portions 364K are arranged in a rectangular lattice pattern. The plurality of convex portions 364K may be formed in a polygonal columnar shape in addition to a quadrangular columnar shape such as a triangular columnar shape and a pentagonal columnar shape, and may be formed in a staggered shape (orthorhombic lattice shape (diamond lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape)). It may be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 60B, in the 24th embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364L are formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape, and these convex portions 364L are arranged in a rectangular lattice pattern. The plurality of convex portions 364L may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape in addition to a quadrangular pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid shape and a pentagonal pyramid shape, and may be formed in an oblique grid shape (diamond grid shape, triangular grid shape, isosceles grid shape). It may be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), in the 25th embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364M are formed in a columnar shape, and these convex portions 364M are arranged in a rectangular lattice pattern.

As shown in FIG. 61 (B), in the 26th embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364N are formed in a hemispherical shape, and these convex portions 364N are arranged in a rectangular lattice pattern.

The plurality of convex portions 364M of the 25th embodiment and the plurality of convex portions 364N of the 26th embodiment may be arranged in an orthorhombic lattice pattern (diamond lattice pattern, triangular lattice pattern, isosceles lattice pattern). Further, instead of the plurality of convex portions 364M and the plurality of convex portions 364N, a plurality of convex portions having other shapes such as a conical shape and a truncated cone shape may be arranged discretely.

It should be noted that the plurality of convex portions as the delay portions do not necessarily all have the same shape, and a plurality of convex portions having different shapes may be arranged in combination, or in combination with the linear convex portion or the linear concave portion. It may be arranged. Further, the plurality of convex portions as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged so as to have regularity other than the grid pattern, or may be randomly arranged without regularity.

(27th and 28th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 62 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36O of the gaming machine 10 according to the 27th embodiment, and FIG. 62 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36P of the gaming machine 10 according to the 28th embodiment. It is a perspective view.

The electric support members 36O and 36P of the 27th and 28th embodiments shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B are provided as a plurality of recesses 364O and 364P in which delay portions are discretely arranged. In that respect, it differs from the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the electric support member 36O of the 27th embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364O are formed as delay portions, and these recesses 364O are arranged in a rectangular lattice pattern. Each recess 364O has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36O, which is a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the 16th embodiment described above (A1-A1 cutting in FIG. 56 (A)). The shape is similar to the cross-sectional shape along the line (see FIG. 56 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 62B, in the electric support member 36P of the 28th embodiment, as the delay portion, a plurality of recesses 364P having the same shape as the recess 364O of the 27th embodiment described above are oblique. They are arranged in a square grid pattern (diamond grid pattern, triangular grid pattern, isosceles grid pattern).

The shape of the plurality of recesses as the delay portion can be changed in various ways. The bottom surface of the above may be circular.

Further, the plurality of recesses as the delay portions do not necessarily all have the same shape, and a plurality of recesses having different shapes may be arranged in combination, and the linear convex portion, the linear concave portion, and the plurality of convex portions may be arranged in combination. It may be arranged in combination with. Further, the plurality of recesses as the delay portions do not necessarily have to be arranged in a grid pattern, and may be arranged so as to have regularity other than the grid pattern, or may be randomly arranged without regularity.

(29th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 63 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36Q of the gaming machine 10 according to the 29th embodiment, and FIG. 63 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line of FIG. 63 (A). be.

The electric support member 36Q of the 29th embodiment shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B) is provided as a plurality of rollers 364Q in which the delay portion is rotationally driven. It is different from the form.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B), the electric support member 36Q of the 29th embodiment includes a plurality of rollers 364Q (five in this embodiment) as delay portions. However, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of rollers 364Q, and at least one roller 364Q may be provided. Each roller 364Q is rotatably supported by arranging the rotation axis along the lateral direction of the electric support member 36Q (the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball 99). Further, each roller 364Q is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction, which is the direction opposite to the moving direction of the game ball, by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Therefore, the game ball 99 that moves the electric support member 36Q interferes with the plurality of rollers 364Q, so that a load is applied toward the right side (upstream side). As a result, the momentum of the game ball 99 moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) is reduced, so that the residence time of the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q is secured for a long time.

The outer surface of the roller 364Q may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but a rough surface having a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes a pear-skin surface due to embossing and an uneven surface due to embossing or the like. Further, an elastic member may be arranged on the outer surface of the roller 364Q, or the outer surface of the roller 364Q may be formed of an elastic material to increase the movement resistance of the game ball.

Further, when the delay portion is configured as a roller, a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force may be applied to the game ball 99 via the roller. As a result, the game ball 99 is sucked by the roller, so that the momentum of the game ball 99 can be reduced. In this case, the roller may be rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction as in the 29th embodiment, but may be configured to be freely rotatable without being rotationally driven by the driving means.

Further, the roller 364Q has linear convex portions 364D to 364G, linear concave portions 364H, and a plurality of convex portions arranged in a grid pattern, like the electric support members 36D to 36P of the 16th to 28th embodiments described above. It is also conceivable to use it in addition to the configuration in which 364I to 364N and the recesses 364O and 364P are provided.

[30th to 38th Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. The right first starting port 314R is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, and the second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314L. The case where the ball receiving portion 391 is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 which is the region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the starting port 314R and the starting port 314R has been described. On the other hand, the 30th to 38th embodiments are different from the above-described first embodiment in that one each of the first starting port and the second starting port is provided. Hereinafter, embodiments of the 30th to 38th embodiments will be described individually with reference to the drawings.

<30th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape supports the winning of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315 has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the electric support member is formed in an inverted shape. Further, since the electric support member is formed in an inverted shape, the configurations of the first starting port and the second starting port are also different from those of the above-described first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the thirtieth embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. Here, FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the gaming machine 10 and the electric support member 36R according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 64 (B) is a diagram showing the main parts of the game board 31 including the electric support member 36R. A perspective view, FIG. 65 (A) is a view when the electric support member 36R is in the standby state in FIG. 64 (A), and FIG. 65 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A3-A3 cutting line of FIG. 65 (A). FIG. 66 (A) is a view when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position in FIG. 64 (A), and FIG. 66 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A4-A4 cutting line of FIG. 66 (A).

In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. , The right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is a distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region directly below the introduction port 350. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and below the exit of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 (at the second starting port 315). A standby position that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 and an operating position that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 315. It can be moved back and forth between the game boards 31.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is in the region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of a certain ball receiving portion 391. That is, the first starting port 314 of the present embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and is provided in the game ball 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351. Any of the distributed game balls 99 can win a prize in the same first starting port 314. Further, the second starting port 315 of the present embodiment is provided at a position offset to the right from directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 described later, and the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 is provided. The ball is not directly entered into the second starting port 315.

As shown in FIGS. 64 (A) and 64 (B), the electric support member 36R has an inverted shape having a left guide portion 361R (first portion) and a right guide portion 362R (second portion). .. The left guide portion 361R is located below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and to the left of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the right toward the second starting port 315. Therefore, the left guidance unit 361R can guide the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 to the right side. The right guide portion 362R extends in a series between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the right side of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second starting port 315. .. Therefore, the right guidance unit 362R can guide the game ball moving from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315. Further, it is preferable that the right guide portion 362R is provided with a delay portion as in the first embodiment described above. As a result, in the gaming state in which the electric support member 36R is operated for a short time, when a hitting method (right-handed) other than the recommended hitting method (left-handed) is performed, the game ball wins the second starting port 315. It becomes difficult to be done. That is, in the gaming machine 10, by eliminating the advantage of performing a right-handed strike in a gaming state in which a left-handed strike is encouraged, the player can be made to actively perform a left-handed strike.

A penetration portion 363R is provided between the left guide portion 361R and the right guide portion 362R so as to be located above the second starting port 315. The penetrating portion 363R has a notch shape that opens forward, and is formed in a form that allows the game ball 99 to pass through. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided from the left guiding portion 361R can pass through the penetrating portion 363R and enter the second starting port 315, and the game ball 99 guided from the right guiding portion 362R passes through the penetrating portion 363R. It is possible to enter the second starting port 315 through the above. Further, the electric support member 36R is located in the front-rear direction between the standby position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the second start port 315 and the operating position for allowing the game ball to enter the second start port 315. It is possible to move to. The movement of the electric support member 36R in the front-rear direction is realized by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Further, although the electric support member 36R has a different shape from the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the operating conditions, operating patterns, and the like are the same as those of the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in modes A to C, when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is a hit, the game ball 99 passing through the first through gate 318 can enter the second starting port 315 for a short time. Driven, in mode D and mode E, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 when the lottery result in the lottery per drawing is a hit is driven for a long time so that the game ball 99 can enter the second starting port 315. .. The electric support member 36R is operated on the condition that the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is detected at the first through gate 318 without performing a lottery per drawing. You may.

As shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B, when the electric support member 36R is in the standby position, the electric support member 36R does not protrude from the game board 31, and the whole is inside the game board 31. Located in. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 enters the first starting port 314 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the left guiding unit 361R. Further, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 falls along the game board 31 on the left side of the stage 310 without being guided to the second start port 315 by the right guide portion 362R, and is dropped from the out port 317. It is discharged. That is, the electric support member 36R allows the game ball 99 to enter the first starting port 314 when it is in the standby position, as in the case of the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above. 2 The entry of the game ball 99 into the starting port 315 is restricted.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position, the electric support member 36R protrudes from the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is guided toward the penetrating portion 363R by the left guiding portion 361R, and the electric support member 36R operates until the game ball 99 reaches the penetrating portion 363R. When it is in the position, it passes through the penetrating portion 363R and enters the second starting port 315. Further, when the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is guided toward the penetrating portion 363R by the right guiding portion 362R and the electric support member 36R is in the operating position until the game ball 99 reaches the penetrating portion 363R. , Passes through the penetrating portion 363R and enters the second starting port 315. That is, the electric support member 36R, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, allows the game ball 99 to be restricted to the first starting port 314 when it is in the operating position, while the second one. Allows the game ball 99 to enter the starting port 315. Further, in the electric support member 36R, both the game ball 99 that passes through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 when in the operating position and the game ball 99 that is launched into the right region of the game board 31 are second. Allows the ball to enter the starting port 315.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portion) are provided on the right side of the sorting device 35. The evacuation guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36R in the direction of evacuation from the distribution device 35. That is, when the retracting guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the second starting port 315, whereby the electric support member 36R is opened for a short time. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , The ball is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36R is supported by the electric support member 36R, and the electric support member 36R is used. If the support cannot be received, the ball is entered into the first starting port 314. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 314 by the first passage 351 and the game ball 99 is inserted into the first starting port 314 by the second passage 352. The second passage 352 or the electric support member 36R may take three states, one in which the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 315. Further, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 depends on the presence or absence of the operation of the electric support member 36R, and the electric support member 36R The operation time and operation frequency of the special figure depend on the mode type of the game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36R, but also the gaming balls distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Since the ease of entering the second starting port 315 of 99 is different, the game is not monotonous unlike the conventional game machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

Further, the electric support member 36R of the present embodiment is not only whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315, as in the first embodiment described above, but also the first of the distribution device 35. At the same time, the presence or absence of restrictions on the entry of the game ball 99 passing through the two passages 352 into the first starting port 314 is switched. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R cooperate with each other to form the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315. The ball entry ratio with and can be changed. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 50%) in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different. Three game states (100%) are realized, the monotony of the game is reduced based on the three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio, and the operation of the electric support member 36R is a new game according to the control mode. It is possible to provide a game machine with a high degree of interest.

By the way, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the game ball at the time of right-handed hitting like the electric support member 36 passes above the first starting port 314R and enters the second starting port 315. In this case, if the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position at the timing when the game ball passes above the first start port 314R, the game ball at the time of right-handed hit may enter the first start port 314. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball at the time of right-handed hit is guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guiding portion 362R of the electric support member 36R, so that the game ball at the time of right-handed hitting is the first starting port 314. Does not pass above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball at the time of right-handed hitting from entering the first starting port 314.

The penetrating portion of the electric support member 36R is not limited to the notch shape opened forward, and may be a through hole opened only upward and downward without opening in the horizontal direction.

<31st Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape supports the winning of the game ball 99 to the second starting port 315 has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip. Further, since the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip, the configurations of the first starting port and the second starting port are also different from those of the above-described first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the 31st embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B). Here, FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B) are views showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the game machine 10 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S according to the present embodiment. 67 (A) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is closed, and FIG. 67 (B) shows a state in which the electric tulip accessory device 36S is open.

In the above-described first embodiment, the two first starting ports 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function are provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. , The right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the second starting port 315 having a function different from that of the first starting port 314 is a distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region directly below the introduction port 350.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 introduces the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region directly below the mouth 350. That is, the first starting port 314 of the present embodiment is provided at the position of the second starting port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game balls 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351 are provided. Any of the game balls 99 distributed to can win a prize in the same first starting port 314. Further, the second starting port 315 of the present embodiment is provided inside the electric tulip accessory device 36S, which will be described later.

The electric tulip accessory device 36S is provided at a position offset to the right from the region directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, and has a housing 367S fixed to the game board 31 and a rotatable left and right wing member 3681S. It has 3682S.

The housing 367S has an upper opening 369S that allows rotation of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S and entry of the game ball 99. The upper opening 369S is a portion for introducing the game ball 99 inside the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and is provided at a position offset to the right side of the region directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. That is, the game ball guided to the second passage 352 is restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 369S. Further, a second starting port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 369S. The second starting port 315 is offset to the right with respect to the second passage 352, similarly to the upper opening 369S.

Further, above the upper opening 369S, a triangular nail 31S composed of three nails is provided. The triangular nail 31S restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric tulip accessory device 36S in a state where the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed (see FIG. 67A). Instead of the triangular nail 31S, the entry of the game ball 99 may be restricted by one nail, or the entry of the game ball may be restricted by something other than the nail. Further, by reducing the distance between the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S in the closed state, the game ball 99 to the electric tulip accessory device 36S in the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S If the ball entry can be restricted, the triangular nail 31S may be omitted.

On the right side of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, a road nail 31M'(induction portion) composed of a plurality of nails is provided through a gap that allows the game ball 99 to pass through. The road nail 31M'is provided so as to incline downward to the left, and guides the game ball 99, which is launched into the right side region of the game board 31 and flows down the right side region, toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Therefore, in the state where the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are open (see FIG. 67 (B)), the game ball 99 is guided by the road nail 31M', and the game ball 99 is an electric tulip accessory through the upper opening 369S. It is introduced inside the device 36S, and the game ball 99 is inserted into the second starting port 315. On the other hand, in the state where the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are closed (see FIG. 67 (A)), the game ball 99 guided by the road nail 31M'enters the upper opening 369S by the right wing member 3682S. Is restricted, passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M', and is discharged from the out port 317. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

The left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S can be rotated by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31, and the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed by the driving means so that the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are close to each other. The state (see FIG. 67 (A)) and the open state (see FIG. 67 (B)) in which the tips of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are separated from each other are switched. The left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above. That is, in the ordinary electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) causes the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment to open. Correspondingly, the return of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to the closure of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment.

In the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67 (A), the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 collides with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S and enters the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S. I can't ball. That is, in the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, the left wing member 3681S hinders the entry of the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 into the second starting port 315. At this time, the game ball 99 that collides with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S is flipped to the left side and falls to the ball receiving portion 391, and is guided to the first starting port 314 by the ball receiving portion 391 to be guided to the first starting port 314. Win 314. Further, the game ball 99, which is launched into the right side region of the game board 31 and guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M', collides with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S and hits the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S. The ball cannot enter the inside of the device 36S. At this time, the game ball 99 that collides with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M'as described above, and is discharged from the out port 317. ..

In the open state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67 (B), the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 is picked up by the left wing member 3681S and enters the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Then, a prize is given to the second starting port 315. Further, the game ball 99, which flows down the right side region of the game board 31 and is guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M', bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. It is picked up by the right wing member 3682S and enters the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and a prize is given to the second starting port 315. That is, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed, the electric tulip accessory device 36S is launched into the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the right region of the game board 31. Any of the game balls 99 is allowed to enter the second starting port 315.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. Evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portions) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the electric tulip accessory device 36S of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, not only is there a restriction on the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315, but also the distribution is performed. At the same time, the presence or absence of restrictions on the entry of the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the device 35 into the first starting port 314 is switched. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S) cooperate with each other as in the first embodiment described above. The ball entry ratio between the 1 start port 314 and the 2nd start port 315 can be varied. As a result, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is 50%) in which the expected values of the ball entry ratios of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different. Achieves three game states (100%), reduces the monotony of the game based on the three game states with different expected values of the ball entry ratio, and of the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S). It is possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having new playability according to the control mode of the operation. In particular, when configured as the electric tulip accessory device 36S, for example, in a gaming state (for example, mode A or mode C) in which a left-handed hitting of a game ball is encouraged in the left-hand area of the game board 31, the right-hand area of the game board 31 A delay portion (delay guide 364 of the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above) to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the electric tulip accessory device 36S when a right-handed hit is performed to launch the game ball. ) Is not required, and a known electric tulip accessory device 36S can be adopted. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has an advantage that the design becomes easier as compared with the first embodiment described above. Further, in the present embodiment, since only one first starting port 314 is required, one first starting port and one ball entry sensor can be omitted as compared with the first embodiment described above. It is easier to design and is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost as compared with the first embodiment of the above.

<32nd Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a general winning opening having a function different from that of the first starting port is provided directly below the second passage of the sorting device. ..

Hereinafter, the 32nd embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 68 (A). Here, FIG. 68A is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68 (A), the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that there is only one first starting port 314, but the first starting port 314 is the distribution device 35. It is common with the above-described first embodiment in that it is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the above. The second starting port 315, which has a different function from the first starting port 314, is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391, which is a region directly below the introduction port 350, as in the first embodiment described above. Further, the electric support member 36 is continuously provided between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the lower exit of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, as in the first embodiment described above. It is extended and can be moved in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Further, below the second passage 352, a general winning opening 313'which has a function different from that of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 is provided instead of the first starting port. That is, the electric support member 36 is in a state in which the general winning opening 313'is open in the standby position, while the general winning opening 313' is closed in the operating position. Further, the electric support member 36 restricts the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 315 in the state where the general winning opening 313'is opened in the standby position, while the general winning opening 313' is closed in the operating position. Then, the player is guided to the second starting port 315, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351. Therefore, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is the first. The ball is entered into the starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36 is supported by the operation of the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 If the support is not received, the ball will be entered into the general winning opening 313'.

Here, the conventional distribution device for a gaming machine distributes a game ball to a first starting portion and a second starting portion, and has a drawback that the game becomes monotonous. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is entered into the first starting port 314 and the second passage. A state in which the game ball of 352 is entered into the general winning opening 313'and a state in which the game ball of the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. It can take two states. Further, which of the general winning opening 313'and the second starting opening 315 the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated, and the electric support member 36 The operation time and operation frequency of the special figure depend on the mode type of the game state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, but also the game balls 99 that are distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in the conventional game machine, and the fun of the game is improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the general winning opening 313', the game machine 10 having a new game property that cannot be realized by the conventional game machine is provided. NS. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, but the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 has the first starting port 314 and the game ball 99. The ball is entered into the general winning opening 313'without being entered into any of the second starting openings 315. On the other hand, in the mode C as the latent probability change, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315. do. That is, in the mode A, half of the game ball 99 introduced into the distribution device 35 is entered into the starting port (first starting opening 314) and half is entered into the general winning opening 313', while half is entered into the general winning opening 313'. In mode C, all the game balls 99 are entered into the starting port (half of which is the first starting port 314 and half of which is the second starting port 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only is the second special figure game that is not executed in mode A executed, but also the special figure that is a multiple of mode A is based on the number of game balls that are entered into the distribution device 35. The game is executed. In other words, in mode C (latent probability change), the chances of receiving a jackpot lottery are doubled compared to mode A. As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 of a new gaming machine, which cannot be realized by the conventional gaming machine, is provided.

Further, if the number of prize balls is different between the first start opening 314 and the general winning opening 313', the increase / decrease of the game balls in the special figure game is different from that of the first embodiment described above. You can also. For example, by increasing the number of prize balls for the general winning opening 313'is larger than the number of prize balls for the first starting opening 314, it is possible to impart a gradual decrease in the number of game balls in the special figure game. On the other hand, by making the number of prize balls for the general winning opening 313'smaller than the number of prize balls for the first starting opening 314, it is possible to impart a playability in which the number of game balls in the special figure game is drastically reduced. In this case, by increasing the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game, it is possible to obtain the game machine 10 in which the number of game balls increases and decreases rapidly.

<33rd Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the right first starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 has been described. Further, in the 32nd embodiment described above, the case where the general winning opening 313'is provided directly below the second passage 352 has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, neither the first starting port nor the general winning port is provided directly below the second passage of the sorting device, and the above-mentioned first embodiment and 32nd embodiment are described above. It is different from the form. In this embodiment, the second starting port is not provided directly below the second passage of the sorting device.

Hereinafter, the 33rd embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 68 (B). Here, FIG. 68B is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68 (B), the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that there is only one first starting port 314, but the first starting port 314 is the distribution device 35. It is common with the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the above, and further is common with the 32nd embodiment. Further, the present embodiment also has the same as the first embodiment and the 32nd embodiment described above for the second starting port 315 and the electric support member 36. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, neither the first starting port nor the general winning port is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Further, directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, a second starting port having a function different from that of the first starting port and the general winning port, a winning port such as a through gate, or the like is not provided. Then, in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 is guided to the second starting port 315, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 315, as described above. Common to the first embodiment and the 32nd embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 falls along the game board 31, and various winning openings. It is different from the first embodiment and the 32nd embodiment described above in that it is discharged from the out port 317 without winning a prize.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351. Therefore, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is the first starting. The ball is entered into the mouth 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is entered into the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36 is supported by the operation of the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 operates the game ball 99. If support cannot be received, it will be discharged from the out port 317. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314 and the game ball in the second passage 352. Can take three states: a state in which the ball is discharged from the out port 317 and a state in which the game ball in the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. Further, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is discharged from the out port 317 or entered into the second starting port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated, and the electric support member 36 The operation time and operation frequency of the special figure depend on the mode type of the game state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36, but also the game distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state. Since the ease of entering the ball 99 into the second starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous unlike the conventional game machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the gaming ball 99 in the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, so that the gaming ball 99 has a new game property that cannot be achieved by a conventional gaming machine. The gaming machine 10 is provided. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, but the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is discharged from the out port 317. NS. On the other hand, in mode C, which is a latent probability change, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enters the first starting port 314, and the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the second starting port 315. Will be done. That is, half of the game ball 99 introduced into the distribution device 35 enters the start port (first start port 314) and half is discharged from the out port 317 in the mode A, while in the mode C, the game ball 99 is discharged. All the game balls 99 are put into the starting port (half of which is the first starting port 314 and half of which is the second starting port 315). Therefore, in mode C, not only is the second special figure game that is not executed in mode A executed, but also the special figure that is a multiple of mode A is based on the number of game balls that are entered into the distribution device 35. The game is executed. In other words, in mode C (latent probability change), the chances of receiving a jackpot lottery are doubled compared to mode A. As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 of a new gaming machine, which cannot be realized by the conventional gaming machine, is provided.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 is discharged from the out port 317 when there is no support by the electric support member 36, but is discharged from the second passage 352 below the distribution device 35. A winning opening may be provided at a distant position so that a game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 can enter the winning opening.

<34th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved to the second starting port 315 in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the electric support member is slid and moved along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 34th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. Here, FIG. 69 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the electric support member 36T in the standby state, and FIG. 69 (B) is a diagram. A perspective view of the main part of 69 (A), FIG. 70 (A) is a view showing the main part when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position in FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 70 (B) is FIG. 70 (A). It is a perspective view which shows the main part of).

In the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided, the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is a sphere that is a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R. It is provided in the center of the receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69A, there is one first starting port 314, and the first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36T is provided on the left side of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36T. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

The electric support member 36T has a plate shape slightly inclined to the left, and can move along the game board 31 along the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36T. Specifically, the electric support member 36T has a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and an operating position adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M'. It is possible to move between. That is, the electric support member 36T can operate between the standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is closed.

As shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, that is, the electric support member 36T is directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the second starting port 315. When located directly above, the electric support member 36T closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36T is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36T and discharged from the out port 317. Further, the electric support member 36T forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36T and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second starting port 315 side by the road nail 31M'passes through the gap between the electric support member 36T (second starting port 315) and the road nail 31M', and passes through the gap between the road nail 31M'and the out opening 317. Is discharged from.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (A) and 70 (B), when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, that is, when the electric support member 36T is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M', the electric support is provided. The member 36T opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter the ball, and allows the game ball 99 moving the road nail 31M'to the left to enter the second starting port 315. It bridges between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is second by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (two in the present embodiment) as guard portions are arranged on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. The plurality of nails 31B prevent the game ball 99 from the electric support member 36T toward the second starting port 315 from jumping over the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position. be. That is, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T toward the second starting port 315 collides with a plurality of guard nails 31B without directly entering the second starting port 315 when the moving speed is high or the like. Then, the ball is entered into the second starting port 315.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. Evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portions) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , The ball is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, the road nail 31M It falls from between'and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the electric support member 36T bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the second starting port 315 open. The game ball 99 distributed to the two passages 352 and the game ball 99 that moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 and is out. It can take three states of being discharged from the mouth 317. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. Whether or not the electric support member 36T is activated depends on whether or not the electric support member 36T is activated, and the operating time and operating frequency of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36T, but also the second passage 352 and the second stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in the conventional game machine, and the fun of the game is improved.

<35th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved to the second starting port 315 in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31. The case where the winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first embodiment described above is described in that the electric support member can rotate between the standby position and the operating position in the direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane). It is different from the form. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 35th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 71. Here, FIG. 71 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36U of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 71 (B) is FIG. 71 (A). It is a figure which shows the main part of.

In the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided, the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), there is one first starting port 314, and the first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36U is provided on the left side of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36U. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B), the electric support member 36U has a plate shape having a pair of wall portions 361U protruding upward from the edge portion in the width direction, and is slightly inclined downward to the left. Have been placed. The pair of wall portions 361U function as guides for guiding the game ball 99 from the right end (upstream side) end portion 362 to the left side (downstream side) end portion 363. The electric support member 36U is provided with a rotating shaft 362U, and when a rotational force is input to the rotating shaft 362U from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36U is seen in a plan view in FIG. 71. (B) is rotated in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. Since the electric support member 36U is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

Further, the electric support member 36U is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling a drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is in a standby position (immediately below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315). The position of the solid line in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M'(the position of the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B)). It is possible to move between. That is, the electric support member 36U can operate between the standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is closed.

When the electric support member 36U is located at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B), that is, the electric support member 36U is directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and at the second starting port 315. When located directly above, the electric support member 36U closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36U is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36U and discharged from the out port 317. Further, the electric support member 36U forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36U and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second starting port 315 side by the road nail 31M'passes through the gap between the electric support member 36U (second starting port 315) and the road nail 31M', and passes through the gap between the road nail 31M'and the out opening 317. Is discharged from.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is located at the operating position indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B), that is, when the electric support member 36U is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M', it is electrically operated. The support member 36U opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter the ball, and also allows the game ball 99 moving the road nail 31M'to the left to enter the second starting port 315. As a bridge between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is second by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. Also in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second starting port 315 is second-started on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are arranged to prevent the mouth 315 from jumping over.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. Evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portions) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , The ball is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position, the road nail 31M It falls from between'and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is in the operating position, the electric support member 36U bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the second starting port 315 open. The game ball 99 distributed to the two passages 352 and the game ball 99 that moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 and is out. It can take three states of being discharged from the mouth 317. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. Whether or not the electric support member 36U is activated depends on whether or not the electric support member 36U is activated, and the operating time and operating frequency of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36U, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. 2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in the conventional game machine, and the fun of the game is improved.

The electric support member 36U may be arranged horizontally without being tilted with respect to the horizontal plane, and may be configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that inclines downward to the left may be provided on the surface of the electric support member 36U to promote the movement of the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315.

<36th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved to the second starting port 315 in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31. The case where the winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the electric support member can rotate in the vertical plane along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. .. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 36th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 72. Here, FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36V of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 72 (A) shows the electric support member 36V. When in the standby position, FIG. 72 (B) shows the case where the electric support member 36V is in the intermediate position between the standby position and the operating position, and FIG. 72 (C) shows the case where the electric support member 36V is in the operating position. ..

In the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided, the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although omitted in the drawings, there is one first starting port 314 as in the 34th embodiment and the 35th embodiment described above, and this first embodiment. The starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, also in the present embodiment, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 (not shown) below the variable winning device 316, and the left side of the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315. An electric support member 36V is provided so as to be rotatable between the upper part and the upper part. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36V. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

The electric support member 36V is provided with a rotary shaft 362V, and when a rotational force is input to the rotary shaft 362V from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36V is aligned with the game board 31. It is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction of FIGS. 72 (A) to 72 (C) in a vertical plane. Further, the electric support member 36V is rotated in a vertical plane by controlling a drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is in a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315 (not shown). It is possible to move between the position of the solid line in FIG. 72 (A) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M'(the position of the solid line in FIG. 72 (C)). That is, the electric support member 36V closes the gap between the standby position (the position of the solid line in FIG. 72 (A)) that closes the second starting port 315 and the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. It can operate between the operating position (the position of the solid line in FIG. 72 (C)). The electric support member 36V is in a state of being slightly inclined downward to the left in the standby position and the operating position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left in the electric support member 36V. However, the electric support member 36V may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that inclines downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 36V, and the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99 is provided. You may promote the move to.

When the electric support member 36V is located at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. 72 (A), that is, when the electric support member 36V is located directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315. The electric support member 36V closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36V is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36V and discharged from the out port 317. Further, the electric support member 36V forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36V and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second starting port 315 side by the road nail 31M'passes through the gap between the electric support member 36V (second starting port 315) and the road nail 31M', and passes through the gap between the road nail 31M'and the out opening 317. Is discharged from.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is located at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. 72 (C), that is, when the electric support member 36V is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M', the electric support member 36V is started second. The mouth 315 is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and the road nail 31M'and the road nail 31M' are allowed to enter the second starting port 315 of the game ball 99 that moves to the left. 2 A bridge between the starting port 315 and the starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is the first by the electric support member 36V. It moves toward the 2 start port 315 and enters the second start port 315. Also in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second starting port 315 is second-started on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are arranged to prevent the mouth 315 from jumping over.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. Evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portions) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , The ball is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position, the road nail 31M It falls from between'and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the operating position, the electric support member 36V bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the second starting port 315 open. The game ball 99 distributed to the two passages 352 and the game ball 99 that moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315 are both entered into the second starting port 315. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 and is out. It can take three states of being discharged from the mouth 317. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. Whether or not the electric support member 36V is activated depends on whether or not the electric support member 36V is activated, and the operating time and operating frequency of the electric support member 36V depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36V, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. 2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in the conventional game machine, and the fun of the game is improved.

In the present embodiment, the electric support member 36V has two stop positions, one above the second starting port 315 and the left side of the road nail 31M'. In addition to these stop positions, FIG. 72 ( The position where the electric support member 36V shown in B) stands up may be set as the operating position to stop. At the position where the electric support member 36V stands up, both the second starting port 315 and the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'are opened at the same time. Therefore, while the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the second starting port 315, the game ball 99 that flows down the right side of the distribution device 35 and the game ball 99 that moves the road nail 31M' The entry of the ball into the second starting port 315 is restricted by the upright electric support member 36V. As a result, in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the electric support member 36V is opened for a short time without providing the evacuation guidance portion such as the evacuation guide nails 393 and 394, the right region of the distribution device 35 is formed. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36V.

<37th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved to the second starting port 315 in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electric support member can rotate between the standby position and the operating position in the direction intersecting the game board 31 (in a substantially horizontal plane), and can be rotated from above the second starting port 315. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it has a length dimension extending to the left side of the road nail 31M'. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 37th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. Here, FIG. 73 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the electric support member 36W in the standby position, and FIG. 73 (B) is a diagram. A perspective view of a main part of 73 (A), FIG. 74 (A) is a view showing a case where the electric support member 36W is in the operating position in FIG. 73 (B), and FIG. 74 (B) is an electric support member in the present embodiment. It is a top view which shows the modification of 36W.

In the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided, the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73A, there is one first starting port 314, and the first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36W is provided on the left side of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36W. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 73A and 73B, the electric support member 36W is an elliptical plate material in a plan view, and has an elliptical through hole 363W and a closing portion 364W. The electric support member 36W has a length dimension extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M', and is arranged in a slightly downwardly inclined state. As a result, the electric support member 36W can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M'to the second starting port 315 at the operating position. The electric support member 36W may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that inclines downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W to move to the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99. May promote the movement of.

The short diameter of the through hole 363W is larger than the diameter of the game ball 99, and the game ball 99 can pass through the through hole 363W. Further, the through hole 363W is located between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and the second starting port when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position. It is formed at a position where it can be located directly above 315. The shape of the electric support member 36W and the through hole 363W is not limited to an elliptical shape, and may be another shape such as a circular shape, an oval shape, or an oblong shape. The closing portion 364W is located above the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position. Located in between.

The electric support member 36W is provided with a rotary shaft 362W, and when a rotational force is input to the rotary shaft 362W from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36W intersects the game board 31. It is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction of FIG. 73 (B) in the direction (in a substantially horizontal plane). Further, the electric support member 36W is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and while blocking the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, the through hole 363W is the second starting port 315. The standby position (see FIG. 73 (B)) located between the road nail 31M and the through hole 363W is located directly above the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 to open the second starting port 315. On the other hand, it is movable between the operating position (see FIG. 74 (A)) that bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'. That is, the electric support member 36W can operate between the standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the operating position in which the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is closed.

When the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, that is, when the closing portion 364W of the electric support member 36W is located above the second starting port 315 and the through hole 363W is located adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M'. The electric support member 36W closes the second starting port 315 by the closing portion 364W, and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36W is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36W and discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W is located at a position where the game ball 99 can pass between the electric support member 36W and the road nail 31M'. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left by the road nail 31M'passes through the through hole 363W and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, that is, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W is located directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, and the closing portion 364W is located. When it is located between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M', the electric support member 36W opens the second starting port 315 by the through hole 363W to allow the game ball 99 to enter the road nail. A closing portion 364W bridges between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315 so that the game ball 99 that moves 31M'to the left can win a prize at the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is second by the electric support member 36W. It moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. Also in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second starting port 315 is second-started on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are arranged to prevent the mouth 315 from jumping over.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. Evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portions) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 351 is , The ball is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W It passes through and falls from between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the second starting port 315 open. Therefore, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball 99 that moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left toward the second start port 315 enter the second start port 315. Be sphered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 and is out. It can take three states of being discharged from the mouth 317. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. Ruka depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36W, and the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36W depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36W, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. 2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in the conventional game machine, and the fun of the game is improved.

In addition, the electric support member 36W replaces the through hole 363W which is opened only up and down, and as shown in FIG. It may be provided.

<38th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved to the second starting port 315 in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31. The case where the entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to rotate around a rotation axis inclined in the horizontal direction, and it has a length dimension extending from above the second starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M'. , Different from the first embodiment described above. Further, one first starting port 314 is provided directly under the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the second starting port 315 is provided directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. It is different from the first embodiment described above.

Hereinafter, the 38th embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. Here, FIG. 75 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the game machine 10 and the electric support member 36X according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 75 (B) is a view of the electric support member 36X. A perspective view, FIG. 76 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A5-A5 cutting line of FIG. 75 (B), FIG. 76 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line of FIG. A) shows a main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, and FIG. 77 (B) shows the main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modified example of the electric support member 36X in the present embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided, the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the right first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) is provided. The starting port 314R is provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Further, in the first embodiment described above, the second starting port 315 is provided between the left first starting port 314L and the right first starting port 314R in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35. It is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75A, there is one first starting port 314, and the first starting port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36X is provided on the left side of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36X. In this embodiment as well, by increasing the size of the stage 310, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M'.

As shown in FIGS. 75 (A), 75 (B), 76 (A) and 76 (B), the electric support member 36X has a first penetrating portion 361X and a second penetrating portion 362X, and has a first penetrating portion 361X and a second penetrating portion 362X. 2 It has a length dimension extending from above the starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M', and is arranged in a slightly downwardly inclined state. As a result, the electric support member 36X can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M'to the second starting port 315 at the operating position. The electric support member 36X may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that inclines downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W to move to the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99. May promote the movement of.

The first penetrating portion 361X is defined by a pair of projecting pieces 361aX and 361bX facing each other, and is open to the left side. The first penetrating portion 361X is located directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35, and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the protruding piece 361aX allows the game ball 99 to enter the second starting port 315. (See FIG. 77 (A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the second starting port 315 by penetrating in the vertical direction (see FIG. 77 (A)). See FIG. 77 (B)).

The second penetrating portion 362X is defined by a pair of projecting pieces 362aX and 362bX facing each other, and is open to the right side. Further, the second penetrating portion 362X penetrates in the direction orthogonal to the first penetrating portion 361X. The second penetrating portion 362X does not necessarily have to penetrate in the direction orthogonal to the first penetrating portion 362X, and may penetrate in the direction intersecting the first penetrating portion 361X. The second penetrating portion 362X is located in the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M', and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the second penetrating portion 362X is in a state of penetrating in the vertical direction to start the second. Allows the game ball 99 to pass through the gap between the mouth 315 and the road nail 31M'(see FIG. 77 (A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the protruding piece 362aX allows the second starting port. The passage of the game ball 99 is restricted between the 315 and the road nail 31M'(see FIG. 77 (B)).

The electric support member 36X is made rotatable around a rotation axis extending along a substantially horizontal direction slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41. Further, the electric support member 36X is rotated by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the first penetrating portion 361X penetrates in the front-rear direction to block the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. On the other hand, the standby position (see FIG. 77 (A)) in which the second penetrating portion 363W penetrates vertically between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M', and the first penetrating portion 361X An operating position in which the second penetrating portion 362W penetrates in the front-rear direction and bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'while penetrating in the vertical direction directly under the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. (See FIG. 77 (B)) and can be moved. That is, the electric support member 36X has a standby position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. 77 (A) is closed, while the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is opened. , It is possible to operate between the operating position in which the second starting port 315 shown in FIG. 77 (B) is opened and the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'is closed. ..

As shown in FIG. 77 (A), when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the electric support member 36X closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. do. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 36X is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 36X and discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball 99 can pass through the second penetrating portion 362X with the road nail 31M'in the vertical direction. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left by the road nail 31M'passes through the second penetrating portion 362X and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the electric support member 36X opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter the ball, and also allows the game ball 99 to enter the road. A bridge is provided between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315 so that the game ball 99 that moves the nail 31M'to the left can win a prize at the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball that moves the road nail 31M'to the left is the first by the electric support member 36X. It moves toward the 2 start port 315 and enters the second start port 315. Also in the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second starting port 315 is second-started on the upper left side of the second starting port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (guard portions) are arranged to prevent the mouth 315 from jumping over.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided to the right side of the distribution device 35 in the direction of retracting from the distribution device 35. Evacuation guide nails 393, 394 (evacuation guide portions) are provided to guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the distribution device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Therefore, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 in the right region of the distribution device 35 from being guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, since the first starting port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are provided. Is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 is not inserted into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the road nail 31M'to the left side toward the second starting port 315, and penetrates the second through when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. It passes through the portion 362X, falls from between the road nail 31M'and the second starting port 315, and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the first through portion 361X of the electric support member 36X is between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M'with the second starting port 315 open. The game ball 99, which is distributed to the second passage 352, and the game ball 99, which moves the road nail 31M'from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second starting port 315, both have the first penetration portion 361X. It passes through and enters the second starting port 315. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35 by left-handed strike, the game ball in the first passage 351 is inserted into the first start port 314, and the game ball is inserted into the first start port 314, and the second passage. The state in which the game ball of 352 is entered into the second starting port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 is not entered into either the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315, and the ball is not entered from the out port 317. It can take three states of being discharged. Further, the game ball 99 that is left-struck and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is right-struck and moves on the stage 310 are either entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. Ruka depends on the presence or absence of operation of the electric support member 36X, and the operation time and operation frequency of the electric support member 36X depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be obtained by the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36X, but also the second passage 352 and the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. 2 Since the ease of entering the ball into the starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in the conventional game machine, and the fun of the game is improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, the electric support member 36X has a through hole 361X opened only vertically, instead of the first penetrating portion 361X and the second penetrating portion 362X which are partially opened not only vertically but also laterally. ', 362X' may be provided, and a through portion that is partially opened not only in the vertical direction but also in the lateral direction and a through hole that is open only in the vertical direction may be used in combination.

Further, in the thirtieth to 38th embodiments, one first starting port 314 is provided, but as in the first embodiment described above, two first starting ports are provided, and one of the first starting ports is provided. The game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 351 by the starting port may be inserted, and the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 by the other first starting port 314L may be inserted.

Further, in the thirtieth to thirty-eightth embodiments, the same configuration as the first embodiment described above can be changed in the same manner as the first embodiment described above, and the first to twelfth embodiments described above can be changed. It is also possible to adopt the configuration of the form (see FIGS. 26 to 54) and the configuration of the modified example thereof. For example, in the thirtieth to thirty-seventh embodiments, the roller 38C of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 53 (A)) and the windmill 38D of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 53 (B)) are used as distribution portions. Such as a rotating body, the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E of the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 54 (A)), the triangular nail 38F of the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 53 (A)), and the apex nail of the triangular nail 38F. A fixed distribution unit such as a single nail can be suitably adopted. When such a rotating body or a fixed distribution unit is adopted as the distribution unit, the player reads the tendency of distribution between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 (individual difference between the gaming machines) by the distribution unit. It is also possible. As a result, the player can find a firing stroke in which the gaming ball is easily distributed to the second passage 352 by adjusting the firing intensity (launching stroke) of the gaming ball by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. Because it becomes possible, it is fun to search for a launch strength that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed to the second passage 352, or to search for a game machine 10 that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed from the plurality of game machines 10 to the second passage 352. Will be able to be obtained.

[Embodiments 39-85]
In the first embodiment described above, the distribution device is provided in the lower center of the game board 31 (below the symbol display unit), and the game ball launched in the left area of the game board is introduced into the distribution device. Was explained. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to the 39th to 85th embodiments, the distribution device is provided in the lower right side of the gaming board 31 (to the right of the symbol display unit), and the gaming ball launched in the right region of the gaming board is provided. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it is introduced into the sorting device. Further, in the gaming machines according to the 39th to 85th embodiments, the gaming balls distributed to the first passage cannot enter the first starting port, whereas the gaming balls distributed to the first passage are usually used. It is also different from the above-described first embodiment in that the ball can enter the second starting port with the support of the electric accessory. Hereinafter, the 39th to 85th embodiments will be described individually with reference to the drawings. The 40th to 85th embodiments are modifications of the 39th embodiment.

<39th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 35 is provided in the lower center (below the symbol display unit 341) of the game board 31 so that the game ball at the time of left-handed hitting, which is launched in the left area of the game board, can be introduced. The variable winning device 316 is provided in the lower right part of the game board 31 (to the right of the symbol display unit 341) so that a right-handed game ball launched into the right area of the game board can be entered. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game balls of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 can enter the first starting port 314. Yes, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, both the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the game ball launched into the right area of the game board 31 can enter. be. That is, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the game ball at the time of hitting left can enter the first moving port 314 or the second starting port 315, and the game ball at the time of hitting right enters the second starting port. It is possible.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the variable winning device and the first starting port are provided below the symbol display unit, and the game ball at the time of left-handed hitting can enter the variable winning device and the first starting port. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting device and the second starting port are provided on the right side of the symbol display unit, and the game ball at the time of right-handed hitting can be introduced into the sorting device and can enter the second starting port. be. In the present embodiment, when the game ball at the time of right-handed hit does not enter the second starting port, a road nail is provided so that the game ball at the time of right-handed hit can enter the variable winning device. However, in the present embodiment, the road nail may be omitted or the arrangement of the road nail may be changed so that the game ball at the time of right-handed striking does not enter the variable winning device.

Hereinafter, refer to FIGS. 79 to 93, focusing on the distribution device, which is a difference between the gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, and the portion related to the distribution device. I will explain in detail.

Here, FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming board including a distribution device for the gaming machine shown in FIG. 79 and a second starting port. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a distribution unit of the distribution device of FIG. 80. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the operation of the distribution unit of the distribution device of FIG. 80. 83 and 84 are diagrams showing the operation of the distribution unit of the distribution device of FIG. 80. FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing an opening / closing door of the variable winning device of FIG. 80. 86 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line of FIG. 80, FIG. 86 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A6-A6 cutting line of FIG. 80, and FIG. It is sectional drawing along the cutting line. 87 (A) is a view when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 86 (A), and FIG. 87 (B) is a view when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 86 (A). FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of the lighting timing and the extinguishing timing of the synchronization lamp.

As shown in FIG. 79, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a distribution device 92, a through gate 319', a first starting port 314, a second starting port 315, a variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 93. .. Of these, the first starting port 314 and the variable winning device 316 are provided below the symbol display unit 341, and the second starting port 315, the distribution device 92, and the electric support member 93 are provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 341. Has been done.

Specifically, the first starting port 314 is provided below the symbol display unit 341, and is arranged so that a left-handed game ball to be launched can enter the left area of the game board 31. The variable winning device 316 is provided between the first starting port 314 and the out port 317 below the symbol display unit 341. By opening the opening / closing door 316a of the variable winning device 316, among the game balls at the time of left-handed hitting, the game balls that have not been entered into the first starting port 314 can be entered into the variable winning opening 316b. .. Further, when the game ball is launched into the right region of the game board 31 with the opening / closing door 316a open, the game ball that has not entered the second starting port 315 can enter the variable winning opening 316b. The second starting port 315 is provided between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 below the distribution device 92, and can be opened and closed by the electric support member 93. The first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 provide an opportunity for a big hit lottery on condition that a game ball is inserted.

As shown in FIGS. 86 (B) and 87 (B), the through gate 319'detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 described later. The through gate 319'includes, for example, a proximity sensor, and the proximity sensor detects the passage of the game ball 99. When it is detected by the through gate 319'that the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922, a lottery for hitting a normal figure is performed, and when the result of the lottery for hitting a normal figure is a hit, the electric support member 93 is predetermined. Operates for hours. Therefore, when the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, the electric support member 93 operates, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 315. Since the second starting port 315 gives an opportunity for a big hit lottery on condition that the game ball 99 is inserted, the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 in the distribution device 92. It is more advantageous that the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 than in the case where the game ball 99 is distributed.

When it is detected that the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922 by the through gate 319', the game ball 99 has passed through the second passage 922 by the through gate 319' without performing a lottery per drawing. The electric support member 93 may be activated after a lapse of a predetermined time after the detection. In this case, it is preferable to set the timing and the operation time for operating the electric support member 93 according to the type of the special figure gaming state. For example, in mode A, the electric support member 93 is short-operated after passing in front of the electric support member 93 so that the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319'does not enter the second starting port 315. Further, in the mode B, the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319'is supported by the electric support member 93, and the electric support member 93 is short-operated at the timing when the ball can enter the second starting port 315. Further, in mode E, the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319'is launched after the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319' as well as the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 93. Even when the number of game balls 99 pass through the first passage 921, the electric support member 93 is operated for a long time so that the balls can enter the second starting port 315.

The electric support member 93 has a driving means (non-standard) such as a solenoid between the standby position shown in FIGS. 86 (A) and 86 (B) and the operating position shown in FIGS. 87 (A) and 87 (B). It can be rotated by (shown in the figure) to open and close the second starting port 315. The electric support member 93 limits the entry of the game ball discharged from the distribution device 92 into the second starting port 315 when it is in the standby position shown in FIGS. 86 (A) and 86 (B). Allows the game ball discharged from the distribution device 92 to enter the second starting port 315 when it is in the operating position shown in 87 (A) and 87 (B).

As shown in FIG. 85, the electric support member 93 has a base 931, a pair of guard walls 932, and a pair of guides 933. The base 931 has a pair of attachment portions 934 for rotatably attaching the electric support member 93 to the game board 31, and is slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the electric support member 93 is in the operating position. It protrudes (see FIGS. 87 (A) and 87 (B)). As a result, the electric support member 93 can receive the game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, which will be described later, when the electric support member 93 is in the operating position. The pair of guard walls 932 extend at the left and right edges of the base 931 to prevent the game ball 99 received by the base 931 from spilling from the left and right sides of the base 931. The game ball 99 received by the base 931 is guided to the second starting port 315. The pair of guides 933 extend from the guard wall 932 to the vicinity of the second starting port 315, and form a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass in front of the second starting port 315.

Here, the operating time of the electric support member 93 is defined by the gaming state as described later, and when the gaming states are the mode A and the mode B, the short operation is performed (for example, 0.05 seconds), and in the case of the mode E. It operates for a long time (for example, 1 second) (see FIG. 89 (B)). In mode E in which the electric support member 93 operates for a long time, the game ball that has passed through the second passage 922 when the result of the lottery per drawing triggered by the passage of the game ball through the second passage 922 is a win. Not only the 99 but also the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 can enter the second starting port 315, which is more advantageous than the first starting port 314. Therefore, in mode E, it is encouraged to hit the game ball 99 in the right region of the game board 31. Further, in mode B in which the electric support member 93 is short-operated, it is difficult for the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 to enter the second starting port 315, but the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 922. Can enter the second starting port 315. Even in mode B, the game ball can enter the second starting port 315, which is more advantageous than the first starting port 314 in sorting the jackpot type at the time of a big hit (FIGS. 12 (C) and 12 (D)). , Right-handed is encouraged. In mode A, there is no time reduction (see FIG. 89 (B)), and a low-probability table is referred to as a hit / miss table in the normal drawing (see FIG. 13 (C))), so that the passage passes through the second passage 922. The game ball 99 that has been played cannot enter the second starting port 315. On the contrary, the first starting port 314 is not provided in the right area of the game board 31, and the first starting port 314 is provided in the lower center of the game board 31 so that the game ball 99 when hitting left can enter. There is. Therefore, in mode A, it is not a good idea to hit right, and left hit is encouraged so that the game ball 99 enters the first starting port 314.

The distribution device 92 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 341, and distributes the game ball at the time of right-handed striking. As shown in FIG. 80, the distribution device 92 includes an introduction port 920, a distribution member 94, a first passage 921, a second passage 922, and a synchronization lamp 923. In this distribution device 92, the game ball 99 that has entered through the introduction port 920 is in the left direction (counterclockwise direction in FIGS. 4 and 5 (A)) and the right direction (FIGS. 4 and 5) of the distribution member 94. 5 (A) is rotated in the clockwise direction) to be distributed to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922. The introduction port 920, the distribution member 94, the first passage 921, and the second passage 922 are defined by the housing 924. The housing 924 houses the distribution member 94 inside, and is formed of, for example, a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, in the distribution device 92, the distribution member 94 is visible from the outside. Note that the housing 924 does not necessarily have to be entirely transparent, and at least if the distribution member 94 is visible from the outside. good. Further, when the synchronization lamp 923 described later for notifying the posture of the distribution member 94 is provided as in the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to make the distribution member 94 visible, and at least the synchronization lamp 923 is lit. Should be made visible.

The introduction port 920 is a portion that allows the game ball 99 to enter the distribution device 92. The introduction port 920 is a pair of side nails 31Y that are driven into the game board 31 in a hakama shape so as to be tapered in a portion from the lower part of the right side area of the game board 31 (to the right of the symbol display unit 341). It is located directly below. The pair of pegs 31Y can guide all of the game balls 99 launched in the right region of the game board 31 to the introduction port 920, and the lowermost pair of nails is arranged directly above the introduction port 920. As a result, all the game balls 99 when hitting to the right are guided to the introduction port 920 by the side nail 31Y. In other words, all the right-handed game balls 99 are introduced into the distribution device 92 via the introduction port 920. Since all of the game balls 99 at the time of right-handed hitting are introduced into the distribution device 92, the game balls 99 launched at the timing when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922 are introduced into the distribution device 92 with high probability. It becomes possible to make it. Further, instead of the peg 31Y, the game ball 99 may be introduced into the distribution device 92 by passing all the right-handed game balls through a predetermined route formed of resin or the like. In this case, it is possible to make the time from the launch of the game ball 99 to the introduction into the distribution device 92 constant depending on the movement distance and the movement speed of the game ball 99 on the specified route. As a result, compared to the case where the game ball 99 at the time of right-handed hitting is introduced into the distribution device 92 by the side nail 31Y, the game ball 99 launched at the timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 has a higher probability. Can be introduced into the sorting device 92. Of course, not all of the right-handed game balls 99 but only some of the game balls 99 may be introduced into the distribution device 92.

The first passage 921 and the second passage 922 are open downward, and the game balls 99 distributed to the respective passages 921 and 922 are discharged downward toward the electric support member 93.

As shown in FIG. 81 (A), the distribution member 94 distributes the game ball 99 introduced from the introduction port 920 to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922, and has a rotation shaft 941 and a left ball receiving guide. It has a piece 942L, a right ball receiving induction piece 942R, an eccentric part 943, and a load generating part 944. In the distribution member 94, the rotation shaft 941, the ball receiving guide piece 942, the eccentric portion 943, and the load generating portion 944 are integrally formed in the clockwise direction (first direction) of FIG. 80, centering on the rotation shaft 941 extending in the front-rear direction. ) And counterclockwise (second direction).

The ball receiving guide piece 942 includes a left ball receiving guidance piece 942L extending to the upper left from the rotation axis 941 and a right ball receiving guiding piece 942R extending to the upper right, and the left ball receiving guiding piece 942L and the right ball receiving piece 942L. It is provided in a line-symmetrical relationship with the induction piece 942R. The ball receiving guide piece 942 distributes the game ball 99 to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 according to the posture and the rotation direction when the distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99. For example, the ball receiving guide piece 942 is at a position where the axis of symmetry of the left ball receiving guidance piece 942L and the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R is rotated to the left side of the vertical axis, and the distribution member 94 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. In this case, the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 by the left ball receiving guide piece 942L, the axis of symmetry is at a position rotated to the right of the vertical axis, and the distribution member 94 is rotated clockwise. If so, the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 by the right ball receiving guide piece 942R.

The eccentric portion 943 is integrated with the rotating shaft 941 via a support portion 946 extending downward on the front side of the rotating shaft 941 along the axis of symmetry of the left ball receiving guide piece 942L and the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R. ing. The eccentric portion 943 is a columnar shape extending in the same direction as the rotation shaft 941 and is offset to the left with respect to the support portion 946. As a result, the distribution member 94 stops at a position rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a stationary state. As a result, the ball receiving guide piece 942 is in a posture slightly inclined to the left in a stationary state (the left ball receiving guidance piece 942L is in a slightly lower posture than the right ball receiving guidance piece 942R), so that the ball receiving guide piece 942 is placed in the first passage 921. Stand by in a state where the game ball 99 is distributed. Further, in the distribution member 94, the ball receiving guide piece 942 is tilted to the left in a stationary state by the eccentric portion 943, so that the game ball 99 introduced from the introduction port 920 of the distribution device 92 receives the ball. It is possible to suppress the maintenance of the stationary state when it is received by the induction piece 942. As a result, it is possible to suppress clogging of the game ball 9 when the game ball 99 is introduced into the distribution device 92 when the distribution member 94 is in a stationary state. Further, during the opening time of the game hall, the distribution member 94 is in a state of distributing the game ball 99 to the first passage 921, which is advantageous for the player when the game hall is opened, that is, for so-called morning. Measures can be taken. The eccentric portion 943 is not limited to a columnar shape, and may have a shape other than a columnar shape such as a spherical shape, a hemispherical shape, or a prismatic shape.

The load generating portion 944 is a leaf spring and extends downward on the rear side of the rotation shaft 941 along the axis of symmetry of the left ball receiving guide piece 942L and the right ball receiving guidance piece 942R. When the load generating portion 944 rotates in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction, the load generating portion 944 generates an elastic force by interfering with the rotation restricting portion 945 provided as a whole below the distribution member 94. As the leaf spring, one made of metal or resin is preferably used.

The rotation restricting portion 945 has an upper opening U-shape having a pair of restricting pieces 948, 949 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body upward from the left and right edges of the base portion 947 and having a shape extending. Here, the term "rigid body or substantially rigid body" of the rotation regulating unit 945 means that the rotation regulating unit 945 is not deformed at all or hardly deformed when the load generating unit 944 interferes with the rotation regulating unit 945. The rotation regulation unit 945 is arranged so that the load generation unit 944 is located between the pair of regulation pieces 948 and 949. Therefore, the load generating unit 944 generates elastic force by elastically deforming when it interferes with any of the pair of restricting pieces 948 and 949. The elastic force generated by the load generating unit 944 acts as a force for rotating the distribution member 94 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction when the elastic force is generated. For example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (A) and 82 (B), the distribution member 94 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction to interfere with the regulation piece 949, and an elastic force is generated in the load generating portion 944. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 82 (B) to 82 (D), the load generating unit 944 rotates the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction. On the contrary, as shown in FIGS. 82 (C) and 82 (D), the distribution member 94 is rotated clockwise to interfere with the regulation piece 948, and the load generating portion 944 is elastically deformed. When an elastic force is generated, the load generating unit 944 rotates the distribution member 94 in the counterclockwise direction. The rotation regulation unit 945 may omit the base portion 947 and may be composed of only a pair of regulation pieces 948 and 949. Further, the regulation pieces 948 and 949 may be formed as an elastic body. In this case, the regulation pieces 948 and 949 elastically deform when they interfere with the load generating portion 944 to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94.

Further, the regulation piece 948 is provided with a detection unit 95 at a portion where the load generation unit 944 interferes. The detection unit 95 is a piezoelectric element, and a voltage is generated by interference with the load generation unit 944. That is, by monitoring the output from the detection unit 95, it is possible to detect that the load generation unit 944 is interfering with the regulation piece 948. When the load generating unit 944 interferes with the regulation piece 948, the axis of symmetry between the left ball receiving guide piece 942L and the right ball receiving guiding piece 942R is located at a position rotated to the left of the vertical axis. Based on the output of 95, it can be known that the distribution unit 95 is in a state of distributing the game ball to the second passage 922. The detection unit 95 may be a contact switch or an optical sensor instead of the piezoelectric element.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the distribution member 94 is in a posture of being slightly tilted to the left in a stationary state (a posture in which the left ball receiving guide piece 942L is slightly lower than the right ball receiving guidance piece 942R). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83A, when the game ball 99 is introduced into the distribution device 92 in the stationary state of the distribution member 94, the game ball 99 is received by the ball receiving guide piece 942. The distribution member 94 is rotated counterclockwise. At this time, when the load generating portion 944 interferes with the regulation piece 949, the load generating portion 944 is elastically deformed, and the load generating portion 944 generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), when the distribution member 94 is rotated to a predetermined position, for example, when the tip of the left ball receiving guide piece 942L is located below the horizontal, the game ball 99 receives the left ball. It is distributed to the first passage 921 (see FIG. 80) of the distribution device 92 by the guide piece 942L.

Here, when the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 by the distribution member 94, the load generation unit 944 generates an elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction. Therefore, the distribution member 94 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the elastic force of the load generating portion 944. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 83 (C) and 83 (D), the load generating unit 944 interferes with the regulation piece 948, so that the load generating unit 944 is elastically deformed, and the load generating unit 944 elastically deforms the distribution member 94. An elastic force that rotates counterclockwise is generated. After that, if the game ball 99 is not introduced into the distribution device 92, the distribution member 94 repeats rotation in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, but the amplitude gradually decreases due to damping, and finally. Stops. That is, the distribution member 94 is in a state in which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the first passage 921 (a state in which distribution is possible) and a state in which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 until it becomes stationary. (A state in which distribution is possible) is repeated a plurality of times to rotate.

In the rotational operation of the distribution member 94 by such elastic force, the unit rotation cycle Ts (see FIG. 88) of the distribution member 94 is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval Th (see FIG. 88) of the game ball 99. (For example, 1 to 3 times, preferably 1 to 2 times) or a value close to it (for example, a range of ± 15% of a positive integer multiple, preferably a range of ± 10% of a positive integer multiple, more preferably a positive It is in the range of ± 5%, which is an integral multiple of. For example, the unit rotation cycle Ts is set in the range of 0.51 seconds to 0.69 seconds, or 1.02 seconds to 1.38 seconds when the firing interval Th is 0.6 seconds. When a plurality of intervals are set as the firing intervals of the game ball 99, the unit rotation cycle Ts of the distribution member 94 is set to a positive integer multiple of the shortest firing interval or a value close to it.

Here, FIG. 88 shows a time-dependent change in the rotation angle when the distribution member 94 rotates, and the output voltage, the firing voltage, and the synchronization lamp 923 of the detection unit 95 corresponding to the time-dependent change. The relationship of extinguishing control is shown. In FIG. 88, the rotation angle is 0 ° when the left ball receiving guide piece 942K and the right ball receiving guidance piece 942R are symmetrical with respect to the vertical axis. Further, in the example of FIG. 88, the unit rotation cycle Ts starts from the left switching point Pl, for example, in which the distribution member 94 switches the rotation direction from the counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise rotation direction) to the clockwise direction (rightward rotation direction). In this case, it is the time until the left switching point Pl is reached again via the right switching point Pr that switches the rotation direction from the clockwise direction to the counterclockwise direction. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 88, the unit rotation cycle Ts is twice the firing interval Th.

In this way, when the unit rotation cycle Ts is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval Th or a value close to it, the game ball 99 can be easily distributed to the second passage 922 (a state in which the game ball 99 can be distributed) and the game ball. It becomes easy to link with the launch timing of 99. Further, if the launch timing of the game ball 99 and the timing of distribution to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 can be matched, the game ball is distributed to the second passage 922 with a high probability by performing a stop after that. It is also possible to do so. For example, in the example of FIG. 88, after matching the launch timing of the game ball 99 with the timing of distribution to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, one ball is launched and one ball is stopped repeatedly. It is also possible to distribute the game ball to the second passage 922 with a high probability. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to pass the gaming ball 99 through the second passage 922 with a high probability depending on the skill of the player.

Further, when the game ball 99 is introduced into the distribution device 92 when the distribution member 94 is rotating, the posture and rotation direction of the distribution member 94 when the game ball 99 is received by the distribution member 94. Is in a state of distributing the game ball 99 to the first passage 921, the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921. On the contrary, if the posture and the rotation direction when the game ball 99 is received by the distribution member 94 are in a state of distributing the game ball 99 to the second passage 922, the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922. ..

By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one provided with a distribution device that alternately distributes game balls to a first starting portion and a second starting portion having a function different from that of the first starting portion. However, in the conventional sorting device, the game ball is physically distributed to the first starting portion and the second starting portion regardless of the player's intention, so that the player does not have the degree of freedom in playing the game. There is concern that the game will become monotonous and the interest of the game will decline. Further, since half of the game balls are inserted into the first starting portion, the distribution device is difficult to adopt when it is desired to execute the special figure game mainly in the second special figure game as in the probabilistic game state.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution member 94 is moved clockwise and counterclockwise by introducing the game ball into the distribution device 92 while the distribution member 94 is stationary. It can be rotated alternately in the clockwise direction. Further, when the distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99 when the distribution member 94 is rotating, the game ball 99 has the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 according to the receiving posture of the game ball 99 and the like. It is distributed to one of. Since the distribution member 94 is visible from the outside as described above, the player can confirm the posture and the rotation direction of the distribution member 94. As a result, the player can launch the game ball 99 while checking the posture (center of gravity) of the distribution member 94. Therefore, the game ball 99 is repeatedly operated and not operated by the ball stop switch 21b. By launching, so-called stop striking, it becomes possible to launch the game ball 99 at a timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922. Further, by alternately launching the game balls 99 into the left side region and the right side region of the game board 31, it is possible to launch the game balls 99 at a timing when the game balls 99 are easily distributed to the second passage 922. Become.

The synchronization lamp 923 shown in FIGS. 79 and 80 is a light source such as a light emitting diode, and is lit when the distribution member 94 is in a posture of distributing the game ball to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 for distribution. The member 94 notifies the player that it is time to distribute the game ball 99 to the second passage 922. The synchronization lamp 923 is provided at a portion that does not obstruct the visibility of the distribution member 94. The housing 924 of the distribution device 92 is provided with a lighting mark 925 in the front region of the synchronization lamp 923. The lighting mark 925 includes a translucent region 9251 that transmits light and a mask region 9252 that has low light transmittance and does not transmit light or hardly transmits light (see FIG. 88). The translucent region 9251 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent portion formed in a star shape, and transmits the light of the synchronous lamp 923 when the synchronous lamp 923 is turned on. The outer edge of the mask region 9252 is formed in a circular shape at the peripheral portion of the translucent region 9251 so as to surround the translucent region 9251. The mask region 9252 makes it possible to emphasize the light transmitted through the translucent region 9251 when the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on, so that the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 can be clearly recognized. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 922 as in mode C to enter the second starting port 315, and the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 922 is distributed to the second starting port 315. In that case, the game ball 99 may be launched into the right region of the game board 31 while confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit. When the operating time of the electric support member 93 is long as in mode E, even if the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 when the electric support member 93 is operated, the second starting port 315 is used. Since the game ball 99 can be inserted, even if the game ball 99 is continuously launched at the minimum firing interval without stopping, the game ball 99 automatically enters the first passage 921 and the second passage. It is distributed alternately to 922.

The translucent region 9251 is not limited to a star shape, and may be, for example, a circular shape or a character. When the translucent region 9251 is formed as a character, it may be a display suggesting the launch timing of the game ball 99, such as "hit!", "Hit", "CHANGE", "GO", etc. The display may indicate the rotation direction or posture of the distribution member 94, such as “right” or “left”. Further, the outer edge of the mask region 9252 may be set according to the shape of the translucent region 9251 and the like, and is not limited to a circular shape.

The synchronization lamp 923 is controlled to be turned on and off based on the output voltage from the detection unit 95 by a command set by the MPU 41. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88, the MPU 41 sets a synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting the synchronization lamp 923 when the output voltage from the detection unit 95 is detected (when it is not 0V), and the detection unit 95 is set. When the output voltage from is not detected (when it is 0V), the synchronization lamp extinguishing command for extinguishing the synchronization lamp 923 is set. On the other hand, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 turns on or off the synchronization lamp 923 according to the synchronization lamp lighting command and the synchronization lamp extinguishing command set by the MPU 41. That is, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on while the load generation unit 944 of the distribution member 94 interferes with the detection unit 95. The synchronization lamp 923 may be turned on when the output voltage is equal to or higher than a positive predetermined value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the synchronization lamp 923 from being unnecessarily turned on when the output voltage is detected due to vibration or the like.

By the way, since the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 is provided with a through gate 319'for opening the second starting port 315 by drawing a lottery per drawing, the second passage 921 is compared with the first passage 921. It is advantageous for the player that the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922. Then, in the present embodiment, since the distribution member 94 is visible, the game ball 99 is launched at the timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 by the stop striking, and the game ball 99 is launched into the second passage 922. It becomes possible to aim and shoot so that can be sorted. However, it may be difficult for some players to launch the game ball 99 at a timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on while the load generation unit 944 of the distribution member 94 interferes with the detection unit 95. The timing at which the load generating unit 944 interferes with the detecting unit 95 is a state in which the game ball 99 is easily guided to the second passage 922. Therefore, by notifying the player that the timing at which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 by turning on the synchronization lamp 923, the game ball 99 is launched with the synchronization lamp 923 on and off as a guide. Becomes possible. As a result, the player launches the game ball 99 in which the game ball 99 is more likely to be guided to the second passage 922 as compared with the case where the game ball 99 is launched while visually checking the posture and the rotation direction of the distribution member 94. Since it becomes easy to find out, even a player with a low skill can easily launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922.

Further, the timing at which the game ball 99 is easily guided to the second passage 922 by the distribution member 94 and the launch timing of the game ball 99 at which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 are coincident or substantially the same. It is also possible. In this case, the lighting timing of the synchronization lamp 923 not only notifies the player of the timing at which the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed to the second passage 922, but also the game ball 99 for passing the game ball 99 through the second passage 922. Will notify the player of the launch timing of. When the synchronization lamp 923 notifies the launch timing of the game ball 99, the player can pass the second passage 922 as compared with the case where the second passage 922 is notified of the timing when the game ball 99 is likely to be distributed. Makes it easier to launch the game ball 99.

Here, FIGS. 89A and 89B are diagrams showing an example of a table used in the main control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 89 (A) is an example of a mode transition table, and FIG. 89 (B) is an example of a mode data table. In this embodiment, the winning / failing table regarding the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type distribution table, and the winning / failing table regarding the lottery per drawing are the same as those in the first embodiment described above (FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (D)). ), FIG. 13 (C) and FIG. 13 (D), the jackpot types include 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 5R normal jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot.

The mode transition table shown in FIG. 89 (A) defines the relationship between the mode transition condition and the mode transition destination, and the mode data table shown in FIG. 89 (B) defines the content of the mode in the special figure gaming state. In the present embodiment, modes A, mode B, and mode E are included as modes in the special figure gaming state. The contents of these modes A, mode B, and mode E are the same as those in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 13B), and the game is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E, mode B, and mode A. It is in a state.

The mode A is a mode that shifts to the mode B, which is a limited number of time reduction mode described later, when the upper limit number of special figure games is completed, that is, when the time reduction is completed. Mode A is a jackpot low probability mode in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). Further, the mode A is a non-time saving mode in which the variation display time of the normal symbol is not shortened (time reduction) and the variation display time of the normal symbol is the normal variation display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball 99 that has passed through the through gate 319'passes the position of the electric support member 93, the normal symbol is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a hit. Even if the electric support member 93 operates, it cannot be expected that the second starting port 315 will be won by the support of the electric support member 93. Further, in mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol will be won is low. The mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), in the mode A, the operating time of the electric support member 93 is short (for example, 0.05 seconds) when the lottery result in the normal symbol per lottery is a win. Therefore, in the mode A, the probability that the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 and introduced into the distribution device 92 will enter the second starting port 315 is extremely low. Further, the first starting port 314 is not provided in the right region of the game board 31, and the first starting port 314 is provided in the lower center of the game board 31 so that the game ball 99 at the time of hitting left can enter. There is. Therefore, in mode A, it is not a good idea to hit right in order to introduce the game ball 99 into the distribution device 92, but to hit left so that the game ball 99 enters the first starting port 314. Encouraged.

Mode B is a mode that shifts after the end of the normal jackpot game (2R normal jackpot game and 5R normal jackpot game) (see FIG. 89 (A)), and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than mode A. be. Similar to mode A, mode B is a jackpot low probability mode in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot is low, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12A). .. Further, unlike the mode A, the mode B is a time-saving mode in which the variation display time of the normal symbol is a shortened variation display time shorter than the normal variation display time (for example, 30 seconds) in the non-time reduction mode. The mode is continued until the maximum number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 50 times). That is, although the mode B is a time-saving mode in which an upper limit is set for the number of times of time-saving, it is a mode more advantageous than the mode A because it is a time-saving mode. Here, the shortened variation display time is set to a time during which the game ball that has passed through the through gate 319'can win a prize in the second starting port 315 by the support of the electric support member 93, and the through gate 319' and the electric support member 93 It is set according to the positional relationship (distance, etc.) and the operating time of the electric support member 93, and is set to, for example, about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), in the mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 is short (for example, 0.05 seconds) when the lottery is won for the normal symbol as in the mode A, but the electric support The support of the member 36 allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 315. Therefore, in the mode B, unlike the mode A, it is encouraged to hit the game ball 99 in the right region of the game board 31.

If the upper limit number of special figure games is played without the lottery result in the jackpot lottery being a jackpot in mode B, the mode A is entered as described above. Further, in the present embodiment, an effect indicating that the mode B (time saving mode) is specified may be executed in the effect means such as the symbol display unit 341. In this case, the production may be performed by the production means as a chance zone suggesting the possibility of a probability change.

Mode E is a mode that shifts after the end of the probability variation jackpot game (2R probability variation jackpot game, 5R probability variation jackpot game, and 16R probability variation jackpot game) (see FIG. 89 (A)), and among modes A, mode B, and mode E. This is the most advantageous mode for players. Mode E is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variation game state) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery has a high probability of becoming a jackpot, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 12B). .. Further, the mode E is a time saving mode in which the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened from the normal fluctuation display time (for example, 30 seconds) of the non-time saving mode as in the mode B, and is the next big hit. It is also a jackpot guarantee time saving mode that guarantees. In mode E, it is clearly indicated that the game is in a probabilistic game state (high probability mode) in the production by the production means such as the symbol display unit 341.

Further, in the mode E, the operating time of the electric support member 93 when the lottery for the normal symbol is won is long (for example, 1 second) (see FIG. 89 (B)). In mode E in which the electric support member 93 operates for a long time, the game ball that has passed through the second passage 922 when the result of the lottery per drawing triggered by the passage of the game ball through the second passage 922 is a win. Not only the 99 but also the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 can enter the second starting port 315, which is more advantageous than the first starting port 314. Therefore, in mode E, it is encouraged to hit the game ball 99 in the right region of the game board 31.

In addition, it is conceivable that the electric support member 36 operates a plurality of times for a hit in one ordinary symbol hit lottery. For example, in mode E, it is conceivable that the total operating time of the electric support member 93 is set to 1 second by performing the operation of operating the electric support member 93 for 0.2 seconds five times. However, the one-time operation time and the number of operations of the electric accessory 93 described above are examples and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operating time of the electric support member 93 in mode E is not limited to 1 second and can be changed as appropriate.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device of the present embodiment.

In the main timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 performs the sensor detection process (step S1001) and the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2 update processes (step) in the same manner as the main timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above. S1002), update processing of counters C1 to C4 (step S1003), start winning processing (step S1004), firing control processing (step S1005), and through gate processing (step S1006) are executed. In the main timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the MPU 41 further executes a synchronous lamp control process for controlling the lighting and extinguishing of the synchronous lamp 923 (step S3201).

[Synchronous lamp control process]
Here, FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 90. In the synchronous lamp control process, the on / off of the synchronous lamp 923 is controlled according to the posture of the distribution member 94 based on the output of the detection unit 95.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
In the synchronous lamp control process, the MPU 41 first acquires the output voltage from the detection unit 95 (step S3301), and determines whether or not the output voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (for example, 0V) (step S3302). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3303 when the output voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3306 when the output voltage is not equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: No).

<Steps S3303 to S3305>
When the output voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (for example, 0V) (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3303). Here, the synchronization lamp lighting flag indicates whether or not the synchronization lamp 923 is lit, and is set to ON in step S3305 described later. That is, the MPU 41 determines in step S3303 whether or not the synchronization lamp 923 is lit. When the output voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: Yes) and the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 41 maintains the lighting state of the synchronization lamp 923. The synchronization lamp control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S3303: No), the MPU 41 sets the synchronization lamp lighting command (step S3304) and sets the synchronization lamp lighting flag to on (step S3305). , The synchronization lamp control process is terminated. That is, when the output voltage is equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: Yes), and when the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S3303: No), the synchronization lamp 923 is attached to the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting is set (step S3304), the synchronization lamp lighting flag indicating that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit is set to on (step S3305), and the synchronization lamp control process is terminated. ..

The synchronous lamp lighting command set in step S3304 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 turns on the synchronization lamp 923 in step S3507 in the command determination process of FIG. 93, which will be described later. As a result, the player confirms that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit in the translucent region 9251, so that the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is in a posture capable of distributing the game ball 99 to the second passage 922. Can be recognized. Further, the timing at which the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is in a posture capable of distributing the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 and the timing at which the game ball 99 can be passed through the second passage 922 are launched. If they match or substantially match, the player can recognize that it is the launch timing of the game ball that allows the game ball 99 to pass through the second passage 922. Then, by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit in the translucent region 9251, the player can easily distribute the game ball to the second passage 922 (the game ball 99 is inserted into the second starting port 315). It becomes possible to launch the game ball 99 at an easy timing). When confirming the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 in the translucent region 9251, the player can more easily insert the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 as compared with visually confirming the position of the distribution member 94. It becomes possible to enter the ball.

<Steps S3306 to S3308>
When the output voltage of the MPU 41 is not equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold voltage (for example, 0V) (step S3302: No), the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON in order to determine whether or not the synchronization lamp 923 is lit. It is determined whether or not (step S3306). When the output voltage is not equal to or higher than the threshold voltage (step S3302: No) and the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 41 is set to the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 of the synchronization lamp 923. The synchronization lamp extinguishing command for extinguishing the synchronization lamp 923 is set (step S3307), the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S3308), and the synchronization lamp control process ends. Further, the MPU 41 turns off the synchronization lamp 923 when the output voltage is not equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold voltage (step S3302: No) and when the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S3306: No). In order to maintain the state, the synchronization lamp control process is terminated.

The synchronous lamp extinguishing command set in step S3307 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 is turned off in step S3509 in the command determination process of FIG. 93, which will be described later. As a result, the player confirms that the synchronization lamp 923 is turned off in the translucent region 9251, so that the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is in a posture in which it is difficult to distribute the game ball 99 to the second passage 922. Can be recognized.

[Main processing]
In the present embodiment, the main process is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, but unlike the first embodiment described above, the types of the special figure gaming states are mode A, mode B, and mode E. There are three, and there are no modes C and D. Therefore, in the present embodiment, some of the steps related to the modes in the various processes in the main process are different from those in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in the ordinary electric accessory control process of FIG. 18 (step S1305 of the main process of FIG. 17), “mode A to mode C?” In step S1504 becomes “mode A or mode B?”, And FIG. 22 In the special figure variation start process (step S1308 of the main process of FIG. 17), “mode C or mode E?” In step S1801 becomes “mode E?”. Then, the game state transition process of step S1308 in the main process of FIG. 17 is executed as a process described below.

[Game state transition process]
Here, FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in the main process of the present embodiment.

<Step S3401>
In the present embodiment, as described above, there are three types of special figure gaming states, mode A, mode B, and mode E, and there is no mode C and mode D. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92, in the game state transition process of the present embodiment, in step S1913 in the case of ending the time reduction and shifting to the mode A in the game state transition process of FIG. 23 of the first embodiment described above. “Turning off the mode B flag or mode D flag” becomes “turning off the mode B flag” (step S3401).

<Step S3402>
When the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game (steps S1901, S1914 and S1915), whether or not the lottery result flag set on in step S1806 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22 is a normal jackpot flag, that is, It is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag or the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON (step S3402). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3403 when the normal jackpot flag is set to on (step S3402: Yes), and steps the process when the normal jackpot flag is set to off (step S3402: No). Move to S3407.

<Steps S3403 to S3406>
In step S3403, when the MPU 41 ends the normal jackpot game (2R normal jackpot game or 5R normal jackpot game), the MPU 41 sets the time saving flag indicating that the time saving mode is limited to the number of times to be turned on. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit of the number of time reductions as the time reduction counter. The number of time reductions is, for example, 50 times, and in this case, "50" is set as the time reduction counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode B (step S3404) and sets the mode B flag to on (step S3405). Further, the MPU 41 normally sets the jackpot flag to off (step S3406), and ends the game state transition process.

<Steps S3407 to S3409>
In step S3407, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode E and further sets the mode E flag on (step S3408). That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to on (step S1914: Yes) and the normal jackpot flag is set to off (step S3402: No), the probability variation jackpot flag (2R probability variation jackpot flag, 5R probability variation jackpot flag and It can be determined that any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flags) is set to on. Therefore, in steps S3407 and S3408, the MPU 41 shifts to the mode E, which is the transition destination mode after the end of the probability variation jackpot game, and sets the mode E flag to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets the probability variation jackpot flag flag set to on to off (step S3409), and ends the game state transition process.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S1954 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 25. In the command determination process, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 93, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, first, in step S3501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3502. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S3501 and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is targeted for processing. For example, it is stored in the processing work storage area. It will be remembered.

<Step S3502>
In step S3502, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3503 when it is a variable pattern command (step S3502: Yes), and shifts the process to step S3506 when the command is not a variable pattern command (step S3502: No).

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (combination of stop symbols of the main symbol, variation type, and effect type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table and the effect type table stored in the ROM 511 in advance, and the counter value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to on. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is 2R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R normal jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to on. Is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot flag is set to on, the jackpot type is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to on, and the jackpot type is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Set the jackpot flag on.

The effect type table includes, for example, a normal reach effect table corresponding to normal reach, a super reach effect table corresponding to super reach, and a special reach effect table corresponding to special reach.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command in the variation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented one by one in the counter update processing of step S1953 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the count value of the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S3505>
In step S3505, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341, the variation type, and the content of the effect type to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. Let me. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the main symbol determined in step S3503. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image and an effect image of the main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variation display of a plurality of main symbols (three in the present embodiment) until the preset variation display time elapses. Then, the fluctuations of a plurality of main symbols are stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next variable game or the process corresponding to the big hit game is executed. Here, during the variation display of the main symbol, the effect corresponding to the content of the variation type and the effect type specified by the display variation pattern command is executed.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
In step S3506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a synchronization lamp lighting command. The synchronization lamp lighting command is a command indicating that the synchronization lamp 923 is to be turned on, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S3304 in the synchronization lamp control process of FIG. 91 as described above. Here, the MPU 51 turns on the synchronization lamp 923 (step S3707) when the received command is a synchronization lamp lighting command (step S3506: Yes). On the other hand, when the received command is not the synchronization lamp lighting command (step S3506: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3508.

<Steps S3508 and S3509>
In step S3508, it is determined whether or not the received command is a synchronization lamp extinguishing command. The synchronization lamp extinguishing command is a command indicating that the synchronization lamp 923 is extinguished, and is set by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in step S3307 in the synchronization lamp control process of FIG. 91 as described above. Here, when the received command is the synchronization lamp extinguishing command (step S3508: Yes), the MPU 51 extinguishes the synchronization lamp 923 (step S3709). On the other hand, when the received command is not the synchronization lamp lighting command (step S3508: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3510.

<Step S3510>
In step S3510, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing the process based on the other commands received from the main control device 4.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a distribution device for alternately distributing the game balls to the first starting portion and the second starting portion having a function different from that of the first starting portion. Unlike the conventional gaming machine, the distribution member 94 can be rotated alternately in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by introducing the game ball into the distribution device 92. Specifically, since the distribution member 94 is in a posture of distributing the game ball 99 to the first passage 921 by the eccentric portion 943 when the distribution member 94 is in the stationary state, the distribution member 94 is distributed when the distribution member 94 is in the stationary state. When the game ball 99 is introduced into the device 92, the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 by rotating the distribution member 94 in the counterclockwise direction. At this time, when the load generating portion 944 interferes with the regulation piece 948, the load generating portion 944 is elastically deformed, and an elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94 in the counterclockwise direction is generated in the load generating portion 944. Therefore, the distribution member 94 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the elastic force of the load generating portion 944. After that, if the game ball 99 is not introduced into the distribution device 92, the distribution member 94 repeats rotation in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction, but the amplitude gradually decreases due to damping, and finally. Stops. That is, the distribution member 94 is in a state in which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the first passage 921 (a state in which distribution is possible) and a state in which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 until it becomes stationary. (A state in which distribution is possible) is repeated multiple times.

Further, when the distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99 when the distribution member 94 is rotating, the game ball 99 has the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 according to the receiving posture of the game ball 99 and the like. It is distributed to one of. The distribution member 94 receives the game ball 99 during rotation and distributes the game ball 99 to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922, so that the rotation operation is continued as before the attenuation.

Here, since the distribution member 94 is visible from the outside as described above, the rotation operation of the distribution member 94 can be visually recognized, and the game ball while checking the posture (center of gravity) of the distribution member 94. It is possible to launch 99 launches. Therefore, the player may launch the game ball 99 at a timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 by the so-called stop striking, in which the ball stop switch 21b is repeatedly operated and non-operated. It will be possible. Since the unit rotation cycle Ts of the distribution member 94 is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval Th of the game ball 99 or a value close to it, the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 (distributable). State) and the launch timing of the game ball 99 can be easily linked. Further, if the launch timing of the game ball 99 and the timing of distribution to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 can be matched, the game ball is distributed to the second passage 922 with a high probability by performing a stop after that. It is also possible to do so.

Further, the regulation piece 948 is provided with a detection unit 95 at a portion where the load generation unit 944 interferes, and by monitoring the output from the detection unit 95, the load generation unit 944 interferes with the regulation piece 948. It can be detected that it is present. Since the game ball can be distributed to the second passage 922 in the state where the load generating unit 944 interferes with the regulation piece 948, the distribution member 94 moves to the second passage 922 based on the output of the detection unit 95. It is possible to know that the game ball is in a state of being distributed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 by turning on the synchronization lamp 923 while the load generating unit 944 of the distribution member 94 interferes with the detection unit 95. Notify the player that the timing is easy. As a result, the player can launch the game ball 99 with the synchronization lamp 923 turned on and off as a guide, so that the launch timing of the game ball 99 in which the game ball 99 is easily guided to the second passage 922, that is, the ball It becomes easy to find the timing to change the stop switch 21b from the operating state to the non-operating state.

<40th to 73rd Embodiment>
In the 39th embodiment described above, the load generation unit 944 provided on the distribution member 94 repeatedly interferes with the regulation pieces 948 and 949 of the rotation regulation unit 945, so that an elastic force is generated in the load generation unit 944. The case where the distribution member 94 rotates by the elastic force has been described. On the other hand, the 40th to 73rd embodiments are common in that the distribution member is rotated by the elastic force, but the distribution member is configured to generate the elastic force to perform the rotation operation. It is different from the 39th embodiment described above. In the 40th to 73rd embodiments, since the distribution member rotates by the elastic force generated by the rotation of the distribution member, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the 39th embodiment described above. can. Hereinafter, the differences between the 40th to 73rd embodiments and the 39th embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In the drawings referred to in the description of each embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the other embodiments.

(40th to 47th embodiments)
In the 39th embodiment described above, the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 formed as a leaf spring projects downward behind the rotation shaft 941, and the rotation regulating portion 945 that interferes with the load generating portion 944 is the load generating portion. It was provided at a position lower than 944 as a whole. On the other hand, in the 40th to 47th embodiments, the configurations of the load generating portion and the rotation regulating portion are different from those of the 39th embodiment described above.

(40th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generation unit 944A protrudes upward from the rotation shaft 941 in the distribution member 94A, and the rotation regulation unit 945A is larger than the distribution member 94A. It is provided above as a whole.

The rotation restricting portion 945A has a base portion 947A and a pair of restricting pieces 948A and 949A extending downward from the base portion 947A, and is formed in a downward opening U shape. The regulation piece 949A is provided with a detection unit 95.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the projecting direction of the load generating unit 944A is different from that of the 39th embodiment, and the orientation of the rotation regulating unit 945A is different, but the same operation as that of the 39th embodiment described above. It works.

(41st Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 95 (A) is a perspective view showing an example of a distribution member of the distribution device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 95 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the distribution device according to the present embodiment. Is. As shown in FIGS. 95 (A) and 95 (B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution member 94B has a rotation shaft 941 as in the 39th embodiment described above. It has a load generating unit 944 protruding downward from the above, and includes a rotation regulating unit 945 in which the load generating unit 944 interferes with the rotation of the distribution member 94B. The distribution device 92 of the present embodiment further has a load generation unit 944A in which the distribution member 94B projects upward from the rotation shaft 941 opposite to the load generation unit 944, as in the 40th embodiment described above. The rotation regulating unit 945B is provided so that the load generating unit 944A interferes with the rotation of the distribution member 94B. That is, the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the above-mentioned 39th embodiment and the 40th embodiment are combined.

Since the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the 39th embodiment and the 40th embodiment described above are combined, the same effects as those of the 39th embodiment and the 40th embodiment described above are used. Play. Further, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating unit 944 and the load generating unit 944A project in opposite directions, and these load generating units 944 and 944A interfere with the rotation regulating units 945 and 945B at the same timing. .. Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, not only the elastic force can be generated by the two load generating units 944 and 944A, but also the impact when the load generating units 944 and 944A interfere with the rotation regulating units 945 and 945B is alleviated. can. As a result, even when the load generating units 944 and 944A interfere with the rotation regulating units 945 and 945B repeatedly, damage to the load generating units 944 and 944A can be suppressed.

(42nd and 43rd embodiments)
Here, FIG. 96 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 42nd embodiment, and FIG. 96 (B) is an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 43rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 42nd and 43rd embodiments has the same distribution member 94B as the 41st embodiment described above. However, the configuration of the rotation control unit 945 is different from that of the 41st embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 96 (A), in the 42nd embodiment, the rotation control unit 945C is formed in a case shape surrounding the load generation unit 944 and the load generation unit 944A of the distribution member 94B. The rotation control unit 945C includes a pair of side walls 948C and 949C extending between the upper wall 9471C and the lower wall 9472C. The pair of side walls 948C and 949C interfere with the load generating section 944 and the load generating section 944A when the distribution member 94B rotates. The pair of side walls 948C and 949C face each other with a predetermined interval, and the side wall 948C is provided with a detection unit 95 composed of a piezoelectric element or the like. The rotation control unit 945C may have a pair of side walls 948C and 949C, and one or both of the upper wall 9471C and the lower wall 9472C may be omitted.

The distribution device 92 of the present embodiment includes the same distribution member 94B as that of the 41st embodiment described above, and the load generation units 944 and 944A interfere with the side walls 948C and 949C of the rotation control unit 94C at the same timing. .. Therefore, even in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, not only the elastic force can be generated by the two load generating units 944 and 944A, but also the load generating units 944 and 944A repeatedly interfere with the rotation regulating units 945 and 945A. However, damage to the load generating portions 944 and 944A can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), in the 43rd embodiment, the rotation control unit includes a pair of control pieces 948D and 949D. These regulation pieces 948D and 949D are arranged one above the other at predetermined intervals, and the regulation piece 948D is provided with a detection unit 95 composed of a piezoelectric element or the like.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94B rotates, the load generation unit 944 interferes with the regulation piece 948D of the rotation regulation unit, and the load generation unit 949D interferes with the load generation unit. The state in which the 944A interferes is repeated. In the present embodiment, as compared with the 42nd embodiment and the like provided with the same distribution member 94B, the distribution member 94B can be rotated by utilizing the elastic force with a simple structure.

(44th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 97 (A) is a perspective view showing an example of a distribution member of the distribution device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 97 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the distribution device according to the present embodiment. Is. As shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B, in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generating portion 944E protrudes to the right from the rotation shaft 941 in the distribution member 94E and rotates. The regulation unit 945E is provided on the right side of the distribution member 94E as a whole.

The rotation restricting portion 945E has a base portion 947E and a pair of restricting pieces 948E and 949E extending to the left from the base portion 947E, and is formed in a left-opening U-shape. The regulation piece 948E is provided with a detection unit 95.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the projecting direction of the load generating unit 944E is different from that of the 39th embodiment, and the direction of the rotation regulating unit 945E is different, but the same operation as that of the 39th embodiment described above. It works.

(45th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 98 (A) is a perspective view showing an example of a distribution member of the distribution device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 98 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the distribution device according to the present embodiment. Is. As shown in FIGS. 98 (A) and 98 (B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution member 94F has a rotation shaft 941 as in the 44th embodiment described above. It has a load generating unit 944E protruding to the right from the side, and includes a rotation regulating unit 945E in which the load generating unit 944E interferes with the rotation of the distribution member 94F. The distribution device 92 of the present embodiment further has a load generating portion 944F in which the distribution member 94F projects from the rotation shaft 941 to the left opposite to the distribution member 94E, and a load is generated when the distribution member 94F rotates. A rotation control unit 945F with which the unit 944F interferes is provided.

Since the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment has the load generating unit 944E as in the 44th embodiment described above, it has the same effect as that of the 44th embodiment described above. Further, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating unit 944E and the load generating unit 944F project in opposite directions, and these load generating units 944E and 944F interfere with the rotation regulating units 945E and 945F at the same timing. .. Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, not only the elastic force can be generated by the two load generating units 944E and 944F, but also the impact when the load generating units 944E and 944F interfere with the rotation regulating units 945E and 945F is alleviated. can. As a result, even when the load generating units 944E and 944F repeatedly interfere with the rotation regulating units 945E and 945F, damage to the load generating units 944E and 944F can be suppressed.

(46th and 47th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 99A is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 46th embodiment, and FIG. 99B is an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 47th embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIGS. 99A and 99B, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 46th and 47th embodiments has the same distribution member 94F as the 45th embodiment described above. However, the configuration of the rotation control unit 945 is different from that of the 41st embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 99 (A), in the 46th embodiment, the rotation control unit 945G is formed in a case shape surrounding the load generation unit 944E and the load generation unit 944F of the distribution member 94F. The rotation control unit 945G includes a lower wall 948G and an upper wall 949G extending between a pair of side walls 9471G and 9472G. In the lower wall 948G and the upper wall 949G, the load generating section 944E and the load generating section 944F interfere with each other when the distribution member 94F rotates. The lower wall 948G and the upper wall 949G face each other with a predetermined interval, and the lower wall 948G is provided with a detection unit 95 composed of a piezoelectric element or the like. The rotation control unit 945G may have a lower wall 948G and an upper wall 949G, and one or both of the pair of side walls 9471G and 9472G may be omitted.

The distribution device 92 of the present embodiment includes the same distribution member 94F as that of the 45th embodiment described above, and the load generating units 944E and 944F have the lower wall 948G or the upper wall 949G of the rotation regulating unit 94G at the same timing. Interfere with. Therefore, also in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, not only the elastic force can be generated by the two load generating units 944E and 944F, but also the load generating units 944E and 944F repeatedly rotate the lower wall 948G and the upper wall 949G of the rotation restricting unit 945G. Damage to the load generating units 944E and 944F can be suppressed even in the case of interference with the above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), in the 47th embodiment, the rotation control unit includes a pair of control pieces 948H and 949H. These regulation pieces 948H and 949H are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval, and the regulation piece 948H is provided with a detection unit 95 composed of a piezoelectric element or the like.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94F rotates, the load generation unit 944F interferes with the regulation piece 948H of the rotation regulation unit, and the load generation unit 944E with respect to the regulation piece 949H. The state of interference is repeated. In the present embodiment, as compared with the above-mentioned 45th embodiment including the same distribution member 94F, the distribution member 94H can be rotated by utilizing the elastic force with a simple structure.

The load generating portion may protrude to the left from the rotation axis, and the rotation restricting portion may be arranged to the left as a whole from the load generating portion. Further, the load generating portion may protrude from the rotation axis in a direction other than up, down, left and right.

(48th Embodiment)
In the 39th embodiment described above, the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 is formed as a leaf spring. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the 39th embodiment described above in that the load generating portion is provided with the compression coil spring. Further, in the present embodiment, since the load generating portion includes the compression coil spring, the configuration of the rotation regulating portion is also different from that of the 39th embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 100, in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution member 94I rotates the load generation unit 944I in which the distribution member 94I protrudes downward toward the rear side of the rotation shaft 941 and the distribution member 94I. It is provided with a left interference surface 9451I and a right interference surface 9452I that the load generating unit 944I interferes with when the load is generated.

The load generating portion 944I includes an arm portion 9441I extending downward from the rotating shaft 941 and a pair of compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I fixed to the tip end side of the arm portion 9441I. The pair of compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I include a left compression coil spring 9442I projecting slightly upward to the left from the arm portion 9441I and a right compression coil spring 9443I projecting slightly upward to the right from the arm portion 9441I. The compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I are compressed when the load generating portion 944I interferes with the interference surfaces 9451I and 9452I due to the rotation of the distribution member 94I to generate an elastic force. The distribution member 94I is rotated in the opposite direction by the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I. That is, the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I have the same functions as the load generating unit 944 of the 39th embodiment described above. A left interference plate 9444I capable of interfering with the left interference surface 9451I is fixed to the left compression coil spring 9442I on the tip end side. A right interference plate 9445I capable of interfering with the right interference surface 9452I is fixed to the right compression coil spring 9443I on the tip end side. The interference plates 9444I and 9445I are fixed at a slight inclination with respect to the vertical direction because the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I project slightly upward in the horizontal direction.

Each of the interference surfaces 9451I and 9452I is a rotation regulation unit that regulates the rotation of the distribution member 94I by interfering with the interference plates 9444I and 9445I of the load generation unit 944I when the distribution member 94I rotates. The interference surfaces 9451I and 9452I are inclined in the same manner as the interference plates 9444I and 9445I so as to be in surface contact with the interference plates 9444I and 9445I. As a result, not only can the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I be effectively compressed when the interference plates 9444I and 9445I interfere with the interference surfaces 9451I and 9452I, but also the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I can be efficiently applied. The distribution member 94I can be rotated by using it.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94I rotates in the clockwise direction, the left interference plate 9444I interferes with the left interference surface 9451I, and the distribution member 94I rotates in the counterclockwise direction. In this case, the right interference plate 9445I interferes with the right interference surface 9452I. When the left interference plate 9444I interferes with the left interference surface 9451I due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94I, the left compression coil spring 9442I is compressed and an elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9442I. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9442I is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9442I is extended by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9442I. As a result, the distribution member 94I is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94I is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the right interference plate 9445I interferes with the right interference surface 9452I, and an elastic force is generated in the right compression coil spring 9443I, resulting in right compression. The distribution member 94I is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the coil spring 9443I. Therefore, the distribution member 94I is in a state where the left interference plate 9444I of the load generating portion 944I interferes with the left interference surface 9451I by rotating in the clockwise direction, and the distribution member 94I is in the right interference surface 9452I by rotating in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, the state in which the right interference plate 9445I of the load generating portion 944I interferes with each other is repeated, and the rotation is caused by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9442I and the right compression coil spring 9443I. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configurations of the load generating unit and the rotation regulating unit are different from those of the 39th embodiment described above, the same effect as that of the 39th embodiment described above can be obtained.

Although FIG. 100 does not describe a detection unit for detecting that a game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, the detection unit is also provided in the present embodiment. Is preferable. In this case, the detection unit is provided on the right interference surface 9452I or the right interference plate 9445I when configured to include, for example, a piezoelectric element. Of course, the detection unit may be provided on a portion other than the right interference surface 9452I and the right interference plate 9445I, and may be configured to include a contact switch and an optical sensor.

(49th Embodiment)
In the 48th embodiment described above, when the load generating portion 944I of the distribution member 94I includes the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I, and the rotational operation of the distribution member 94I is executed by the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9442I and 9443I. Explained. On the other hand, the present embodiment is common to the 48th embodiment described above in that the rotation operation of the distribution member is executed by utilizing the elastic force of the compression coil spring, but the distribution member is loaded. It differs from the 48th embodiment described above in that it does not have a portion and a compression coil spring (load acting portion) that generates an elastic force is provided separately from the distribution member.

Here, FIG. 101 (A) is a perspective view showing an example of a distribution member of the distribution device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 101 (B) is a cross section showing an example of a main part of the distribution device according to the present embodiment. It is a figure.

As shown in FIGS. 101 (A) and 101 (B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution member 94J includes a load input unit 940J. Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a pair of load acting units 961J and 962J that interfere with the load input unit 940J that interferes when the distribution member 94J rotates. Although FIGS. 100 (A) and 100 (B) do not describe a detection unit that detects that a game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, this implementation is carried out. Also in the embodiment, it is preferable to provide the detection unit in the same manner as in the 48th embodiment described above.

The load input unit 940J of the distribution member 94J protrudes downward from the rotation shaft 941 like the load generation unit 944 of the 39th embodiment described above, but unlike the load generation unit 944 described above, it is a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. Is formed as. Here, the term that the load input unit 940J is a rigid body or a substantially rigid body means that when the load acting units 961J and 962J interfere with the load input unit 940J, the load input unit 940J is not deformed at all or hardly deformed. The load input unit 940J has a rotating piece 9401J continuous with the rotating shaft 941 and an interfering unit 9402J that rotates integrally with the rotating piece 9401J and interferes with the load acting parts 961J and 962J. It is rotatable about the shaft 941.

The load acting units 961J and 962J include a left load acting unit 961J and a right loading acting unit 962J. The left load acting unit 961J includes a left compression coil spring 9611J. The base end of the left compression coil spring 9611J is fixed to the left fixed surface 9612J and protrudes downward to the right from the left fixed surface 9612J. A left interference plate 9613J is fixed to the tip of the left compression coil spring 9611J. The right load acting unit 962J includes a right compression coil spring 9621J. The base end of the right compression coil spring 9621J is fixed to the right fixed surface 9622J and protrudes downward to the left from the right fixed surface 9622J. A right interference plate 9623J is fixed to the tip of the right compression coil spring 9621J.

Here, the left compression coil spring 9611J is arranged downward to the right, and the right compression coil spring 9621J is arranged downward to the left. It is arranged along the tangential direction of the movement locus (arc regulation) of 9402J. Further, the left interference plate 9613J and the right interference plate 9623J are arranged on the rotation locus of the interference portion 9402J in the load input portion 940J when the distribution member 94J rotates. As a result, when the distribution member 94J rotates, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J or the right interference plate 9623J. The left fixed surface 9612J and the right fixed surface 9622J can be provided by forming through holes, recesses, etc. in the game board 31, and the game board 31 is provided with a member having the left fixed surface 9612J and the right fixed surface 9622J. It can also be fixed.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J when the distribution member 94J rotates in the clockwise direction, and interferes when the distribution member 94J rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Section 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623J. When the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, the left compression coil spring 9611J is compressed and an elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9611J. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611J is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611J is extended by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611J. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the interfering portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623J to generate an elastic force in the right compression coil spring 9621J, resulting in right compression. The distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the coil spring 9621J. Therefore, the distribution member 94J has a state in which the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613J due to rotation in the clockwise direction and a state in which the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623J due to rotation in the counterclockwise direction. By repeating the above steps, the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611J and the right compression coil spring 9621J. Therefore, this embodiment also has the same effect as that of the 39th embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the 39th embodiment. be able to.

Further, the left compression coil spring 9611J and the right compression coil spring 9621J are effectively arranged with the left compression coil spring 9611J and the right compression coil spring 9621J by arranging the expansion and contraction directions along the tangential direction of the movement locus (arc regulation) of the interference portion 9402J. Since it can be compressed and expanded, the distribution member 94J can be appropriately rotated.

(50th to 52nd Embodiment)

Here, FIG. 102 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 50th embodiment. FIG. 102 (B) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 51st embodiment. FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the 52nd embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 102 (A), 102 (B), and 103, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 50th to 52nd embodiments has the same distribution as the 49th embodiment described above. Although the member 94J is provided, the configuration of the load acting portion is different from that of the 49th embodiment described above. Note that, in FIGS. 102 (A), 102 (B), and 103, the detection unit for detecting that the game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 is not described. Also in the 50th to 52nd embodiments, it is preferable to provide a detection unit in the same manner as in the 48th embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the load acting portions 961K and 962K of the 50th embodiment include the left load acting portion 961K and the right loading acting portion 962K. The left load acting unit 961K includes a left compression coil spring 9611K and a left interference arm 9613K. The base end of the left compression coil spring 9611K is fixed to the left fixed surface 9612K, and the tip of the left compression coil spring 9611K is in contact with the left interference arm 9613K. The base end of the left interference arm 9613K is rotatably fixed by the left rotation support portion 9614K, and the tip is arranged at a position where the interference portion 9402J of the load input portion 940 of the distribution member 94J can interfere. There is. The right load acting unit 962K includes a right compression coil spring 9621K and a right interference arm 9623K. The base end of the right compression coil spring 9621K is fixed to the right fixing surface 9622K, and the tip is in contact with the right interference arm 9623K. The base end of the right interference arm 9623K is rotatably fixed by the right rotation support portion 9624K, and the tip end is arranged at a position where the interference portion 9402J of the load input portion 940 of the distribution member 94J can interfere. There is. The left fixed surface 9612K and the right fixed surface 9622K can be provided by forming through holes, recesses, etc. in the game board 31, and the game board 31 is provided with a member having the left fixed surface 9612K and the right fixed surface 9622K. It can also be fixed.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94J rotates in the clockwise direction, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the tip of the left interference arm 9613K, and the distribution member 94J rotates in the counterclockwise direction. In this case, the interference unit 9402J interferes with the right interference arm 9623K. When the interference portion 9402J interferes with the tip of the left interference arm 9613K due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, the left interference arm 9613K rotates clockwise while compressing the left compression coil spring 9611K, and the left compression coil spring. An elastic force is generated at 9611K. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611K is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611K is extended by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611K. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference arm 9623K, so that the right interference arm 9623K is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. An elastic force is generated in the right compression coil spring 9621K due to the movement, and the distribution member 94J is rotated in the clockwise direction by the elastic force generated in the right compression coil spring 9621K. Therefore, in the distribution member 94J, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference arm 9613K by rotating in the clockwise direction, and the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference arm 9623J by rotating in the counterclockwise direction. Is repeated, and the rotation is performed by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611K and the right compression il spring 9612K. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the 39th embodiment described above, the same effect as that of the 39th embodiment described above can be obtained. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 102 (B), the load acting portions 961L and 962L of the 51st embodiment include the left loading acting portion 961L and the right loading acting portion 962L. The left load acting portion 961L includes a left compression coil spring 9611L. The entire left compression coil spring 9611L is housed in the left housing portion 9612L, and the left interference plate 9613L is fixed to the tip portion. The left accommodating portion 9612L is inclined upward to the left, and the left compression coil spring 9611L is arranged upward to the left. The right load acting unit 962L includes a right compression coil spring 9621L. The entire right compression coil spring 9621L is housed in the right housing portion 9622L, and the right interference plate 9623L is fixed to the tip portion. The right accommodating portion 9622L is inclined upward to the left, and the right compression coil spring 9621L is arranged upward to the left. Here, the left compression coil spring 9611L is arranged so as to rise to the left, and the right compression coil spring 9621L is arranged so as to rise to the right. It is arranged along the tangential direction of the movement locus (arc regulation) of 9402J.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613L when the distribution member 94J rotates in the clockwise direction, and interferes when the distribution member 94J rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Part 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623L. When the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613L due to the clockwise rotation of the distribution member 94J, the left compression coil spring 9611L is compressed and an elastic force is generated in the left compression coil spring 9611L. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611L is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611L is extended by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611L. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623L to generate an elastic force in the right compression coil spring 9621L, resulting in right compression. The distribution member 94J is rotated clockwise by the elastic force generated by the coil spring 9621L. Therefore, in the distribution member 94J, the interference portion 9402J interferes with the left interference plate 9613L by rotating in the clockwise direction, and the interference portion 9402J interferes with the right interference plate 9623L by rotating in the counterclockwise direction. By repeating the above steps, the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right compression coil spring 9621L. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the 39th embodiment described above, the same effect as that of the 39th embodiment described above can be obtained. Can be done.

Further, the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right 9621L are arranged so that the expansion / contraction direction is along the tangential direction of the movement locus (arc regulation) of the interference portion 9402J, so that the left compression coil spring 9611L and the right compression coil spring 9621L are effectively compressed. And since it can be extended, the distribution member 94J can be appropriately rotated.

As shown in FIG. 103, the load acting unit 961M of the 52nd embodiment includes a left compression coil spring 9611M and a right compression coil spring 9612M. The entire compression coil springs 9611M and 9612M are housed in the housing section 9613M and arranged horizontally. A left interference plate 9614M is fixed to the tip of the left compression coil spring 9611M, and a right interference plate 9615M is fixed to the tip of the right compression coil spring 9612M. The left interference plate 9614M and the right interference plate 9615M are always in contact with the interference portion 9402J of the load input portion 940J in the distribution member 94J. In other words, the interference portion 9402J is arranged between the left interference plate 9614M and the right interference plate 9615M. Here, when the distribution member 94J is stationary, both the left compression coil spring 9611M and the right compression coil spring 9612M are in the compressed state, but the interference portion 9402J is moved from the center by the action of the eccentric portion 943 of the distribution member 94J. Is also located on the right side. That is, when the distribution member 94J is stationary, the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed more than the left compression coil spring 9611M.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94J rotates in the clockwise direction, the interference unit 9402J moves the left interference plate 9614M to the left, and the left compression coil spring 9611M is compressed. Here, since the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed as compared with the left compression coil spring 9611M in a stationary state, it expands when the interference portion 9402J rotates in the clockwise direction, and the right interference plate 9615M follows the interference portion 9402J. And move to the left. Further, when the left compression coil spring 9611M is compressed by a certain amount, the left compression coil spring 9611M is extended by the elastic force generated by the left compression coil spring 9611M. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94J rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the interference portion 9402J moves the right interference plate 9615M to the right, and the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed. At this time, the left interference plate 9614M moves to the right following the interference portion 9402J by rotating the interference portion 9402J in the counterclockwise direction. When the right compression coil spring 9612M is compressed by a certain amount, the right compression coil spring 9612M is extended by the elastic force generated by the right compression coil spring 9612M. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated in the clockwise direction. Therefore, the rotation of the distribution member 94J in the clockwise direction generates an elastic force in the left compression coil spring 9611M to rotate the distribution member 94J in the counterclockwise direction, and the distribution member 94J in the counterclockwise direction. The distribution member 94J is rotated by repeating a state in which an elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J in the clockwise direction is generated in the right compression coil spring 9612M by the rotation. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the 39th embodiment described above, the same effect as that of the 39th embodiment described above can be obtained. Can be done.

(53rd Embodiment)
In the 49th embodiment described above, the load acting portions 961J and 962J provided separately from the distribution member 94J are provided with the compression coil springs 9611J and 9621J, and the distribution member 94J is caused by the elastic force generated in the compression coil springs 9611J and 9621J. The case of being rotated has been described. On the other hand, the 53rd embodiment is common to the 49th embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated by utilizing the elastic force of the spring of the load acting portion provided separately from the distribution member. However, it differs from the 49th embodiment described above in that the spring that generates the elastic force is a torsion coil spring.

Here, FIG. 104 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 104 (B) is a diagram showing a torsion coil spring of FIG. 104 (A).

As shown in FIGS. 104 (A) and 104 (B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the same distribution member 94J as the 49th embodiment described above. Further, the load acting portions 961N and 962N of the present embodiment include a left torsion load acting portion 961N including a left torsion coil spring 9611N and a right load acting portion 962N including a right twist coil spring 9621N. The torsion coil springs 9611N and 9621N have fixed terminal portions 9612N and 9622N, movable terminal portions 9613N and 9623N, and coil portions 9614N and 9624N, and have the same configuration.

The fixed terminal portions 9612N and 9622N are portions for fixing the torsion coil springs 9611N and 9621N to the fixed surface 963N, and are continuously formed on the coil portions 9614N and 9624N. The movable terminal portions 9613N and 9623N are movable in the direction closer to and away from the fixed terminal portions 9612N and 9622N, and are continuously formed on the coil portions 9614N and 9624N. The interfering portions 9402J of the distribution member 94J are in contact with the movable terminal portions 9613N and 9623N. Here, the distribution member 94J is in a state in which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the first passage 921 of the distribution device 92 by the eccentric portion 943 in the stationary state as described above. That is, the distribution member 94J is stopped at a position slightly rotated in the counterclockwise direction as compared with the case where the left ball receiving guide piece 942L and the right ball receiving guidance piece 942R are in symmetrical positions in the stationary state. Elastic force is generated when the coil portions 9614N and 9624N are moved to the movable terminal portion 9613N by the rotation of the interference portion 9402J, and the interference portion 9402J and thus the distribution member 94J are opposed by the elastic force generated by the coil portions 9614N and 9624N. Rotate in the direction.

Although FIGS. 104 (A) and 104 (B) do not describe a detection unit for detecting that a game ball is likely to enter the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, this implementation is carried out. Also in the embodiment, it is preferable to provide the detection unit in the movable terminal units 9613N and 9623N as in the 48th embodiment described above.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94J rotates in the clockwise direction, the interference portion 9402J moves the movable terminal portion 9613N of the left-handed torsion coil spring 9611N in a direction close to the fixed terminal portion 9612N. As a result, a load is applied to the left-handed torsion coil spring 9611N in the winding direction. As a result, when the distribution member 94J rotates in the clockwise direction, an elastic force is generated in the left torsion coil spring 9611N. Further, when the movable terminal portion 9613N moves in the winding direction by a certain twist angle in the left torsion coil spring 9611N, the movable terminal portion 9613N is opposite to the winding direction due to the elastic force generated in the left torsion coil spring 9611N. Move in the direction of deployment. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94J rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the interference portion 9402J moves the movable terminal portion 9623N of the right-handed torsion coil spring 9621N in a direction close to the fixed terminal portion 9622N. A load is applied to the right-handed torsion coil spring 9621N in the winding direction. As a result, when the distribution member 94J rotates in the counterclockwise direction, an elastic force is generated in the right-handed torsion coil spring 9621N. Further, when the movable terminal portion 9623N moves in the winding direction by a certain twist angle in the right twist coil spring 9621N, the movable terminal portion 9623N moves in the deployment direction due to the elastic force generated in the right twist coil spring 9621N. .. As a result, the distribution member 94J is rotated in the clockwise direction. Therefore, a state in which an elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J in the counterclockwise direction is generated in the left-handed torsion coil spring 9611N due to the rotation of the distribution member 94J in the clockwise direction, and a counterclockwise direction of the distribution member 94J. The distribution member 94J is rotated by repeating the state in which the right-handed torsion coil spring 9612N generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J in the clockwise direction. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94J is different from that of the 39th embodiment described above, the same effect as that of the 39th embodiment described above can be obtained. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 105, in the present embodiment, the left twist coil spring 9611N and the right twist coil spring 9621N have the movable terminal portions 9613N and 9623N of the distribution member 94J in the stationary state of the distribution member 94J. It may be arranged away from the interference portion 9402J. Further, in the left torsion coil spring 9611N and the right torsion coil spring 9621N, the movable end portion of one torsion coil spring comes into contact with the interference portion 9402J in the stationary state of the distribution member 94J, and the other torsion coil spring The movable terminal portion of the above may be arranged apart from the interference portion 9492J. Further, the torsion coil spring may be configured as a part of the distribution member. For example, as the load generating portion in the 48th embodiment (see FIG. 100), a torsion coil spring may be adopted instead of the compression coil spring.

(54th to 67th embodiments)
In the 49th embodiment described above, the case where the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the compression coil springs 9611J and 9621J of the load acting portions 961J and 962J provided separately from the distribution member 94J has been described. .. Further, in the 53rd embodiment, the case where the distribution member 94J is rotated by the elastic force generated by the torsion coil springs 9611N and 9621N of the load acting portions 961N and 962N has been described. On the other hand, in the 54th to 67th embodiments, the 49th and the above-mentioned 49th and 67th embodiments are described in that the distribution member is rotated by utilizing the elastic force generated in the load acting portion provided separately from the distribution member. Although it is common to the 53rd embodiment, it differs from the 49th and 53rd embodiments described above in that it is a leaf spring that generates an elastic force.

(54th Embodiment)
Here, FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (C) are views showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106 (A), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same distribution member 94 as the 39th embodiment described above and the 39th embodiment described above. It is provided with a different load acting unit 961O. The distribution member 94 has a load generating portion 944 extending downward from the rotation shaft 941. The load generating portion 944 is configured as a leaf spring. The load acting unit 961O includes a left leaf spring 9611O and a right leaf spring 9612O. The leaf springs 9611O and 9612O extend upward from the horizontal support surface 9613O in a facing state, and when the distribution member 94 rotates, the tip of the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 can interfere with the whole. It is arranged below the load acting portion 961O.

As shown in FIG. 106 (B), in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94 rotates in the clockwise direction, the load generation unit 944 interferes with the left leaf spring 9611O, and the load generation unit 944 Both the left leaf spring 9611O and the left leaf spring 9611O are elastically deformed. As a result, when the distribution member 94 rotates in the clockwise direction, elastic force is generated in both the load generating portion 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O. Further, when the load generating portion 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O are elastically deformed by a certain amount, the distribution member 94 rotates in the counterclockwise direction due to the elastic force generated by both the load generating portion 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O.

On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the load generating portion 944 causes the right leaf spring 9612O. Both the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O are elastically deformed. As a result, when the distribution member 94 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, elastic force is generated in both the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O. Further, when the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O are elastically deformed by a certain amount, the distribution member 94 rotates clockwise due to the elastic force generated by both the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O.

As described above, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the elastic force that rotates the distribution member 94 in the counterclockwise direction in the load generating portion 944 and the left leaf spring 9611O due to the rotation of the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction. And a state in which an elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94 in the clockwise direction is generated in the load generating portion 944 and the right leaf spring 9612O due to the rotation of the distribution member 94 in the counterclockwise direction are repeated. As a result, the distribution member 94 is rotated. Therefore, even in this embodiment, although the configuration for generating the elastic force for rotating the distribution member 94 is partially different from that of the 39th embodiment described above, the same effect as that of the 39th embodiment described above is obtained. Can be played.

(The 55th to 60th embodiments)
In the 54th embodiment described above, the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 formed as a leaf spring protrudes downward behind the rotating shaft 941, and the load acting portion 961O that interferes with the load generating portion 944 protrudes upward. The load generating section 961O, which is formed as the leaf springs 9611O and 9612O and interferes with the load generating section 944, is provided at a position below the load generating section 944 as a whole. On the other hand, in the 55th to 60th embodiments, the load generating portion and the load acting portion are configured as leaf springs, which are common to the 54th embodiment described above, the load generating portion and the load acting portion. The structure of the part is different from that of the 54th embodiment described above.

(55th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 107 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generation unit 944P1 protrudes upward from the rotation shaft 941 in the distribution member 94P1, and the load action unit 961P1 is the distribution member. It is provided above the 94P1 as a whole. Specifically, the load acting portion 961P1 includes a left leaf spring 9611P1 and a right leaf spring 9612P2, and the leaf springs 9611P1 and 9612P2 extend downward from the horizontal support surface 9613P1 in a facing state.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the projecting direction of the load generating unit 944P1 is different from that of the 54th embodiment, and the direction of the load acting unit 961P1 is different, but the same operation as that of the 54th embodiment described above. It works.

(56th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 107 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107 (B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a load is generated in which the distribution member 94P2 projects downward from the rotation shaft 941 as in the 54th embodiment described above. A load generating unit 961O is provided, which has a unit 944 and interferes with the load generating unit 944 when the distribution member 94P1 rotates. The distribution device 92 of the present embodiment further has a load generating portion 944P1 in which the distribution member 94P2 projects upward from the rotation shaft 941 as in the 55th embodiment described above, and when the distribution member 94P2 is rotated. A load acting unit 961P1 with which the load generating unit 944P1 interferes is provided. That is, the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the 54th embodiment and the 55th embodiment described above are combined.

Since the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the 54th embodiment and the 55th embodiment described above are combined, the same operation and effect as those of the 54th and 55th embodiments described above Play. Further, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating section 944 and the load generating section 944P1 project in opposite directions, and these load generating sections 944, 944P1 interfere with the load acting sections 961O and 961P1 at the same timing. .. Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, not only the elastic force can be generated by the two load acting units 961O and 961P1 in addition to the two load generating units 944,944P1, but also the load generating unit 944,944P1 is the load acting unit 961O. , 961 The impact when interfering with P1 can be further mitigated. As a result, even when the load generating section 944,944P1 interferes with the repeatedly loading acting section 961O, 961P1, damage to the load generating section 944,944P1 and the load acting section 961O, 961P1 can be further suppressed.

(57th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108 (C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 56th embodiment and the same distribution member 94P2 as the above-mentioned 56th embodiment. It has a load acting part. The load acting portion includes an upper leaf spring 9611P3 and a lower leaf spring 9612P3. These leaf springs 9611P3 and 9612P3 are arranged one above the other at predetermined intervals.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94P2 rotates, the load generating portion 944P1 interferes with the upper leaf spring 9611P3 of the load acting portion, and the load is generated with respect to the lower leaf spring 9612P3. The state in which the unit 944 interferes is repeated. In the present embodiment, as compared with the above-mentioned 56th embodiment including the same distribution member 94P2, the distribution member 94P2 can be rotated by utilizing the elastic force with a simple configuration.

(58th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108 (A), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the load generation unit 944Q1 protrudes to the right from the rotation shaft 941 in the distribution member 94Q1, and the load action unit 961Q1 distributes. It is provided on the right side of the member 94Q1 as a whole.

The load acting unit 961Q1 includes an upper leaf spring 9611Q1 and a lower leaf spring 9612Q1. These leaf springs 9611Q1 and 9612Q1 face each other and are arranged one above the other with a predetermined interval.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the protruding direction of the load generating unit 944Q1 is different from that of the 55th embodiment described above, and the directions of the leaf springs 9611Q1 and 9612Q1 of the load acting unit 961Q1 are different. It has the same effect as that of the embodiment.

(59th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108 (B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a load in which the distribution member 94Q2 projects to the right from the rotation shaft 941 as in the 58th embodiment described above. It has a generating section 944Q1 and includes an upper leaf spring 9611Q1 and a lower leaf spring 9612Q1 that interfere with the load generating section 944Q1 when the distribution member 94Q2 rotates. The distribution device 92 of the present embodiment further has a load generation unit 944Q2 in which the distribution member 94Q2 projects to the left from the rotation shaft 941, and the upper leaf spring that the load generation unit 944Q2 interferes with when the distribution member 94Q2 rotates. It is provided with 9611Q2 and a lower leaf spring 9612Q2.

Since the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment has the load generating unit 944Q1 as in the 58th embodiment described above, it has the same effect as that of the 58th embodiment described above. Further, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generating section 944Q1 and the load generating section 944Q2 project in opposite directions, and these load generating sections 944Q1 and 944Q2 interfere with the load acting section 961Q1 and the spring 961Q2 at the same timing. do. Therefore, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, not only the elastic force can be generated by the two load generating units 944Q1 and 944Q2, but also the impact when the load generating units 944Q1 and 944Q2 interfere with the load acting unit 961Q1 and 961Q2 is alleviated. can. As a result, even when the load generating units 944Q1 and 944Q2 repeatedly interfere with the load acting units 961Q1 and 961Q2, damage to the load generating units 944Q1, 944Q2 and the load acting units 961Q1 and the spring 961Q2 can be suppressed.

(60th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 108 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 108 (C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the same distribution member 94Q2 as the 59th embodiment described above and a load different from that of the 59th embodiment described above. It has a working part. The load acting portion includes a left leaf spring 9611Q3 and a right leaf spring 9612Q3. These leaf springs 9611Q3 and 9612Q3 are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval.

In the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94Q2 rotates, the load generation unit 944Q2 interferes with the left leaf spring 9611Q3 of the load acting unit, and the load is generated with respect to the right leaf spring 9612Q3. The state in which the unit 944Q1 interferes is repeated. In the present embodiment, as compared with the 59th embodiment and the like having the same distribution member 94Q2, the distribution member 94Q2 can be rotated by utilizing the elastic force with a simple configuration.

The load generating portion may project to the left from the rotation axis, or may project from the rotation axis in a direction other than up, down, left, and right.

(Embodiments 61 to 67)

In the 54th to 60th embodiments described above, the case where the load generating portion of the distribution member 94,94P1,94P2,94Q1,94Q2 is formed as a leaf spring 944,944P1,944Q1,944Q2 which is an elastic body has been described. .. On the other hand, the 61st to 67th embodiments are different from the 54th to 60th embodiments described above in that the distribution member includes a load input portion formed as a rigid body.
(61st Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109 (A), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the same load acting unit 961O as the 54th embodiment described above and a load different from the 54th embodiment described above. A distribution member 94R1 having an input unit 944R1 is provided. The load input unit 944R1 is a portion where the load for rotating the distribution member 94R1 is input from the load acting unit 961O, and projects downward from the rotation shaft 941. The load input unit 944R1 has an arm 9441R1 protruding downward from the rotating shaft 941 and an interfering unit 9441R1 provided at the end of the arm 9441R1 and interfering with the load acting unit 961O when the distribution member 94R1 rotates. It is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generation unit 944 of the distribution member 94 in the distribution device 92 of the 54th embodiment described above is changed to a load input unit 944R1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. It was done.

(62nd Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109 (B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the same load acting unit 961P1 as the 55th embodiment described above and a load different from the 55th embodiment described above. A distribution member 94R2 having an input unit 944R2 is provided. The load input unit 944R2 is a portion where the load for rotating the distribution member 94R2 is input from the load acting unit 961P1 and projects upward from the rotation shaft 941. The load input unit 944R2 has an arm 9441R2 protruding upward from the rotating shaft 941 and an interfering unit 9442R2 provided at the end of the arm 9441R2 and interfering with the load acting unit 961P1 when the distribution member 94R2 rotates. It is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generation unit 944P1 of the distribution member 94 in the distribution device 92 of the 55th embodiment described above is changed to a load input unit 944R2 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. It was done.

(63rd Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109 (C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the same load acting units 961O and 961P1 as those of the 56th embodiment described above, and the 56th embodiment described above. A distribution member 94R3 having different load input units 944R1 and 944R2 is provided. The load input units 944R1 and 944R2 include the same load input unit 944R1 as in the 61st embodiment described above and the same load input unit 944R2 as in the 62nd embodiment described above. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generation unit 944, 944P1 of the distribution member 94P2 in the distribution device 92 of the 56th embodiment described above is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and the load input unit 944R1 is formed. , 944R2.

(64th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 109 (D) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109 (D), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the same load acting unit (leaf spring 9611P3, 9612P3) as the 57th embodiment described above, and the 63rd described above. The same distribution member 94R3 as in the embodiment is provided. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generation unit 944, 944P1 of the distribution member 94P2 in the distribution device 92 of the 57th embodiment described above is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and the load input unit 944R1 is formed. , 944R2.

(65th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 110A is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the same load acting unit 961Q1 as the 58th embodiment described above and a load different from the 58th embodiment described above. A distribution member 94S1 having an input unit 944S1 is provided. The load input unit 944S1 is a portion where the load for rotating the distribution member 94S1 is input from the load acting unit 961Q1 and projects to the right from the rotation shaft 941. The load input unit 944S1 has an arm 9441S1 protruding to the right from the rotation shaft 941 and an interference unit 9442S1 provided at the end of the arm 9441S1 and interfering with the load acting unit 961Q1 when the distribution member 94S1 rotates. , Rigid body or substantially rigid body. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generation unit 944Q1 of the distribution member 94Q1 in the distribution device 92 of the 58th embodiment described above is changed to a load input unit 944S1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body. It was done.

(66th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 110B is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110 (B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the same load acting unit (leaf spring 9611Q1, 9612Q1, 9611Q2, 9612Q2) as the 59th embodiment described above, and the above-mentioned. The distribution member 94S2 having the load input units 944S1 and 944S2 different from the 59th embodiment of the above is provided. The load input units 944S1 and 944S2 include the same load input unit 944S1 as in the 65th embodiment described above, and the load input unit 944S2 protruding to the left from the rotation shaft 941. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generation units 944Q1 and 944Q2 of the distribution member 94Q1 in the distribution device 92 of the 59th embodiment described above are formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and the load input unit 944S1 , 944S2.

(67th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 110 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the same load acting unit (leaf spring 9611Q3, 9612Q3) as the above-mentioned 60th embodiment and the above-mentioned 66th. The same distribution member 94S2 as in the embodiment is provided. That is, in the distribution device 92 of the present embodiment, the load generation unit 944Q2, 944Q3 of the distribution member 94Q1 in the distribution device 92 of the 60th embodiment described above is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and the load input unit 944S1 , 944S2.

The load input unit may project to the left from the rotation axis, or may project from the rotation axis in a direction other than up, down, left, and right.

(68th Embodiment)
In the 61st embodiment described above, the case where the distribution member 94I has a load input unit 944R1 formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and the load input unit 944R1 has an arm 9441R1 and an interference unit 9441R2 has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is common to the 61st embodiment described above in that the load input portion is formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body, but the load generating portion is formed as a cam. It is different from the 61st embodiment of.

Here, FIGS. 111 (A) and 111 (B) are diagrams showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 111 (A) and 111 (B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has the same load acting unit 961O as the 61st embodiment described above and the 61st above-mentioned A distribution member 94T different from the embodiment is provided. The distribution member 94T includes a load input unit 944T having a reverse tear grain shape when viewed from the front. The load input unit 944T has a rotation shaft 941 fixed to the load input unit 944T, and is integrally rotated by the rotation of the rotation shaft 941. The load input unit 944T has a left cam surface 9441T and a right cam surface 9442T.

The left cam surface 9441T is in contact with the left leaf spring 9611O of the load acting portion 961O, and elastically deforms the left leaf spring 9611O when the distribution member 94T rotates in the clockwise direction. The right cam surface 9442T is in contact with the right leaf spring 9612O of the load acting portion 961O, and elastically deforms the right leaf spring 9612O when the distribution member 94T rotates in the counterclockwise direction.

In the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94T rotates in the clockwise direction, the left cam surface 9441T elastically deforms the left leaf spring 9611O to generate an elastic force in the left leaf spring 9611O, and the elasticity of the left leaf spring 9611O. The distribution member 94T is rotated counterclockwise by the force. When the distribution member 94T rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the right cam surface 9442T elastically deforms the right leaf spring 9612O to generate an elastic force in the right leaf spring 9612O, and the distribution member 94T is distributed by the elastic force of the right leaf spring 9612O. The member 94T is rotated clockwise. As a result, the distribution member 94T is repeatedly rotated in one direction (for example, in the clockwise direction) and in the other direction (for example, in the counterclockwise direction) due to the elastic force of the leaf springs 9611O and 9612O that are alternately generated. Rotate.

The cam surfaces 9441T and 9442T need only be able to elastically deform the leaf springs 9611O and 9612O when the distribution member 94T rotates, and even if the cam surfaces 9441T and 9442T and the leaf springs 9611O and 9612O are separated from each other. good.

(69th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 111C is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111 (C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a distribution member 94T in which the same load input unit 944T as in the 68th embodiment described above is formed as a cam, and the distribution member 94T described above. The load acting unit 961U having a configuration different from that of the 68th embodiment of the above is provided. The load acting portion 961U includes a left leaf spring 9611U and a right leaf spring 9612U whose tip portions are rounded into a cylindrical shape. The left leaf spring 9611U and the right leaf spring 9612U may be formed of a rod-shaped member, and in this case, the tip portion is formed in a ring shape.

(70th Embodiment)
In the 39th embodiment described above, the case where the load generating portion 944 of the distribution member 94 is formed as a leaf spring has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the 39th embodiment described above in that the load generating portion is formed by two spiral springs.

Here, FIG. 112A is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. 112 (B) and 112 (C) are perspective views showing the spiral spring of FIG. 112 (A). FIG. 113 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A8-A8 cutting line of FIG. 112 (A). FIG. 113 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A9-A9 cutting line of FIG. 112 (A).

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 113, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a distribution member 94V having a load generating unit 944V, and rotation regulating units 947V and 948V.

The load generating unit 944V includes a right-handed spiral spring 945V fixed to the rotating shaft 941 and a left-handed spiral spring 946V fixed to the rear of the rotating shaft 941 with respect to the right-handed spiral spring 945V.

The right-handed spiral spring 945V has a winding portion 9451V, an input piece 9452V and a fixed piece 9453V. The winding portion 9451V is a portion that generates an elastic force, and is wound right-handed along the peripheral surface of the rotating shaft 941 when viewed from the front. The input piece 9452V is a portion to which a load is input by interfering with the left rotation restricting portion 947V, and extends to the left from the outer end portion of the winding portion 9451V. The fixing piece 9453V is a portion for fixing the right-handed spiral spring 945V to the rotating shaft 941, and extends downward from the inner end portion of the winding portion 9451V. By embedding the fixing piece 9453V in the rotating shaft 941, the right-handed spiral spring 945V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941.

The left-handed spiral spring 946V has a winding portion 9461V, an input piece 9462V and a fixed piece 9463V. The winding portion 9461V is a portion that generates an elastic force, and is wound counterclockwise along the peripheral surface of the rotating shaft 941 when viewed from the front. The input piece 9462V is a portion where a load is input by interfering with the right rotation restricting portion 948V, and extends to the right from the outer end portion of the winding portion 9461V. The fixing piece 9463V is a portion for fixing the left-handed spiral spring 946V to the rotating shaft 941 and extends downward from the inner end portion of the winding portion 9461V. By embedding the fixing piece 9463V in the rotating shaft 941, the left-handed spiral spring 946V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941.

The rotation regulation unit 947V, 948V includes a left rotation regulation unit 947V and a right rotation regulation unit 948V.

The left rotation regulating unit 947V regulates the rotation of the right-handed spiral spring 945V when the distribution member 94V rotates, so that a load is input to the right-handed spiral spring 945V via the input piece 9452V. The counterclockwise rotation restricting portion 947V has a right-opening U-shape having a shape in which a pair of restricting pieces 9472V and 9473V extend to the right from the upper and lower edges of the base 9471V. In the counterclockwise rotation restricting unit 947V, when the distribution member 94V rotates in the clockwise direction, the input piece 9452V interferes with the regulation piece 9472V, so that the rotation of the distribution member 94V in the clockwise direction is restricted. At this time, since the fixed piece 9453V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941, the winding portion 9451V is wound by inputting a load in the unfolding direction opposite to the winding direction. The part 9451V generates an elastic force in the winding direction. Due to the elastic force in the winding direction of the winding portion 9451V, the distribution member 94V whose rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted rotates in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, when the distribution member 94V rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the input piece 9452V interferes with the regulation piece 9473V, so that the rotation of the distribution member 94V in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. At this time, when a load in the winding direction is input to the winding portion 9451V, the winding portion 9451V generates an elastic force in the developing direction. Due to the elastic force in the unfolding direction of the winding portion 9451V, the distribution member 94V whose rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted rotates in the clockwise direction.

On the other hand, the right rotation regulating unit 948V regulates the rotation of the left-handed spiral spring 946V when the distribution member 94V rotates, so that a load is input to the left-handed spiral spring 946V via the input piece 9462V. The right rotation restricting portion 948V has a left-opening U-shape having a shape in which a pair of restricting pieces 9482V and 9483V extend to the left from the upper and lower edges of the base 9481V. In the right rotation restricting unit 948V, when the distribution member 94V rotates in the clockwise direction, the input piece 9462V interferes with the regulation piece 9483V, so that the rotation of the distribution member 94V in the clockwise direction is restricted. At this time, in the left-handed spiral spring 946V, since the fixed piece 9463V is fixed to the rotating shaft 941, a load in the winding direction is input to the winding portion 9461V, so that the winding portion 9461V has an elastic force in the developing direction. Occurs. Due to the elastic force in the unfolding direction of the winding portion 9461V, the distribution member 94V whose rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted rotates in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, when the distribution member 94V rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the input piece 9462V interferes with the regulation piece 9462V, so that the rotation of the distribution member 94V in the counterclockwise direction is restricted. At this time, when a load in the unfolding direction is input to the winding portion 9461V, the winding portion 9461V generates an elastic force in the winding direction. Due to the elastic force in the winding direction of the winding portion 9461V, the distribution member 94V whose rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted rotates in the clockwise direction.

In the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94V is rotated in the clockwise direction, an elastic force in the winding direction is generated in the winding portion 9451V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V, and the elastic force in the winding direction is generated in the winding portion 9461V of the left-handed spiral spring 946V. Elastic force in the unfolding direction is generated. Therefore, the distribution member 94V is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the elastic force generated in the winding portions 9451V and 9461V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V and the left-handed spiral spring 946V when rotated in the clockwise direction. On the contrary, when the distribution member 94V is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, an elastic force in the unfolding direction is generated in the winding portion 9451V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V, and the winding portion of the left-handed spiral spring 946V. An elastic force in the winding direction is generated at 9461V. Therefore, the distribution member 94V is rotated in the clockwise direction by the elastic force generated in the winding portions 9451V and 9461V of the right-handed spiral spring 945V and the left-handed spiral spring 946V when rotated in the counterclockwise direction. As described above, also in the present embodiment, the elastic force generated when the distribution member 94V rotates causes the distribution member 94V to rotate in one direction (for example, clockwise) and the distribution member 94V in the other direction (for example, counterclockwise). It is possible to realize a rotation operation in which rotation in the clockwise direction) is repeated alternately.

(71st Embodiment)
In the 70th embodiment described above, the case where the load generating portion 944V of the distribution member 94V is a spiral spring has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although it is common with the 70th embodiment described above in that the distribution member is rotated by utilizing the elastic force generated by the spiral spring, the spiral spring is used as the load acting portion. This is different from the 70th embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 114, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a distribution member 94W and a load acting unit 945W.

The distribution member 94W has a configuration in which the distribution member 94 of the 39th embodiment described above has an interference unit 944W formed as a rigid body or a substantially rigid body instead of the load generating unit 944 which is a leaf spring. The interference portion 944W is a portion that interferes with the right-handed spiral spring 946W or the left-handed spiral spring 947W of the load acting portion 945W described later when the distribution member 94W rotates, and has a plate shape extending downward from the rotating shaft 941. be.

The load acting portion 945W includes a right-handed spiral spring 946W, a left-handed spiral spring 947W, and a support portion 948W.

The right-handed spiral spring 946W has a winding portion 9461W, an input piece 9462W, and a fixed piece 9463W. The winding portion 9461W is a portion that generates an elastic force and is right-handed when viewed from the front. The input piece 9462W is a portion where a load is input due to interference of the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W, and extends upward from the outer end portion of the winding portion 9461W. The fixing piece 9463W is a portion for fixing the right-handed spiral spring 946W to the support portion 948W, and extends to the right from the inner end portion of the winding portion 9461W.

The left-handed spiral spring 947W has a winding portion 9471W, an input piece 9472W, and a fixed piece 9473W. The winding portion 9471W is a portion that generates an elastic force and is left-handed when viewed from the front. The input piece 9472W is a portion where a load is input due to interference of the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W, and extends upward from the outer end portion of the winding portion 9471W. The fixing piece 9472W is a portion for fixing the left-handed spiral spring 947W to the support portion 948W, and extends to the left from the inner end portion of the winding portion 9471W.

The support portion 948W has a pair of support arms 9482W and 9483W extending upward from the base 9481W. The support arms 9482W and 9843W support the spiral springs 946W and 947W. Specifically, the centers of the winding portions 9461W and 9471W are inserted into the fixed shafts 9484W and 9485W extending in the front-rear direction from the support arms 9482W and 9843W, and the fixed pieces 9463W and 9473W are embedded in the fixed shafts 9484W and 9485W. As a result, the spiral springs 946W and 947W are supported by the support arms 9482W and 9843W.

In the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94W is rotated in the clockwise direction, the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W interferes with the input piece 9462W of the right-handed spiral spring 946W. As a result, in the right-handed spiral spring 946W, the input piece 9462W moves to the left, so that a load acts on the winding portion 9461W in the winding direction. Therefore, in the right-handed spiral spring 946W, an elastic force in the unfolding direction is generated in the winding portion 9461W, and the winding portion 9461W is deployed by this elastic force, so that the interfering portion 944W of the distribution member 94W from the input piece 9462W. A load for rotating the distribution member 94W in the counterclockwise direction is input. On the other hand, when the distribution member 94W is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W interferes with the input piece 9472W of the left-handed spiral spring 947W. As a result, in the left-handed spiral spring 947W, the input piece 9472W moves to the right, so that a load acts on the winding portion 9471W in the winding direction. Therefore, in the left-handed spiral spring 947W, an elastic force in the unfolding direction is generated in the winding portion 9471W, and the winding portion 9471W is deployed by this elastic force, so that the input piece 9472W becomes the interference portion 944W of the distribution member 94W. On the other hand, a load for rotating the distribution member 94W in the clockwise direction is input. As described above, also in the present embodiment, the elastic force generated when the distribution member 94W rotates causes the distribution member 94W to rotate in one direction (for example, clockwise) and the distribution member 94W in the other direction (for example, counterclockwise). It is possible to realize a rotation operation in which rotation in the clockwise direction) is repeated alternately.

In the present embodiment, when the distribution member 94W is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction, the distribution member utilizes the elastic force in the deployment direction generated by the spiral springs 946W and 947W being involved. Although 94W is rotated in the opposite direction, the distribution member 94W may be rotated in the opposite direction by utilizing the elastic force in the winding direction generated by deploying the spiral springs 946W and 947W.

<72nd Embodiment>
In the 39th embodiment described above, the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 distributes the game ball 99 to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 by the elastic force generated in the load generating unit 944. The case of rotating the On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the 39th embodiment described above in that the distribution member is rotated by a load continuously input from the outside regardless of the distribution of the game balls.

Here, FIG. 115 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. 115 (B), 116 (A) and 116 (B) are diagrams showing the operation of the sorting device shown in FIG. 115 (A).

As shown in FIG. 115, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a distribution member 94X and a drive mechanism 97X.

The distribution member 94X has a rotation shaft 941, a left ball receiving guide piece 942L, a right ball receiving guidance piece 942R, a left load input unit 944X, and a right load input unit 945X. The left load input unit 944X is a plate-shaped rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and projects to the left from the rotation shaft 941. The right load input unit 945X is a plate-shaped rigid body or a substantially rigid body, and projects to the right from the rotation shaft 941. The left load input unit 944X and the right load input unit 945X may be formed as elastic bodies such as leaf springs.

The drive mechanism 97X transmits the rotational force applied to the left rotating body 971X, the right rotating body 972X, the rotating bodies 971X and 972X to the rotating bodies 971X and 972X, and the rotational force applied from the motor 973X to the rotating bodies 971X and 972X. A plurality of meshing transmission gears 974X to 977X (four in this embodiment) are provided. As the motor 973X, a DC motor, a stepping motor, or the like can be used. Further, instead of the motor 973X, another drive source such as a solenoid can be used. It is preferable that the plurality of transmission gears 974X to 977X have the same gear diameter and gear ratio.

The left rotating body 971X is rotated in the clockwise direction by inputting the rotational force input from the motor 973X to the transmission gear 975X via the transmission gear 974X. The left rotating body 971X includes a gear 9712X integrated with the rotating shaft 9711X, and a plurality of interference plates 9713X (three in the present embodiment) extending from the rotating shaft 9711X at equal angular intervals. The gear 9712X is a portion where the rotational force from the motor 973X is input via the transmission gears 974X and 975X. The plurality of interference plates 9713X are portions that interfere with the left load input portion 944X of the distribution member 94X when the left rotating body 971X is rotated in the clockwise direction, and are formed by elastically deformable leaf springs.

The right-handed rotating body 972X is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by inputting the rotational force input from the motor 973X to the transmission gear 975X via the transmission gears 976X and 977X. The right-handed rotating body 972X includes a gear 9722X integrated with the rotating shaft 9721X, and a plurality of interference plates 9723X (three in the present embodiment) extending from the rotating shaft 9721X at equal angular intervals. The gear 9722X is a portion to which the rotational force from the motor 973X is input via the transmission gears 975X to 977X. The plurality of interference plates 9723X are portions that interfere with the right load input portion 945X of the distribution member 94X when the right rotating body 972X is rotated in the counterclockwise direction, and are formed by elastically deformable leaf springs. .. The plurality of interference plates 9723X of the right rotating body 972X are arranged in a state of being 60 ° out of phase with the plurality of interference plates 9713X of the left rotating body 971X. Further, the rotation speed of the right rotating body 972X is the same as the rotation speed of the left rotating body 971X.

The left rotating body 971X rotates clockwise with the phases of the plurality of interfering pieces 9723X of the right rotating body 972X shifted by 60 ° with respect to the plurality of interfering pieces 9713X of the left rotating body 971X shown in FIG. 115 (A). When the right rotating body 972X rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the interference piece 9713X of the left rotating body 971X interferes with the left load input unit 944X of the distribution member 94X, as shown in FIG. 115 (B). As a result, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the clockwise rotational force of the left rotating body 971X is input to the left load input unit 944X of the distribution member 94X via the interference piece 9713X, and the distribution member 94X receives the distribution member 94X. It is rotated counterclockwise. Further, when the distribution member 94X is rotated by the rotational force of the left rotating body 971X, the interference piece 9713X of the left rotating body 971X is elastically deformed, and the right load input portion 945X of the distribution member 94X is the right rotating body 972X. It interferes with the interfering piece 9723X. As a result, with respect to the distribution member 94X, the rotational force in the counterclockwise direction of the right rotating body 972X is input to the right load input unit 945X of the distribution member 94X via the interference piece 9723X. At this time, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), the interfering piece 9713X of the elastically deformed left rotating body 971X is separated from the left load input portion 944X of the distribution member 94X. Therefore, the distribution member 94X is rotated in the clockwise direction by the rotational force in the counterclockwise direction of the right-handed rotating body 972X.

On the other hand, although the drawing is omitted, when the distribution member 94X is rotated in the clockwise direction by the rotational force of the right rotating body 972X, the left load input unit 944X of the distribution member 94X becomes an interference piece of the left rotating body 971X. While interfering with 9713X, the interference piece 9723X of the right rotating body 972X is elastically deformed. After that, the interference piece 9723X of the right rotating body 972X is separated from the right load input unit 945X of the distribution member 94X, so that the distribution member 94X is rotated counterclockwise by the left rotating body 971X as described above. Will be done. In this way, the distribution member 94X is rotated by being alternately rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the clockwise direction by the left-handed rotating body 971X and the right-handed rotating body 972X.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the left rotating body 971X is rotated in the clockwise direction by the drive mechanism 97X and the right rotating body 972X is rotated in the counterclockwise direction regardless of the distribution of the game ball 99 by the distribution member 94X. The distribution member 94X is rotated by alternately rotating in the counterclockwise direction and the clockwise direction. Therefore, also in the present embodiment, the player can launch the game ball 99 at the timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92. Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 94X can be rotated by rotating the motor 973X in the same direction at a constant speed, so that the control of the motor 973X becomes easy.

<73rd Embodiment>
In the 72nd embodiment described above, the left rotating body 971X is rotated clockwise by the drive mechanism 97X and the right rotating body 972X is rotated counterclockwise regardless of the distribution of the game ball 99 by the distribution member 94X. The case where the distribution member 94X is rotated by rotating the member 94X has been described. On the other hand, although this embodiment is common to the 72nd embodiment described above in that the distribution member is rotated by the drive mechanism, a rotational force is applied to the rotation axis of the distribution member from the outside of the distribution member. It differs from the above-described 72nd embodiment in that the distribution member is rotated by inputting.

Here, FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the sorting device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a distribution member 94Y and a drive mechanism 97Y.

The distribution member 94Y includes a rotation shaft 941, a left ball receiving guide piece 942L, a right ball receiving guidance piece 942R, and a load input unit 944Y. The load input unit 944Y is a bevel gear integrated with the rear end portion of the rotating shaft 941 and rotates together with the rotating shaft 941.

The drive mechanism 97Y inputs a rotational force for rotating the distribution member 94Y to the load input unit 944Y. The drive mechanism 97Y includes a rotary shaft 971Y rotated by a motor 970Y and a bevel gear 972Y integrally provided at an end of the rotary shaft 971Y. As the motor 970Y, a DC motor, a stepping motor, or the like can be used. Further, instead of the motor 970Y, another drive source such as a solenoid can be used. The bevel gear 972Y rotates integrally with the rotating shaft 971Y when the rotating shaft 971Y is rotated by the motor 970Y. A load input unit 944Y of the distribution member 94Y is meshed with the bevel gear 972Y. Therefore, when the rotating shaft 971Y is rotated by the rotational force from the motor 970Y, the load input portion 944Y of the distribution member 94Y is rotated by the rotation of the bevel gear 972Y accompanying the rotation of the rotating shaft 971Y. As a result, the rotation shaft 941 of the distribution member 94Y is rotated, so that the entire distribution member 94Y is rotated. The operation of the motor 970Y is controlled by the MPU 41. That is, by controlling the drive source by the MPU 41, the rotating shaft 971Y is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and the distribution member 94Y is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction accordingly.

By the way, in the 39th embodiment described above, the on / off of the synchronization lamp 923 is controlled according to the posture (rotation angle) of the distribution member 94 based on the output voltage of the detection unit 95. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the 39th embodiment described above in that the lighting and extinguishing of the synchronization lamp 923 are controlled according to the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y.

Here, FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the lighting timing and the extinguishing timing of the synchronization lamp 923. As shown in FIG. 118, in the present embodiment, the MPU 41 distributes by alternately rotating the distribution member 94Y by a predetermined rotation angle in the clockwise direction (right direction) and the counterclockwise direction (left direction). The member 94Y is rotated. Further, in the present embodiment, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is rotation-controlled in the counterclockwise direction (left direction), and the distribution member 94Y is rotation-controlled in the clockwise direction (right direction). It is turned off at the timing when it is turned off. As a result, the player can recognize that the distribution member 94Y is rotating in the counterclockwise direction by turning on the synchronization lamp 923, and the distribution member 94Y is rotating in the clockwise direction by turning off the synchronization lamp 923. I can recognize that. Therefore, the player launches the game ball 99 at a timing when the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 with the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y grasped by turning on and off the synchronization lamp 923 as a guide. Will be possible. For example, when the timing at which the synchronization lamp 923 is lit is set to the launch timing of the game ball 99 at which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922, the game ball 99 is at the timing when the synchronization lamp 923 is lit. By launching, the game ball 99 can be efficiently passed through the second passage 922. In this case, the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 notifies the launch timing of the game ball 99 in which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922. On the contrary, even if the rotation pattern of the distribution member 94Y is set so that the synchronization lamp 923 is turned off to notify the launch timing of the game ball 99 in which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922. Often, the synchronization lamp 923 may be turned on at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is rotationally controlled in the clockwise direction (rightward direction).

The unit rotation cycle Ts (see FIG. 118) of the distribution member 94Y is a positive integer multiple (for example, 1) of the firing interval Th (see FIG. 88) of the game ball 99, as in the 39th embodiment described above. Double to triple, preferably 1x or 2x) or close to it (eg, ± 15% range of positive integer multiples, preferably ± 10% range of positive integer multiples, more preferably positive integer multiples It is in the range of ± 5% of. For example, the unit rotation cycle Ts is set in the range of 0.51 seconds to 0.69 seconds, or 1.02 seconds to 1.38 seconds when the firing interval Th is 0.6 seconds. In this way, when the unit rotation cycle Ts is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval Th or a value close to it, the game ball 99 can be easily distributed to the second passage 922 (a state in which the game ball 99 can be distributed) and the game ball. It becomes easy to link with the launch timing of 99. Further, if the launch timing of the game ball 99 and the timing of distribution to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 can be matched, the game ball is distributed to the second passage 922 with a high probability by performing a stop after that. It is also possible to do so.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 119, in the main timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the sensor detection process (step S1001) and the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2 update processes (step S1002) are the same as in the first embodiment described above. ), The counters C1 to C4 are updated (step S1003), the start winning process (step S1004), the launch control process (step S1005), and the through gate process (step S1006) are executed. In the main timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the distribution member control process (step S3601) and the synchronous lamp control process (step S3602) are further executed. In the present embodiment, when the passage of the game ball 99 at the through gate 319'is detected in the through gate process (Yes in step S1201 of FIG. 16), the number of game balls is counted. The count of the number of game balls is referred to when the left rotation time is set in step S3707 of the distribution member control process described later.

[Distribution member control process]
Here, FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in step S3601 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. In the distribution member control process, the MPU 41 controls the output of the motor 972Y in the drive mechanism 97Y to control the rotation of the rotating shaft 971Y in the forward direction or the reverse direction. As a result, the right rotation (rotation in the clockwise direction) and the left rotation (rotation in the counterclockwise direction) of the distribution member 94Y are controlled, and the rotation operation of the distribution member 94Y is controlled.

<Step S3701>
In the distribution member control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the right rotation flag is set to ON (step S3701). The right rotation flag is a flag indicating that the distribution member 94Y is rotated clockwise, and is set to ON in step S3714 described later. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3702 when the right rotation flag is set to on (step S3701: Yes), and steps the process when the right rotation flag is set to off (step S3701: No). Move to S3709.

<Steps S3702-S3704>
In step S3702, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the right rotation time set in step S3712 described later has elapsed, that is, whether or not it is the timing to change the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from right rotation to left rotation. do. When the right rotation time has elapsed (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the right rotation flag to off (step S3703), and ends the time counting of the right rotation time (step S3704). If the right rotation time has not elapsed (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 ends the distribution member control process.

<Step S3705>
In step S3705, the MPU 41 determines the left rotation time and sets the determined left rotation time. The left rotation time is determined in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), a standard time (for example, 1 second), and a long time (for example, 1) according to the distribution frequency or distribution ratio of the game ball 99 with respect to the second passage 922. The left rotation time is determined by any of (0.5 seconds). For example, the standard time of the left rotation time is approximately 1: 1 (for example, in the range of 0.4: 0.6 to 0.6: 0.4) of the game balls 99 in the first passage 921 and the second passage 922. It is selected when it is sorted, it is selected when the distribution ratio to the first passage 921 is low for a short time and the distribution ratio to the second passage 922 is high, and it is selected when the distribution ratio to the first passage 921 is high for a long time. It is selected when the distribution ratio to the two aisles 922 is low.

Specifically, in the MPU 41, the number of game balls counted when the passage of the game balls 99 at the through gate 319'is detected (Yes in step S1201 of FIG. 16) is counted for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, Whether or not it is equal to or higher than the first threshold value after 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.), and if it is not equal to or higher than the first threshold value, it is set to a value smaller than the first threshold value. Judge whether or not. The first threshold value is, for example, a value at which the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is 0.4: 0.6 or more, that is, the distribution ratio of the second passage 922 is the first passage 921. It is set to a value equivalent to 1.5 times the distribution ratio. The second threshold value is, for example, a value in which the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is 0.6: 0.4 or less, that is, the distribution ratio of the first passage 921 is the second passage 922. It is set to a value equivalent to 1.5 times the distribution ratio. That is, when the distribution ratio of the second passage 922 is high, a short time is selected as the left rotation time, which makes it difficult for the game ball 99 to be distributed to the second passage 922, while the distribution ratio of the second passage 922 is high. In this case, by selecting a short time as the left rotation time, the game ball 99 can be easily distributed to the second passage 922, and the distribution ratio between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be made constant. Become. As a result, the player 99 can be rescued when the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 is low, and when the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 is high, the second passage 922 can be used. In order to distribute the game balls 99, a higher level of skill is required, so that the game playability can be improved. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 capable of adjusting the difficulty level of firing the gaming ball 99 at the timing when the gaming ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 according to the skill of the player. As a result, the unfairness to the player with low skill can be reduced, while the difficulty level of the launch timing of the game ball 99 for distributing the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 for the player with high skill is high. It is possible to provide higher playability. The predetermined time for determining whether the time is equal to or higher than the first threshold value or lower than the second threshold value is the time since the left rotation time was set last time, and similarly passes through the second passage 922. The count number of the game ball is also the count number since the left rotation time was set last time.

In the present embodiment, the left rotation time is selected from three stages of short time, standard time and long time, but the left rotation time is selected from two stages of short time and standard time, and two stages of standard time and long time. Of course, it may be selected from the time set in four or more stages. Further, in the present embodiment, the right rotation time described later is a fixed value (one step), but the right rotation time may be selected from a plurality of times. In this case, the left rotation time may be a fixed value (one step) or may be selected from multiple steps. Further, instead of adjusting the left rotation time or the right rotation time, the distribution member 94Y is stopped for a certain period of time at the left switching point Pl or the right switching point Pr, and the stop time at the left switching point Pl or the right switching point Pr. By adjusting the above, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is more easily distributed to the second passage 922 than in the first passage 921, or a state in which the game ball 99 is more easily distributed to the first passage 921 than in the second passage 922. You may. For example, by increasing the stop time of the distribution member 94Y at the right switching point Pr as compared with the stop time of the distribution member 94Y at the left switching point Pl, the second passage 922 can be compared with the first passage 921. The game ball 99 can be easily sorted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left rotation time is determined based on the number of game balls passing through the through gate 319', that is, based on the number of game balls passing through the second passage 922, but only the second passage 922 is used. Instead, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball 99 is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 920 or in the first passage 921, and the ratio of the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is accurately grasped. The left rotation time may be determined above. In this way, the player temporarily launches the game ball 99 into the left area of the game board 31, or stops the launch of the game ball 99 so that the game ball 99 can be launched into the right area of the game board 31. Even when the launch is stopped, the distribution ratio to the second passage 922 can be accurately grasped. As a result, it is possible for the player to take countermeasures against the attack.

<Step S3706>
When the left rotation time is set, the MPU 41 changes the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from right rotation to left rotation (step S3706). The MPU 41 rotates the distribution member 94Y counterclockwise at a rotation speed corresponding to the counterclockwise rotation time determined in step S3705 described above. For example, as the rotation speed, a low speed corresponding to the case where the left rotation time is long, a standard speed corresponding to the case where the left rotation time is the standard time, and a high speed corresponding to the case where the left rotation time is short. Having prepared the speed, the MPU 41 rotates the distribution member 94Y counterclockwise at a rotation speed corresponding to the left rotation time determined in step S3705 described above.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
When the MPU 41 starts the left rotation of the distribution member 94Y, the left rotation flag is set to on (step S3707), the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S3708), and the distribution member control process is performed. finish. Here, the left rotation flag is a flag indicating that the distribution member 94Y is rotated counterclockwise. Further, the synchronization lamp lighting flag is referred to in step S3801 of the synchronization lamp control process described later in order to determine whether or not to turn on the synchronization lamp 923.

<Steps S3709-3711>
When the right rotation flag is set to off (step S3701: No), that is, when the distribution member 94Y is rotating counterclockwise, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the left rotation time set in step S3705 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from the left rotation to the right rotation (step S3709). When the left rotation time has elapsed (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the left rotation flag to off (step S3710), and ends the counting of the left rotation time (step S3711). If the left rotation time has not elapsed (step S3709: No), the MPU 41 ends the distribution member control process.

<Steps S3712 to S3715>
In step S3712, the MPU 41 determines the right rotation time and sets the determined right rotation time. In the present embodiment, the right rotation time is a fixed value and is not determined from multiple stages as in the left rotation time, but it may be selected from multiple stages as described above. When the right rotation time is set, the MPU 41 changes the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y from left rotation to right rotation, and starts the right rotation of the distribution member 94Y (step S3713). Then, when the MPU 41 starts the right rotation of the distribution member 94Y, the right rotation flag is set to ON (step S3714), the synchronization lamp extinguishing flag is set to ON (Step S3715), and the distribution member control is performed. End the process. Here, the clockwise rotation flag is a flag indicating that the distribution member 94Y is rotated clockwise.

[Synchronous lamp control process]
Here, FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in step S3602 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. In the synchronous lamp control process, the lighting and extinguishing of the synchronous lamp 923 are controlled based on the control state of the distribution member 94Y.

<Step S3801>
In the synchronization lamp control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S3801). Here, the synchronization lamp lighting flag is a flag for setting a synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting the synchronization lamp 923, and is set to ON in step S3708 of the above-mentioned distribution member control process. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3802 when the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S3801: Yes), and processes when the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S3801: No). To step S3804.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
When the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S3801: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the synchronization lamp lighting command (step S3802) and sets the synchronization lamp lighting flag to off (step S3803). The synchronization lamp control process is terminated. That is, the MPU 41 sets a synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting the synchronization lamp 923 in the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 when the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y is changed from right rotation to left rotation.

The synchronization lamp lighting command in step S3802 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 turns on the synchronization lamp 923 in step S3507 in the command determination process of FIG. 93. As a result, the player can recognize that the distribution member 94 of the distribution device 92 is rotating counterclockwise by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit in the translucent region 9251. Then, by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is lit in the translucent region 9251, the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage 922 (the timing at which the game ball 99 is likely to enter the second starting port 315). It becomes possible to launch the game ball 99. When confirming the lighting of the synchronization lamp 923 in the translucent region 9251, the player can more easily insert the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 as compared with visually confirming the position of the distribution member 94Y. It becomes possible to enter the ball.

<Steps S3804 to S3806>
When the synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S3801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the synchronization lamp extinguishing flag is set to on (step S3804). Here, the synchronization lamp extinguishing flag is a flag for setting the synchronization lamp extinguishing command for extinguishing the synchronization lamp 923, and is set to be turned on in step S3715 of the above-mentioned distribution member control process. When the synchronization lamp extinguishing flag is set to ON (step S3804: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the synchronization lamp extinguishing command for extinguishing the synchronization lamp 923 in the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S3805). , The synchronization lamp extinguishing flag is set to off (step S3806), and the synchronization lamp control process is terminated.

The synchronous lamp extinguishing command in step S3805 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. As a result, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 is turned off in step S3509 in the command determination process of FIG. 93. As a result, the player can recognize that the distribution member 94Y of the distribution device 92 is rotated clockwise by confirming that the synchronization lamp 923 is turned off in the translucent region 9251.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 94Y of the distribution device 92 is rotated by the drive mechanism 97X by rotating it counterclockwise and clockwise. Therefore, in order for the distribution member 94Y to perform a regular operation, the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 at the timing as compared with the 38th embodiment described above in which the distribution member 94Y is rotated by receiving the game ball 99. It becomes easier to launch the game ball 99.

Further, the synchronization lamp 923 is turned on or off according to the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y controlled by the MPU 41. That is, the synchronization lamp 923 can be turned on or off based on the control of the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y by the MPU 41 without detecting the posture of the distribution member 94Y. Therefore, unlike the case of detecting the posture of the distribution member 94Y, there is no problem such as the synchronization lamp 923 being turned on due to the malfunction of the detection unit, and the manufacturing process is as much as the need for providing the detection unit. It is also advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the distribution member 94Y is rotated counterclockwise at a rotation speed corresponding to the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the distribution member 94Y, the first passage 921 It becomes possible to make the distribution ratio between the second passage 922 and the second passage 922 constant. As a result, the player 99 can be rescued when the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 is low, and when the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 is high, the second passage 922 can be used. In order to distribute the game balls 99, a higher level of skill is required, so that the game playability can be improved.

The technical idea of notifying the player of the rotation direction of the distribution member can also be applied to the case where the distribution member is rotated by an elastic force as in the 39th embodiment described above. In this case, the rotation direction of the distribution member is grasped by a detection means such as an optical sensor for detecting the rotation direction of the distribution member.

<74th Embodiment>
In the 73rd embodiment described above, the distribution member 94Y is rotated by inputting a rotational force from the outside of the distribution member 94Y, and one synchronization lamp 923 is lit and the synchronization lamp 923 is lit based on the rotation control of the distribution member 94Y. The case where the extinguishing is controlled has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is common to the 73rd embodiment described above in that the distribution member is rotated by inputting a rotational force from the outside of the distribution member, but the rotation direction of the distribution member. It is different from the 73rd embodiment described above in that it includes two synchronous lamps that are turned on and off according to the above.

Here, FIG. 122 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the appearance of the sorting device according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 122 (B) is a cross-sectional view showing the internal configuration of the sorting device. As shown in FIGS. 122 (A) and 122 (B), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same distribution member 94Y and two synchronous lamps as in the 73rd embodiment described above. It is equipped with 923L and 923R. The distribution member 94Y is alternately rotated leftward and rightward by a predetermined rotation angle by a rotational force applied from a drive source such as a motor, as in the 73rd embodiment described above. The synchronization lamps 923L and 923R include a left synchronization lamp 923L and a right synchronization lamp 923R. The left synchronization lamp 923L and the right synchronization lamp 923R are light sources such as a light emitting diode.

Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the lighting timing and the extinguishing timing of the synchronization lamp. As shown in FIG. 123, the left synchronization lamp 923L is turned on at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is rotating counterclockwise, and is turned off at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is rotating clockwise. On the other hand, the right synchronization lamp 923R is turned on at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is rotating clockwise, and is turned off at the timing when the distribution member 94Y is rotating counterclockwise. That is, the right synchronization lamp 923R is turned off while the left synchronization lamp 923L is lit, and conversely, the left synchronization lamp 923L is turned off while the right synchronization lamp 923R is lit. The left synchronization lamp 923L and the right synchronization lamp 923R are alternately lit according to the rotation direction of 94Y. To control the lighting and extinguishing of the left synchronization lamp 923L and the right synchronization lamp 923R, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 controls the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R according to the left synchronization lamp lighting command and the right synchronization lamp lighting command set by the MPU 41. It is executed by turning on or off of. The left synchronization lamp lighting command is set when the distribution member 94Y is changed from right rotation to left rotation, and the right synchronization lamp lighting command is set when the distribution member 94Y is changed from left rotation to right rotation. Is set to.

These synchronous lamps 923L and 923R are provided at a portion that does not obstruct the visibility of the distribution member 94Y. In the example shown in FIGS. 122 (A) and 122 (B), it is above the first passage 921 or the second passage 922. The housing 924 of the distribution device 92 is provided with a left lighting mark 925L in the front area of the left synchronization lamp 923L and a right lighting mark 925R in the front area of the right synchronization lamp 923R. The lighting marks 925L and 925R include translucent regions 9251L and 9251R that transmit light and mask regions 9252L and 9252R that have low light transmittance and do not transmit light or hardly transmit light. The translucent regions 9251L and 9251R are colorless transparent or colored transparent portions formed in a star shape, and transmit the light of the synchronous lamps 923L and 923R when the synchronous lamps 923L and 923R are turned on. The outer edges of the mask regions 9252L and 9252R are formed in a circular shape in the peripheral portion of the translucent regions 9251L and 9251R so as to surround the translucent regions 9251L and 9251R. Since the mask regions 9252L and 9252R can make the light transmitted through the translucent regions 9251L and 9251R stand out when the synchronous lamps 923L and 923R are turned on, the housing 924 is formed so that the distribution member 94Y can be visually recognized. Even if this is the case, it is possible to clearly recognize the lighting of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R. The lighting marks 925L and 925R can be redesigned in the same manner as the lighting marks 925 of the 39th embodiment described above.

By the way, in the above-mentioned 39th embodiment, when the distribution member 94Y is in a state where the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, or the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922. The synchronization lamp 923 was turned on when the launch timing of the game ball 99 was reached. However, it is assumed that some players do not understand that the synchronization lamp 923 is the timing at which the game ball 99 is likely to be guided to the second passage 922.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left synchronization lamp 923L lights up at the timing when the distribution member 94Y rotates counterclockwise, while the right synchronization lamp 923R lights up at the timing when the distribution member 94Y rotates clockwise. do. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lighting timings of the synchronous lamps 923L and 923R are synchronized with the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y, and the player can easily understand the significance of the lighting timings of the synchronous lamps 923L and 923R. As a result, in order to search for the launch timing of the game ball 99 in which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, it becomes easy to use the lighting timing of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R as a guide.

[Distribution member control process]
Here, FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member control process executed in step S3601 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. As shown in FIG. 124, the distribution member control process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the distribution member control process of the 72nd embodiment described above. Specifically, when the right rotation flag is set to on (step S3701: Yes), steps S3702 to S3703 are executed in the same manner as in the 73rd embodiment described above, and the right rotation flag is set to off. If this is the case (step S3701: No), steps S3709 to S3714 are executed in the same manner as in the 74th embodiment described above. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y is changed from clockwise rotation to clockwise rotation and the left rotation flag is set to ON (steps S3706 and S3707), a command to turn on the left synchronization lamp 923L. The left synchronization lamp lighting flag for setting is set to on (step S3901). Further, in the present embodiment, when the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y is changed from right rotation to left rotation and the right rotation flag is set to ON (steps S3713 and S3714), a command to turn on the right synchronization lamp 923R. The right synchronization lamp lighting flag for setting is set to on (step S3902).
It differs in that.

[Synchronous lamp control process]
Here, FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the synchronous lamp control process executed in step S3602 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 119. In the synchronization lamp control process, a command for causing the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 to turn on and off the left synchronization lamp 923L and the right synchronization lamp 923R is set.

<Step S4001>
In the synchronization lamp control process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the left synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4001). Here, the left synchronization lamp lighting flag is a flag for setting the left synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting the left synchronization lamp 923L, and is set to ON in step S3901 of the above-mentioned distribution member control process. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4002 when the left synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S4001: Yes), and when the left synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S4001: No). , The process proceeds to step S4004.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
When the left synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the left synchronization lamp lighting command (step S4002) and sets the left synchronization lamp lighting flag to off (step S4003). ), The synchronization lamp control process is terminated. That is, the MPU 41 sets a left synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting the left synchronization lamp 923L in the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 when the distribution member 94Y is changed from the right rotation to the left rotation.

<Steps S4004 to S4006>
When the left synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S4001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the right synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to on (step S4004). Here, the right synchronization lamp lighting flag is a flag for setting the right synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting the right synchronization lamp 923R, and is set to ON in step S3902 of the above-mentioned distribution member control process. When the right synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to ON (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a right synchronization lamp lighting command for lighting the right synchronization lamp 923R in the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S4004: Yes). Step S4005), the right synchronization lamp lighting flag is set to off (step S4006), and the synchronization lamp control process ends.

The left synchronization lamp lighting command set in step S4002 and the left synchronization lamp lighting command set in step S4005 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. NS. As a result, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the left synchronization lamp 923L and the lighting and extinguishing of the right synchronization lamp 923R in the command determination process of FIG. 126, which will be described later. As a result, the player confirms that the left synchronization lamp 923L is lit in the translucent region 9251L and the right synchronization lamp 923R is lit in the translucent region 9251R, so that the distribution member 94Y of the distribution device 92 is on the left. It can recognize whether it is rotating or rotating clockwise. Then, by confirming the lighting of the left synchronization lamp 923L or the right synchronization lamp 923R in the translucent regions 9251L and 9251R, the timing at which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 (the game ball at the second starting port 315). It becomes possible to launch the game ball 99 at a timing (timing when 99 is likely to be entered). When confirming the lighting of the left synchronization lamp 923L or the right synchronization lamp 923R in the translucent regions 9251L and 9251R, the player can more easily confirm the position of the distribution member 94Y in the second position as compared with visually confirming the position of the distribution member 94Y. It is possible to insert the game ball 99 into the starting port 315.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 25. The command determination process of the present embodiment executes the processes of steps S2003 to S2005 when a variation pattern command is received (Yes in steps S2001 and S2002), similarly to the command determination process of the 39th embodiment described above. .. Further, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the left synchronization lamp lighting command set in step S4002 of the synchronization lamp control process is received (step S4101: Yes), the processes of steps S4102 and S4103 are executed to synchronize. When the right synchronization lamp lighting command set in step S4005 of the lamp control process is received (step S4104: Yes), the processes of steps S4105 and S4105 are executed.

<Steps S4101 to S4003>
In step S4101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the left synchronization lamp lighting command set in step S4002 of the synchronization lamp control process has been received. When the MPU 41 receives the left synchronization lamp lighting command (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the left synchronization lamp 923L (step S4102) and turns off the right synchronization lamp 923R (4103). If the MPU 51 has not received the left synchronization lamp lighting command (step S4101: No), the process shifts to step S4104.

<Steps S4104 to S4006>
In step S4104, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the right synchronization lamp lighting command set in step S4005 of the synchronization lamp control process has been received. When the MPU 41 receives the right synchronization lamp lighting command (step S4104: Yes), the MPU 41 turns on the right synchronization lamp 923R (step S4105) while turning off the left synchronization lamp 923L (4106). When the MPU 51 has not received the right synchronization lamp lighting command (step S4104: No), the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command (step S2008), and ends the command determination process.

As described above, the present embodiment has the same effect as the above-mentioned 73rd embodiment based on the common configuration with the above-mentioned 73rd embodiment. That is, as compared with the 39th embodiment described above in which the distribution member 94Y is rotated by receiving the game ball 99 in order to perform a regular operation, the game ball 99 is distributed to the second passage 922 at the timing of the game ball. Since 99 is easy to launch and there is no need to detect the posture of the distribution member 94Y, there is no problem such as the synchronization lamp 923 being turned on due to a malfunction of the detection unit, and there is no need to provide a detection unit. However, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing process and also in terms of manufacturing cost. Then, in the present embodiment, as in the 73rd embodiment described above, the distribution member 94Y is rotated at a rotation speed according to the distribution ratio of the game balls 99 between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the distribution member 94Y. If it is rotated counterclockwise, the distribution ratio between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be made constant. As a result, the player 99 can be rescued when the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 is low, and when the distribution ratio of the game ball 99 to the second passage 922 is high, the second passage 922 can be used. In order to distribute the game balls 99, a higher level of skill is required, so that the game playability can be improved.

Then, in the present embodiment, two synchronization lamps (left synchronization lamp 923L and right synchronization lamp 923R) are provided, and one synchronization lamp (left synchronization lamp 923L) lights up as the distribution member 94Y rotates counterclockwise, and the other The synchronization lamp (right synchronization lamp 923R) lights up as the distribution member 94Y rotates clockwise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lighting timings of the synchronous lamps 923L and 923R are synchronized with the rotation direction of the distribution member 94Y, and the player can easily understand the significance of the lighting timings of the synchronous lamps 923L and 923R. As a result, in order to search for the launch timing of the game ball 99 in which the game ball 99 is easily distributed to the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, it becomes easy to use the lighting timing of the synchronization lamps 923L and 923R as a guide.

The technical idea of notifying the player of the rotation direction of the distribution member with two lighting lamps can also be applied to the case where the distribution member is rotated by an elastic force as in the 39th embodiment described above. In this case, the rotation direction of the distribution member is grasped by a detection means such as an optical sensor for detecting the rotation direction of the distribution member.

<75th to 81st embodiments>
In the 39th embodiment described above, the electric support member 93 rotates to open and close the second starting port 315, and the game balls discharged from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 play a game at the second starting port. The case where the support state in which the ball is guided and the non-support state in which the game ball is not guided to the second starting port can be switched has been described. On the other hand, in the 75th to 81st embodiments, the configuration and operation of the electric support member are different from those in the 39th embodiment described above. However, in the 75th to 81st embodiments, since the configuration of the sorting device is the same as that of the 39th embodiment described above, the same effect as that of the 39th embodiment described above is obtained.

(75th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 127 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a game board including a distribution device, an electric support member, and a second starting port in the present embodiment, and FIG. 127 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. be. 128 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the A10-A10 cutting line of FIG. 127 (A), and FIG. 128 (B) is a view when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 128 (A).

As shown in FIGS. 127 (A) and 127 (B), the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same distribution device 92 as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment and the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. It is provided with a different electric support member 93A.

In the electric support member 93A, the game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 is not guided to the second start port 315, and the game ball 99 enters the second start port 315. A standby position for limiting the balls (see FIG. 128 (A)) and a game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 can be guided to the second starting port 315. 2 It can be moved in the front-rear direction by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between the operating position (see FIG. 128 (B)) that allows the game ball 99 to enter the starting port 315. The electric support member 93A includes a left guide portion 931A, a right guide portion 932A, and a through hole 933A. The left guidance portion 931A is a portion that guides the game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 921 of the distribution device 92 to the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the right toward the second starting port 315. .. The right guidance portion 932A is a portion that guides the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 to the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second starting port 315. .. The through hole 933A is provided between the left guide portion 931A and the right guide portion 932A, and lowers the game ball 99 guided from the left guide portion 931A and the right guide portion 932A when the electric support member 93A is in the operating position. It is a part where the ball enters the second starting port 315 by dropping the ball into the second starting port 315.

As shown in FIG. 128 (A), the electric support member 93A does not protrude from the game board 31 when it is in the standby position, and the game balls 99 discharged from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 are It is not guided to the second starting port 315 by the electric support member 93A. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), the electric support member 93A protrudes from the game board 31 when it is in the operating position, and the game is released from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922. The ball 99 is guided to the through hole 933A by the left guide portion 931A and the right guide portion 932A of the electric support member 93A, and enters the second starting port 315 by the through hole 933A.

(76th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 129 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the game board including the distribution device, the electric support member, and the second starting port in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129 (A), the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same distribution device 92 as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment and the above-mentioned 39th gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The electric support member 93B different from the embodiment is provided. The present embodiment is also different from the 39th embodiment described above in that the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922.

The electric support member 93B has a plate shape slightly inclined to the left, and can move along the game board 31 along the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 93B. Specifically, the electric support member 93B is in a standby position (the solid line in FIG. 129 (A)) for opening the second starting port 315 directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315. Position) and the operating position (position of the virtual line in FIG. 129 (B)) for opening the second starting port 315 to the left of this standby position. That is, the electric support member 93B has a standby position for closing the second starting port 315 (the position of the solid line in FIG. 129 (A)) and an operating position for opening the second starting port 315 (FIG. 129 (B)). It is possible to operate with (the position of the virtual line).

When the electric support member 93B is located at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. 129 (A), that is, when the electric support member 93B is located directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315. The electric support member 93B closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93B is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93B and discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93B is located at the operating position shown by the virtual line in FIG. 129 (A), that is, when the electric support member 93B is located on the left side of the second starting port 315, the electric support member 93B is the first. 2 The starting port 315 is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

(77th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 129 (B) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board including the electric support member in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 129 (B), the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the same distribution device 92 as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment and the electric support member 93C different from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. To be equipped. Although not clearly described in the drawings, also in the present embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922 as in the 76th embodiment described above.

The electric support member 93C has a plate shape slightly inclined downward to the left, and when a rotational force is input to the rotating shaft 931C from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 93C is viewed in plan view as shown in FIG. 129. (B) is rotated in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. Since the electric support member 93C is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

Further, the electric support member 93C is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling a drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the second start is directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second start port 315. A standby position for closing the port 315 (the position of the solid line in FIG. 129 (B)) and an operating position for opening the second start port 315 by protruding forward at a position adjacent to the right side of the second start port 315 (FIG. 129 (FIG. 129). B) It is possible to move to and from the position of the virtual line). That is, the electric support member 93C can operate between the standby position in which the second starting port 315 is closed and the operating position in which the second starting port 315 is opened.

When the electric support member 93C is located at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. 129 (B), that is, when the electric support member 93C is located directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315. The electric support member 93C closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93C is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93C and discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93C is located at the operating position shown by the virtual line in FIG. 129 (B), that is, when the electric support member 93C projects forward at the position adjacent to the right side of the second starting port 315, the electric support member The 93C opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

The electric support member 93C may be arranged horizontally without being tilted with respect to the horizontal plane and may be configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove inclined downward to the left may be provided on the surface of the electric support member 93C to promote the movement of the game ball 99 toward the second starting port 315.

(78th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of a game board including a distribution device, an electric support member, and a second starting port in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 130, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the same distribution device 92 as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment and an electric support member 93D different from the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. In this embodiment as well, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922, as in the 76th embodiment described above.

The electric support member 93D rotates in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction of FIG. 130 in a vertical plane along the game board 31 by inputting a rotational force to the rotating shaft 931D from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Will be done. Further, the electric support member 93D is rotated in a vertical plane by controlling a drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is in a standby position (immediately below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315). It is possible to move between the position of the solid line in FIG. 130) and the operating position (the position of the virtual line in FIG. 130) that stands up on the right side of the 32nd starting port 315. That is, the electric support member 93D has a standby position for closing the second starting port 315 (the position of the solid line in FIG. 130) and an operation of standing up on the right side of the second starting port 315 to open the second starting port 315. It can operate with and from the position (the position of the virtual line in FIG. 130). The electric support member 93D is in a state of being slightly inclined downward to the left at the standby position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left in the electric support member 93D. However, the electric support member 93D may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove that inclines downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 93D, and the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99 is provided. You may promote the move to.

When the electric support member 93D is located at the standby position shown by the solid line in FIG. 130, that is, when the electric support member 93D is located directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315, the electric support member The 93D closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93D is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93D and discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93D is located at the standby position shown by the virtual line in FIG. 130, that is, when the electric support member 93D stands up on the right side of the second starting port 315, the electric support member 93D has the second starting port 315. It is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

(79th Embodiment)
Here, FIGS. 131 (A) and 131 (B) are views showing an example of a main part of the game board including the electric support member and the second starting port in the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 131 (A) and 131 (B), the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same distribution device 92 as the 39th embodiment described above and the 39th embodiment described above. It is provided with a different electric support member 93E. Although not clearly described in the drawings, also in the present embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922 as in the 76th embodiment described above.

The electric support member 93E is an elliptical plate material in a plan view, and is arranged in a slightly downwardly inclined state. The electric support member 93E has an elliptical through hole 931E, a closing portion 932E, and a rotating shaft 933E. The short diameter of the through hole 931E is larger than the diameter of the game ball 99, and the game ball 99 can pass through the through hole 931E.

In the electric support member 93E, when a rotational force is input to the rotating shaft 362W from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 93E intersects the game board 31 in the direction (in a substantially horizontal plane), FIG. 131. It is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction shown in (A) and 131 (B). Further, the electric support member 93E is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the drive means (not shown) by the MPU 41, the closing portion 932E is located directly above the second starting port 315, and the closing portion 932E causes the second starting port. A standby position for closing the 315 (see FIG. 131 (A)) and an operating position where the through hole 931E is located directly above the second starting port 315 to open the second starting port 315 (see FIG. 131 (B)). It is possible to move between. That is, the electric support member 93E can operate between the standby position for closing the second starting port 315 and the operating position for opening the second starting port 315.

The shapes of the electric support member 93E and the through hole 931E are not limited to the elliptical shape, and may be other shapes such as a circular shape, an oval shape, and an oblong shape. Further, the electric support member 93E may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove inclined downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 93E, and the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99 is provided. You may promote the move to.

When the electric support member 93E is in the standby position shown in FIG. 131 (A), that is, when the closing portion 932E of the electric support member 93E is located above the second starting port 315, the electric support member 93E is moved by the closing portion 932E. The second starting port 315 is closed, and the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315 is restricted. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93E is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93E and discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93E is located at the operating position shown in FIG. 131 (B), that is, the through hole 931E of the electric support member 93E is directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and directly above the second starting port 315. When positioned, the electric support member 93E opens the second starting port 315 through the through hole 931E to allow the game ball 99 to enter. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

(80th Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 132 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the game board including the electric support member and the second starting port in the present embodiment, and FIG. 132 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. .. As shown in FIGS. 132 (A) and 132 (B), the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same distribution device 92 as the 39th embodiment described above and the 39th embodiment described above. It is provided with a different electric support member 93F. Also in this embodiment, the second starting port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 922.

The electric support member 93F has a penetrating portion 931F and is arranged in a slightly downwardly inclined state. The electric support member 93F can be rotated about a rotation axis extending along a substantially horizontal direction slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41. Further, the electric support member 93F is rotated by controlling a driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the penetrating portion 931F penetrates in the front-rear direction to close the second starting port 315 (FIG. 132). (See (C)) and the operating position (see FIG. 132 (A)) in which the penetrating portion 931F penetrates in the vertical direction directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 to open the second starting port 315. It is possible to move with.

When the electric support member 93F is located at the standby position shown in FIG. 132 (C), the electric support member 93F closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 does not enter the second starting port 315, and the electric support member 93F is inclined downward to the left, so that the electric support is provided. It is guided to the left side of the second starting port 315 by the member 93F and discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, when the electric support member 93F is located at the operating position shown in FIG. 132A, the electric support member 93F opens the second starting port 315 to allow the game ball 99 to enter the ball. Therefore, the game ball 99 discharged from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 enters the second starting port 315.

The penetrating portion 931F of the electric support member 93F may have a shape in which a part of the penetrating portion 931F is open not only vertically but also laterally.

(81st Embodiment)
Here, FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of a main part of the game board including the distribution device, the electric support member, and the second starting port in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 133, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same distribution device 92 as the above-mentioned 39th embodiment and an electric support member different from the electric support member 93 of the above-mentioned 39th embodiment. It is provided with an electric accessory device 93G having (left and right wing members 932G, 933G).

The electric accessory device 93G is configured as a so-called electric tulip, and is provided in a region directly below the distribution device 35. The electric accessory device 93G has a housing 931G fixed to the game board 31 and rotatable left and right wing members 932G and 933G.

The housing 931G has an upper opening 934G that allows rotation of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G and entry of the game ball 99. The upper opening 934G is a portion for introducing the game ball 99 inside the electric accessory device 93G, and is a region directly below between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 (directly below the introduction port 920). Area). That is, the game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 934G. Further, a second starting port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 934G.

The left and right wing members 932G and 933G can be rotated by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31, and the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G are brought close to each other by the driving means. A state in which the second starting port 315 is closed (see FIG. 133 (A)) and a state in which the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G are separated to open the second starting port 315 (see FIG. 133 (B)). Is switched. The left and right wing members 932G and 933G are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 93 of the first embodiment described above. That is, in the ordinary electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) causes the left and right wing members 932G and 933G of the present embodiment to open. Correspondingly, the return of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to the closure of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G of the present embodiment.

When the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G shown in FIG. 133 (A) are close to each other, the game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 collides with the side surface of the left wing member 932G, and the inside of the electric accessory device 93G. The game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 922 collides with the side surface of the right wing member 933G and cannot enter the inside of the electric accessory device 93G. That is, when the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G are close to each other, the ball entering the second starting port 315 of the game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is the left and right wing members 932G. Inhibited by 933G. At this time, the game ball 99 that collides with the side surfaces of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G passes by the side of the electric accessory device 93G and is discharged from the out port 317.

On the other hand, in a state where the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G shown in FIG. 133 (B) are separated from each other, the game ball 99 discharged from the first passage 921 of the distribution device 92 is picked up by the left wing member 932G. The game ball 99, which enters the inside of the electric accessory device 93G and is discharged from the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92, is picked up by the right wing member 933G and enters the inside of the electric accessory device 93G. As a result, the electric accessory device 93G is either a game ball 99 that has passed through the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 of the distribution device 92 when the tips of the left and right wing members 932G and 933G are separated from each other. The thigh is entered into the second starting port 315.

<Embodiments 82 and 83>
In the 39th embodiment described above, the distribution device 92 including the distribution member 94 that rotates by rotating in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction upon receiving the game ball 99 has been described. On the other hand, in the distribution device of the 82nd and 83rd embodiments, the game ball is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the interference of the game ball as the distribution unit, so that the game ball is moved to the first passage or the first passage. It differs from the 39th embodiment described above in that it includes a rotating body that distributes to any of the two passages.

As shown in FIG. 134 (A), in the distribution device 92 of the game machine 10 according to the 82nd embodiment, the distribution unit has a columnar shape in which the distribution unit can freely rotate in both the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. It is configured as a roller 94D (rotating body). The roller 94D is arranged directly below the introduction port 920 of the distribution device 92.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 83rd embodiment, the distribution unit is a wind turbine in which the distribution unit can freely rotate in both the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. It is configured as 94E. The wind turbine 94E is arranged directly below the introduction port 920 of the distribution device 92. The wind turbine 94E is a rotating body 941E fixed by a nail 942E (fixed portion) so as to be freely rotatable. The end of the nail 942E is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the nail 942E is made of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since the nail 942E of the wind turbine 94E can be plastically changed, the nail 942E is set to the initial setting position when the position of the nail 942E deviates from the initial setting position and the position of the rotating body 941E deviates from the initial setting position. It becomes possible to return to. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 942E.

Further, since the distribution device 92 of the 82nd and 83rd embodiments has the roller 94D and the rotating body 941E of the windmill 94E that freely rotate in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction due to the interference of the game balls 99. The ratio of the game ball 99 distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, when the special figure game state is mode B or mode E, the game ball 99 is distributed to either the first passage 921 or the second passage 922, that is, the game ball 99 supports the electric support member 93. Since the game can be enjoyed while being happy and worried about whether or not to receive the ball and enter the second starting port 315, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, when the distribution unit is a freely rotatable one such as a roller 94D or a wind turbine 94E, the player tends to distribute the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the rotating body as the distribution unit (game). It is also possible to read (individual differences between machines). As a result, the player can find a firing stroke in which the gaming ball is easily distributed to the second passage 922 by adjusting the firing intensity (launching stroke) of the gaming ball by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. Because it is possible, it is fun to search for a launch strength that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed to the second passage 922, or to search for a game machine 10 that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed from the plurality of game machines 10 to the second passage 922. Will be able to be obtained.

The configuration of the rotating body as the distribution unit is not limited to the cylindrical roller 94D shown in FIG. 134 (A) and the rotating body 941E of the wind turbine 94E shown in FIG. 134 (B), and the design can be changed. For example, the rotating body has a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular column or a square column, a flat cross-section member such as an elliptical column member or a flat plate member, a rotating body having irregularities on the outer peripheral surface such as a gear, and a plurality of wings. It may be a propeller-shaped member or the like.

Further, the rotating body such as the columnar roller 94D and the rotating body 941E of the windmill 94E may be configured to be rotatable in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by a driving means such as a solenoid connected to the rotating body. .. In this case, it is conceivable that the rotational drive of the rotating body alternately switches between the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction at regular intervals (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 2 seconds). Of course, the rotating body does not necessarily have to switch the rotation direction at regular time intervals, and may switch the rotation direction at irregular patterned time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the rotation direction of the rotating body so that the game ball 99 is distributed between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 with a theoretical value of 1: 1. The rotation direction of the rotating body may be switched so that the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball with the 922 is other than 1: 1. In this case, the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 may be changed according to the game state. For example, the mode E can be configured to drive the rotating body so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 922 than the mode B, and vice versa. Further, a ball entry sensor is provided near the introduction port 920 of the distribution device 92, and when the entry sensor detects the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 920, the direction is opposite to the previous rotation direction. It is also conceivable to rotate the rotating body.

<Embodiments 84 and 85>
In the distribution device of the 84th and 85th embodiments, the game ball 99 is moved to the first passage 921 or the second passage 922 by the immovable and non-rotatable distribution portion (fixed distribution portion) regardless of rotation or rotation. It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is distributed to any of the above.

As shown in FIG. 134 (C), the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 84th embodiment has a top 941F directly below the introduction port 920 and distributes as a symmetrical mountain-shaped fixed portion 94F. The part is formed. In the mountain-shaped fixing portion 94F, the game ball 99 that interferes with the top 941F or its vicinity is distributed to the left and right, so that the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), in the distribution device 92 of the gaming machine 10 according to the 85th embodiment, the apex nail 941G (fixed portion) is located directly below the introduction port 920, and is a symmetrical triangle. A distribution portion composed of nails 94G is formed. In this triangular nail 94G, the game ball 99 that interferes with the apex nail 941G is distributed to the left and right, so that the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922. Each end of the triangular nail 38F is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the triangular nail 94G is made of metal, for example, and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 94G can be plastically changed, the triangular nail 94G can be returned to the initial setting position when the position of the triangular nail 94G deviates from the initial setting position. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the triangular nail 94G.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the 84th and 85th embodiments, since the distribution portion is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution portion such as a mountain-shaped fixed portion 94F or a triangular nail 94G, the gaming ball 99 is the first. The ratio of the 1st passage 921 and the 2nd passage 922 can be temporarily and accidentally biased. As a result, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the 82nd embodiment and the 83rd embodiment described above, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode E, the gaming ball 99 becomes the first passage 921 and the first passage 921. Since it is possible to enjoy the game while being confused about whether or not the game ball 99 is distributed to any of the two passages 922, that is, whether or not the game ball 99 enters the second starting port 315 with the support of the electric support member 93. Can be improved. Further, when the distribution portion is an immovable and non-rotatable fixed distribution portion such as a mountain-shaped fixed portion 94F or a triangular nail 94G, the player distributes the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 by the fixed distribution portion. It is also possible to read the tendency of (individual difference between gaming machines). As a result, the player can find a firing stroke in which the gaming ball is easily distributed to the second passage 922 by adjusting the firing intensity (launching stroke) of the gaming ball by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. Because it is possible, it is fun to search for a launch strength that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed to the second passage 922, or to search for a game machine 10 that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed from the plurality of game machines 10 to the second passage 922. Will be able to be obtained.

The configuration of the distribution portion for distributing the game ball 99 to the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing portion 94F shown in FIG. 134 (C) and the triangular nail 94G shown in FIG. 134 (D). The design can be changed. For example, the distribution portion may have another symmetrical shape such as a dome-shaped mountain portion, and four or more nails such as a square nail (diamond nail) whose apex nail is located directly below the introduction port 920. It may consist of a nail or a single nail. Of course, by making the shape asymmetrical to the left and right, the distribution ratio of the game balls between the first passage 921 and the second passage 922 may be biased.

Further, in the above, when the distribution member is rotated by the elastic force, an example of rotating the distribution member by using the rotational force of a motor or the like has been described. For example, a support extending from the rotation axis of the distribution member has been described. By forming a weight portion at the tip portion of the portion, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the pendulum movement is performed when the game balls 99 are distributed.

[Outline of Invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In addition, in order to understand the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, the description may be given by adding a reference numeral or the like for convenience, but the invention relating to the appendix is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numeral. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
The first direction (counterclockwise direction) centered on the introduction port (920), the first passage (921), the second passage (922), and the rotation axis (941), and the first direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution unit (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the distribution unit (94, etc.). Alternatively, a distribution device (92) for distributing to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the distribution unit (94 or the like) can be rotated in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by rotating in the first direction.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when the distribution unit rotates in the first direction by distributing the game ball to the first passage by the distribution unit, a rotational force for rotating the distribution unit in the second direction is generated. .. Therefore, since the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction when it is rotated in the first direction, it may be possible to distribute the game ball to the second passage, so that the player distributes the game ball. It is possible to distribute more game balls to the second passage by launching the game balls at the timing when the unit distributes the game balls to the second passage. As a result, it is not just unlucky, but the distribution ratio of the game ball to the second passage depending on the skill level of the player, which is whether the game ball can be launched at the launch timing of the game ball which is easy to be distributed to the second passage. Will fluctuate, which will improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix A2]
The appendix A1 is characterized in that the distribution unit (94 or the like) is rotatable in the first direction by a rotational force in the first direction obtained by rotating in the second direction. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction by the elastic force generated by being rotated in the first direction, and then is rotated in the second direction to obtain the first direction. It is rotated in the first direction by the rotational force to. That is, the distribution unit is rotated by repeating the rotation in the second direction and the rotation in the first direction, triggered by the rotation of the game ball in the first passage in the first direction. .. Therefore, when the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction due to the distribution of the game ball to the first passage, the distribution unit can be repeatedly rotated with this as an opportunity. As a result, the player can obtain the timing of distributing the game ball to the second passage a plurality of times by distributing the game ball to the first passage once, so that even a player with low skill can be assigned to the distribution unit. On the other hand, it becomes easy to launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the second passage.

Further, the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction triggered by the rotation of the distribution unit in the second direction, so that the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction again after the rotation in the first direction. NS. Therefore, even after the game balls are distributed to the second aisle, the distribution unit may be in a state of distributing the game balls to the second aisle. Therefore, the rotation operation of the distribution unit triggered by the distribution of the game balls to the second aisle. In the above, by launching the game ball at an appropriate timing by a stop hit or the like, it is possible to continuously distribute the game ball to the second passage. This also improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, wherein the distribution unit (94 or the like) can rotate in the second direction by an elastic force obtained by rotating in the first direction.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2, wherein the distribution unit (94 or the like) is rotatable in the first direction by an elastic force obtained by rotating in the second direction.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A3 and A4, the distribution portion can be rotated in the first direction by the simple principle of utilizing the elastic force, and thus can be rotated in the second direction. Therefore, it has a simple configuration. Will be feasible.

[Appendix A5]
The distribution unit (94) is a load generation unit (944,944A, 944E, 944F, 944P1,944Q1,944Q2) that generates an elastic force for rotating in the second direction by being rotated in the first direction. , 9442I, 9443I, 9452V, 9462V).

The gaming machine according to Appendix A5 can provide a situation in which a gaming ball can be distributed to the second passage by the distribution unit by a simple configuration in which a load generating unit that generates an elastic force is provided in the distribution unit.

[Appendix A6]
The load generating portion (944, etc.) exerts an elastic force for rotating the distributing portion (94, etc.) in the first direction by rotating the distributing portion (94, etc.) in the second direction. The gaming machine according to Appendix A5, characterized in that it occurs.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, a load generating portion that generates an elastic force is provided in the distribution portion. It is possible to obtain the timing of distributing the above multiple times.

[Appendix A7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A5 or Appendix A6, wherein the load generating portion (944 or the like) is provided so as to project from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, since the load generating portion is projected on the rotation shaft, the rotation cycle of the distribution portion can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the launch timing of the game ball, which is expected to be distributed to the second passage, and the timing when the game ball is actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A7, wherein the load generating portion (944 or the like) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, when the load generating unit is operated by a malicious player, the distribution unit is in a posture in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage, that is, a so-called goto action is performed. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A5 to Supplementary A8, wherein the load generating portion (944 or the like) includes a leaf spring.

[Appendix A10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A9, wherein the leaf spring (944 or the like) extends from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A11]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A5 to Supplementary A8, wherein the load generating unit (9442I, 9443I) includes a compression coil spring.

[Appendix A12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A11, wherein the compression coil springs (9442I, 9443I) are fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A13]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A5 to Supplementary A8, wherein the load generating portion includes a torsion coil spring.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, wherein the torsion coil spring is fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A15]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A5 to Supplementary A8, wherein the load generating portion (9452V, 9462V) includes a spiral spring.

[Appendix A16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15, wherein the spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) are wound along a peripheral surface of the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix A17]
The spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) have a first spiral spring (9452V) whose one end is fixed to the rotary shaft (941) and wound in the first direction, and one end thereof is the rotary shaft (941). The gaming machine according to Appendix A16, comprising: a second spiral spring (9462V) fixed to and wound in the second direction.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A9 to A17, the distribution portion is rotated in the first direction by a simple configuration using the elastic force of a known spring such as a leaf spring, a compression coil spring, a torsion coil spring, and a spiral spring. The distribution unit can be rotated in the second direction, and the distribution unit can be rotated in the first direction by rotating the distribution unit in the second direction.

[Appendix A18]
The sorting device (92) interferes with the load generating section (944 or the like) when the sorting section (94 or the like) is rotated in the first direction or the second direction, and the sorting section (94 or the like) 94) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A5 to Supplementary A17, further comprising a rotation regulating means (945 or the like) for restricting rotation in the first direction or the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, since the rotation of the distribution unit is regulated by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to prevent the distribution unit from rotating more than necessary. Further, since the load generating portion can be elastically deformed when the rotation of the distribution portion is regulated by the rotation regulating means, the load generating portion has a simple configuration in which the rotation of the load generating portion is regulated by the rotation regulating portion. Elastic force can be generated appropriately. In addition, by restricting the rotation of the distribution unit by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to make the maximum rotation angle of the distribution unit uniform, so that the rotation cycle of the distribution unit should be stabilized. Becomes possible. As a result, the player can easily launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A18, wherein the rotation regulating means (945 or the like) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19, by operating the rotation control unit by a malicious player, it is possible to prevent the distribution unit from performing a goto action in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage. ..

[Appendix A20]
A load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) that rotates the distribution unit (94, etc.) in the second direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A19, further comprising.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A19 is provided with a load acting unit that generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution unit in the second direction by rotating the distribution unit in the first direction. A configuration in which such a load acting portion is provided can be easily realized.

[Appendix A21]
The load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) rotates the distribution unit (94) in the first direction by an elastic force generated by rotating the distribution unit (94) in the second direction. The gaming machine according to Appendix A20, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A21, since the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction, an elastic force for rotating the distribution unit in the first direction is generated in the load acting unit, so that the distribution unit is the first. It is rotated by repeating the rotation in the second direction and the rotation in the first direction, triggered by the rotation of the game ball in the first direction by the distribution of the game ball to the passage. Further, since the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction triggered by the rotation in the second direction, the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction again after the rotation in the first direction. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the appendix A21 also has the same effect as the gaming machine according to the appendix A2.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A21, wherein the load acting portion (961J, 962J, etc.) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, when the load acting unit is operated by a malicious player, the distribution unit is in a posture in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage, that is, a so-called goto action is performed. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A20 to Appendix A22, wherein the load acting portion includes a leaf spring (9611O, 9612O, etc.).

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A20 to Appendix A22, wherein the load acting portion includes a compression coil spring (961J, 962J, etc.).

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A20 to Appendix A22, wherein the load acting portion includes a torsion coil spring (961N, 962N).

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A20 to Appendix A22, wherein the load acting portion includes a spiral spring (946W, 947W).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A23 to the appendix A26, the distribution portion is rotated in the first direction by a simple configuration using the elastic force of a known spring such as a leaf spring, a compression coil spring, a torsion coil spring, and a spiral spring. The distribution unit can be rotated in the second direction, and the distribution unit can be rotated in the first direction by rotating the distribution unit in the second direction.

[Appendix A27]
The game according to any one of Supplementary A20 to Appendix A26, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) further has a load input unit (940J, etc.) that interferes with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.). Machine.

[Appendix A28]
The load input unit (940J, etc.) is characterized in that it is elastically deformed by interference with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution unit (94J, etc.). The gaming machine according to Appendix A27.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary A27 and Appendix A28, the load acting unit interferes with the load input unit, so that the elastic force generated in the load acting unit is input from the load input unit in order to rotate the distribution unit. At this time, the load input portion is elastically deformed, so that an elastic force for rotating the distribution portion is generated in the load input portion. Since the impact at the time of interference can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of both the load acting part and the load generating part, the life of the load acting part and the load generating part can be improved. In addition, the elastic force generated by the elastic deformation at the time of interference between the load acting portion and the load generating portion can be used for the rotation of the distribution portion. In addition, since the distribution member distributes the game ball to the first aisle during the opening time at the game hall, the game is played in the second aisle as compared with the case where the game ball is passed through the first aisle, for example. When it is advantageous for the player to pass the ball, it is possible to take measures against so-called morning, which is a state advantageous for the player when the game hall is opened.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A27 or Appendix A28, wherein the load input unit (940J or the like) is provided so as to project from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29, since the load input portion is projected on the rotation shaft, the rotation cycle of the distribution portion can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the launch timing of the game ball, which is expected to be distributed to the second passage, and the timing when the game ball is actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix A30]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A29, wherein the load input unit (940J or the like) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30, when the load input unit is operated by a malicious player, the distribution unit is in a posture in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage, that is, a so-called goto action is performed. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A31]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A27, wherein the load input unit (944T) has a cam surface (9441T, 9442T) on which the load acting unit (961O, 961U) slides.

[Appendix A32]
The distribution unit (94) is any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A31, characterized in that the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) can be distributed to the first passage (921) in a stationary state. The gaming machine described in.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32, when the distribution unit is in a stationary state, the distribution unit is in a posture of distributing the game ball to the first passage. Therefore, when the distribution unit is in a stationary state, the distribution device is used. When the game ball is introduced into the first passage, the game ball is distributed to the first passage by the rotation of the distribution unit. Therefore, when the game ball introduced into the distribution device is received by the distribution unit, it is possible to suppress the maintenance of the stationary state of the distribution unit and prevent the game ball from being clogged in the distribution device.

[Appendix A33]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A32, wherein the distribution portion (94) has an eccentric portion (943) that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed to the first passage (921) in the stationary state.

[Appendix A34]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A33, wherein the eccentric portion (943) is integrated with the rotating shaft (941) via a support portion (946) extending from the rotating shaft (941). ..

[Appendix A35]
The distribution unit (94) is connected to a first guide unit (942L) that guides a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) to the first passage (921) and a first guidance unit (942L). It further has a second guide portion (942R) that is arranged line-symmetrically with respect to the other and guides the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) to the second passage (922).
In the stationary state, the axis of symmetry between the first guide portion (942L) and the second guide portion (942R) is inclined toward the first passage (921) with respect to the vertical axis. The gaming machine according to Appendix A33 or Appendix A34.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A33 to A35, a simple configuration in which an eccentric portion is provided in the sorting portion can effectively prevent ball clogging in the sorting device and can take measures against morning.

[Appendix A36]
Further equipped with a launch control means (41) capable of launching a game ball at a predetermined interval (Th),
When the distribution unit (94) starts from the first switching point (P1) that switches the rotation direction from the first direction to the second direction, the distribution unit (94) changes the rotation direction from the second direction to the first direction. The unit rotation cycle (Ts) until the first switching point (P1) is reached again via the second switching point (P2) to be switched is a positive integer multiple or substantially positive of the predetermined interval (Th). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A35, which is an integral multiple (for example, a range of ± 15% of a positive integer multiple of the rotation cycle).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A36, the gaming balls are distributed to the second passage because the unit rotation cycle (Ts) is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval (predetermined interval (Th)) of the gaming balls or a value close to it. It becomes easy to link the state in which it is easy to be struck (the state in which it can be sorted) and the launch timing of the game ball. In addition, if the launch timing of the game ball and the timing of distribution to the second passage of the distribution device can be matched, the game ball can be distributed to the second passage with a high probability by performing a stop after that. Is also possible. For example, after matching the launch timing of the game ball with the timing of distribution to the second passage of the sorting device, by repeating the launch of one ball and the stop of one ball, the game is played in the second passage with high probability. It is also possible to allow the balls to be sorted. When a plurality of launch intervals of the game ball are set by the launch control means, the unit rotation cycle is set to a positive integer multiple of the shortest launch interval among the plurality of launch intervals or a value close to it. ..

[Appendix A37]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36, wherein the unit rotation cycle (Ts) is in the range of ± 15%, which is a positive integer multiple of the predetermined interval (Th).

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36, wherein the unit rotation cycle (Ts) is 1.6 to 2.4 times the predetermined interval (Th).

In the gaming machines according to Appendix A37 and Appendix A38, even if the unit rotation cycle (Ts) deviates from a positive integer multiple of the firing interval (Th) of the gaming ball, the deviation is within a predetermined range. For example, the same effect as that of the gaming machine according to Appendix A36 can be obtained.

[Appendix A39]
A position indicating unit (923) indicating to the player that the distribution unit (94) is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage (922).
An instruction state that controls the position indicating unit (923) and indicates to the player that the distribution unit (94) is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage (922), and the instruction state. Is a position indicator control means (51) that controls switching between different non-instruction states, and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A38.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A39, the position indicating unit is controlled by the position indicating unit controlling means, so that the player is notified that the distribution unit is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball with the indicated state of the position indicating unit as a guide. As a result, it is easier for the player to find out the launch timing of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage, as compared with the case where the game ball is launched while visually checking the rotation direction and posture of the distribution portion. Therefore, even a player with a low skill can easily launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix A40]
The position indicating unit (923) is set to the indicated state by being lit when the distribution unit (94) is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage (922). 923) The gaming machine according to Appendix A39.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40, since the position indicating unit is put into the indicated state and the non-instructed state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, the position indicating unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix A41]
The game according to Appendix A40, wherein the sorting device (92) further includes a visual recognition assisting unit (925) for facilitating the distinction between the lighting state and the extinguishing state of the light emitting unit (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41, if the position indicating unit has a light emitting unit, there is a concern that it may be difficult to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting unit due to the lighting of lamps other than the position indicating unit. By providing the unit, it becomes easier to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting unit, and the above concern is eliminated.

[Appendix A42]
The sorting device (92) further includes a position detecting means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting unit (94).
The position indicating unit control means (51) controls switching between the indicated state and the non-instructed state of the position indicating unit (923) based on the detection result of the position detecting means (95). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A39 to Supplementary A41.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42, since the indicated state and the non-instructed state of the position indicating unit are switched based on the detection result by the position detecting means, the instruction that appropriately reflects the rotation position (posture) of the distribution unit. A state and a non-instructed state can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the distribution unit is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A39 to Appendix A42, wherein the position indicating unit (923) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A43, since the position indicating unit is provided in the distribution device, the player can grasp the timing at which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage without diverting the line of sight from the distribution device. Therefore, the player confirms the distribution device and measures the launch timing of the game ball, and greatly moves the line of sight as to whether the game ball introduced in the distribution device is distributed to the first passage or the second passage. You can check it without letting it. As a result, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the launch timing of the game ball by the player and the distribution result for the launch of the game ball at that timing while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix A44]
A launch instruction unit (923) indicating the launch timing of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage (922), and
The launch instruction unit (923) is controlled to control switching between an instruction state indicating that the launch timing is such that the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage (922) and a non-instruction state different from the instruction state. Launch instruction unit control means (51)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A39 to Supplementary A43.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A44, the launching instruction unit is controlled by the launching instruction unit control means, so that the player is informed that the distribution unit can distribute the game ball to the second passage. Be notified. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the instruction state of the launch instruction unit as a guide. As a result, it is easier for the player to find the launch timing of the game ball in which the game ball is easily guided to the second passage, as compared with the case where the game ball is launched while visually checking the rotation direction and posture of the distribution portion. Therefore, even a player with a low skill can easily launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix A45]
The launch instruction unit (923) has a light emitting unit (923) that is turned on when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage (922) at the launch timing. The gaming machine according to Appendix A44, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A45, since the launch instruction unit is set to the instructed state and the non-instructed state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, the launch instruction unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix A46]
The game according to Appendix A45, wherein the sorting device (92) further includes a visual recognition assisting unit (925) for facilitating the distinction between the lighting state and the extinguishing state of the light emitting unit (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A46, if the launch instruction unit has a light emitting unit, there is a concern that it may be difficult to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting unit due to the lighting of lamps other than the firing instruction unit. By providing the unit, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting unit, so that the above concern is eliminated.

[Appendix A47]
The sorting device (92) further includes a position detecting means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting unit (94).
The launch instruction unit control means (51) controls switching between the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the position instruction unit (923) based on the detection result of the position detection means (95). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions A44 to A46.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A47, the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the launch instruction unit are switched based on the detection result by the position detection means, so that the instruction appropriately reflects the rotation position (posture) of the distribution unit. A state and a non-instructed state can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the distribution unit is the launch timing of the game ball capable of distributing the game ball to the second passage.

[Appendix A48]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A44 to Appendix A47, wherein the launch instruction unit (923) is provided in the distribution device (92).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A48, since the launch instruction unit is provided in the distribution device, the player can grasp the launch timing at which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage without diverting the line of sight from the distribution device. .. Therefore, the player confirms the distribution device and measures the launch timing of the game ball, and greatly moves the line of sight as to whether the game ball introduced in the distribution device is distributed to the first passage or the second passage. You can check it without letting it. As a result, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the launch timing of the game ball by the player and the distribution result for the launch of the game ball at that timing while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix A49]
A direction indicating unit (923, 923L, 923R) indicating the rotation direction of the distribution unit (94), and
An instruction state that controls the direction instruction unit (923, 923L, 923R) and indicates that the distribution unit (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction, and the instruction state. A direction indicator control means (51) that controls switching to a non-instruction state different from the above, and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A48.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A49, the rotation direction of the distribution unit is notified to the player by controlling the direction instruction unit by the direction instruction unit control means. Therefore, it is possible to launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage, using the instruction state of the direction indicating unit as a guide. As a result, it is easier for the player to find the launch timing of the game ball in which the game ball is easily guided to the second passage, as compared with the case where the game ball is launched while visually checking the rotation direction and posture of the distribution portion. Therefore, even a player with a low skill can easily launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix A50]
The direction indicating unit (923, 923L, 923R) is set to the instruction state by being turned on when the distribution unit (94) is in the state of rotating in the first direction or the second direction. The gaming machine according to Appendix A49, which has a light emitting unit (923, 923L, 923R).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A50, since the direction indicating unit is put into the indicated state and the non-instructed state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, the direction indicating unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix A51]
The game according to Appendix A50, wherein the sorting device (92) further includes a visual recognition assisting unit (925) for facilitating the distinction between the lighting state and the extinguishing state of the light emitting unit (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A51, when the direction indicating unit has a light emitting unit, there is a concern that the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting unit may be difficult to see due to the lighting of lamps other than the direction indicating unit. By providing the unit, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting unit, so that the above concern is eliminated.

[Appendix A52]
The direction indicator (923L, 923R) is
When the distribution unit (94) is rotated in the first direction, the instruction unit control means (51) sets the instruction state, and when the distribution unit (94) is rotated in the second direction, the instruction unit control means. The first direction indicator (923L), which is set to the non-instruction state by (51),
When the distribution unit (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction unit control means (51) sets the instruction state, and when the distribution unit (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction unit control means. The second direction indicator (923R), which is set to the non-instruction state by (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A49 to Supplementary A51.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A52, since the direction indicating unit includes two of the first direction indicating unit and the second direction indicating unit, the rotation direction of the distribution unit is determined according to the indicated state and the non-instructed state of one direction indicating unit. Compared to the case of grasping, it becomes easier to accurately grasp the rotation direction of the distribution part. Further, without paying attention to the directions of the instruction and non-instruction states of the direction indicator, for example, the lighting state of the first direction indicator and the lighting state of the second direction indicator, the first direction indicator and the first. Since the rotation direction of the distribution unit can be grasped by paying attention only to the instruction state of the two-direction instruction unit, it becomes easy to accurately grasp the rotation direction of the distribution unit. As a result, it becomes easy to launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage, so that even a player with low skill can play the game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the second passage. It becomes possible to improve the probability of being able to launch.

[Appendix A53]
The distribution device (92) further includes a detection means for detecting the rotation direction of the distribution unit (94).
The appendix A49 is characterized in that the direction indicating unit control means (51) controls switching between the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the direction instruction unit (923) based on the detection result of the detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A52.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A53, since the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the direction indicating unit are switched based on the detection result by the detection means, the instruction state that appropriately reflects the rotation direction (posture) of the distribution unit. And the non-instructed state can be realized. Therefore, the skill of the player is appropriately reflected because it is possible to launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage based on the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the direction indicating unit. It is possible to provide a game machine having a playability to be played.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A49 to Appendix A53, wherein the direction indicator (923, 923L, 923R) is provided in the distribution device (92).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A54, since the direction indicating unit is provided in the distribution device, the player can grasp the rotation direction of the distribution unit without diverting his / her line of sight from the distribution device. Therefore, the player confirms the rotation direction of the distribution unit in the distribution device and measures the launch timing of the game ball, and the game ball introduced in the distribution device is placed in either the first passage or the second passage. You can check whether it has been sorted without moving your line of sight significantly. This makes it easier to grasp the relationship between the launch timing of the game ball by the player and the distribution result for the launch of the game ball at that timing while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix A55]
The gaming machines according to Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A54, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) is visible from the outside.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A55, since the distribution section is visible from the outside, the player checks the rotation operation of the distribution section and waits for the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage. You can launch a ball.

[Appendix A56]
A winning opening (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
Passage detecting means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), and
When the passage detecting means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) is triggered. ) Is restricted from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation) in which the game ball passing through the second passage (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). Movable accessory member (93) that operates in position) and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A55, further comprising.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A56, when the passage detecting means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening. Determines whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, the player pays attention to the timing at which the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which triggers the determination of the transition to the special game state when the game ball is distributed to the second passage, and launches the game ball. It will be possible. As a result, the player can proceed with the game in such a way that his / her skill is advantageous to him / her. In other words, the player can have an opportunity to receive a decision to shift to a large number of special games with a small number of launch balls.

[Appendix A57]
A winning opening (314L) where a game ball can enter,
Passage detecting means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), and
When the passage detecting means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the ball has passed through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922). The winning opening of a game ball that has passed through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) from the first position (standby position) where entry of the game ball into the winning opening (315) is restricted. A movable accessory member (93) that operates at a second position (operating position) where the ball is allowed to enter (315), and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A56.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A57, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, both the game ball passing through the first passage and the game ball passing through the second passage by the movable accessory member are movable accessories. Depending on the member, it is possible to enter the winning opening. That is, the movable accessory member simultaneously restricts the entry of the game ball into the winning opening and allows the entry of the game ball to the winning opening for the game ball passing through the first passage and the game ball passing through the second passage. Therefore, the movable accessory member that restricts and permits the entry of the game ball passing through the first passage into the winning opening, and the movable accessory member that restricts and permits the entry of the game ball passing through the second passage into the winning opening are restricted and permitted. Compared to the case where the movable accessory member is provided separately, the restrictions and allowances for the entry of the game balls in the first passage and the second passage into the winning opening can be realized by a simpler configuration, and also movable. Control of accessory members is also simplified.

[Appendix A58]
The movable accessory member (93) triggered by the first gaming state (mode B) and the detection by the passage detecting means (319') that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922). A second gaming state (mode B) whose operating time is longer than that of the first gaming state, and a gaming state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state between a plurality of gaming states including the first gaming state are further provided. The gaming machine according to Appendix A57.

[Appendix A59]
In the second gaming state, as compared with the first gaming state, when the movable accessory member (93) is activated, the gaming ball passing through the first passage (921) is the movable accessory member ( 93) The gaming machine according to Appendix A58, which is characterized by being easily entered into a ball.

[Appendix A60]
The plurality of gaming states further include a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (mode B) and the second gaming state (mode E).
In the first gaming state (mode B) and the second gaming state (mode E), whether to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the winning opening (315). Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to use
The gaming state transition means (41) shifts to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) when the determination result in the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state). ,
The second gaming state (mode E) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) by the determination means (41) than the first gaming state (mode B). The gaming machine according to Appendix A58 or Appendix A59.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices A58 to A60, the operating time of the movable accessory member differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and when the movable accessory member operates, the gaming ball to the winning opening The ease of entering the ball, in particular, the ease of entering the game ball into the winning opening of the game ball passing through the first passage is different. Therefore, the ease of entering the game ball into the winning opening depends on whether it is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and whether it has passed through the first passage or the second passage of the sorting device. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having different game characteristics.

[Appendix A61]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A47 to Appendix A60, wherein the sorting device (92) is provided at a position where a game ball to be launched is introduced in a region on the right side of the game board (31). ..

[Appendix A62]
Addendum A61 further includes a guide portion (31Y) for guiding all of the game balls launched into the right region of the game board (31) to the introduction port (920) of the distribution device (92). Described gaming machine.

In the gaming machines according to the appendix A61 and the appendix A62, the gaming ball is introduced into the sorting device by launching the gaming ball into the right region of the gaming board, so-called right-handing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game property in which a gaming ball is inserted into a winning opening by using a distribution device in a specific gaming state among a plurality of gaming states.

[Appendix A63]
The movable accessory member (93) is
A first guide unit (931A, 932G) that guides a game ball passing through the first passage (921) toward the winning opening (315) at the second position, and
A second guide portion (932A, 933G) that guides the game ball passing through the second passage (922) toward the winning opening (315) at the second position.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A57 to Supplementary A62.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63, the movable accessory member having the first guide portion and the second guide portion has a simple structure, and when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the gaming ball and the second passage in the first passage are used. It becomes possible to guide both the game ball in the passage to the winning opening.

[Appendix A64]
The movable accessory member (93) is provided between the first guide portion (931A) and the second guide (932A), and the gaming ball enters the winning opening (315) at the second position. The gaming machine according to Appendix A63, further comprising a through hole (933A) that allows a ball.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A64, in addition to the first guiding portion and the second guiding portion, the gaming ball in the first passage and the gaming ball in the second passage are provided by a movable accessory member having a simple structure having a through hole. It becomes possible to enter the ball into the winning opening.

[Appendix A65]
The first induction unit (932G) and the second induction unit (933G) are
To the winning opening (315) of a game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) with the winning opening (315) in a closed state in a state of being close to each other at the first position. Restrict the entry of game balls,
To the winning opening (315) of the game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) with the winning opening (315) in a state of being separated from each other at the second position. The gaming machine according to Appendix A64, which allows the entry of the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix A56, the game of the first passage when the movable accessory member is in the second position by the movable accessory member having a simple configuration having the first guide portion and the second guide portion that can be separated from each other. It becomes possible to guide the ball and the game ball in the second passage to the winning opening.

[Appendix B1]
The first direction (counterclockwise direction) centered on the introduction port (920), the first passage (921), the second passage (922), and the rotation axis (941), and the first direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution unit (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the distribution unit (94, etc.). Alternatively, a distribution device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction, and
With
The distribution unit (94) is a gaming machine capable of distributing a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) to the first passage (921) in a stationary state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when the distribution unit is in the stationary state, the distribution unit is in a posture of distributing the game ball to the first passage. Therefore, when the distribution unit is in the stationary state, the distribution device is used. When the game ball is introduced into the first passage, the game ball is distributed to the first passage by the rotation of the distribution unit. Therefore, when the game ball introduced into the distribution device is received by the distribution unit, it is possible to suppress the maintenance of the stationary state of the distribution unit and prevent the game ball from being clogged in the distribution device.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, wherein the distribution portion (94) has an eccentric portion (943) that makes it easy for the game balls to be distributed to the first passage (921) in the stationary state.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B2, wherein the eccentric portion (943) is integrated with the rotating shaft (941) via a support portion (946) extending from the rotating shaft (941). ..

[Appendix B4]
The distribution unit (94) is connected to a first guide unit (942L) that guides a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) to the first passage (921) and a first guidance unit (942L). It further has a second guide portion (942R) that is arranged line-symmetrically with respect to the other and guides the game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) to the second passage (922).
In the stationary state, the axis of symmetry between the first guide portion (942L) and the second guide portion (942R) is inclined toward the first passage (921) with respect to the vertical axis. The gaming machine according to Appendix B2 or Appendix B3.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices B2 to B4, the ball clogging in the sorting device can be effectively prevented by a simple configuration in which the eccentric portion is provided in the sorting portion.

[Appendix B5]
The distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotatable in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by rotating in the first direction, from Supplementary note B1 to Supplementary note B4. The gaming machine described in any of.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, when the distribution unit rotates in the first direction by distributing the game ball to the first passage by the distribution unit, a rotational force for rotating the distribution unit in the second direction is generated. .. Therefore, since the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction when it is rotated in the first direction, it may be possible to distribute the game ball to the second passage, so that the player distributes the game ball. It is possible to distribute more game balls to the second passage by launching the game balls at the timing when the unit distributes the game balls to the second passage. As a result, it is not just unlucky, but the distribution ratio of the game ball to the second passage depending on the skill level of the player, which is whether the game ball can be launched at the launch timing of the game ball which is easy to be distributed to the second passage. Will fluctuate, which will improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix B6]
The appendix B5, wherein the distribution unit (94 or the like) is rotatable in the first direction by a rotational force in the first direction obtained by rotating in the second direction. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction by the elastic force generated by being rotated in the first direction, and then is rotated in the second direction to obtain the first direction. It is rotated in the first direction by the rotational force to. That is, the distribution unit is rotated by repeating the rotation in the second direction and the rotation in the first direction, triggered by the rotation of the game ball in the first passage in the first direction. .. Therefore, when the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction due to the distribution of the game ball to the first passage, the distribution unit can be repeatedly rotated with this as an opportunity. As a result, the player can obtain the timing of distributing the game ball to the second passage a plurality of times by distributing the game ball to the first passage once, so that even a player with low skill can be assigned to the distribution unit. On the other hand, it becomes easy to launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the second passage.

Further, the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction triggered by the rotation of the distribution unit in the second direction, so that the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction again after the rotation in the first direction. NS. Therefore, even after the game balls are distributed to the second aisle, the distribution unit may be in a state of distributing the game balls to the second aisle. Therefore, the rotation operation of the distribution unit triggered by the distribution of the game balls to the second aisle. In the above, by launching the game ball at an appropriate timing by a stop hit or the like, it is possible to continuously distribute the game ball to the second passage. This also improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix B7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B6, wherein the distribution unit (94 or the like) is rotatable in the second direction by an elastic force obtained by rotating in the first direction.

[Appendix B8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B7, wherein the distribution unit (94 or the like) is rotatable in the first direction by an elastic force obtained by rotating in the second direction.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices B7 and B8, the distribution portion can be rotated in the first direction by the simple principle of utilizing the elastic force, so that the game machine can be rotated in the second direction, and thus has a simple configuration. Will be feasible.

[Appendix B9]
The distribution unit (94) is a load generation unit (944,944A, 944E, 944F, 944P1,944Q1,944Q2) that generates an elastic force for rotating in the second direction by being rotated in the first direction. , 9442I, 9443I, 9452V, 9462V).

The gaming machine according to Appendix B9 can provide a situation in which a gaming ball can be distributed to the second passage by the distribution unit by a simple configuration in which a load generating unit that generates an elastic force is provided in the distribution unit.

[Appendix B10]
The load generating portion (944, etc.) exerts an elastic force for rotating the distributing portion (94, etc.) in the first direction by rotating the distributing portion (94, etc.) in the second direction. The gaming machine according to Appendix B9, characterized in that it occurs.

The gaming machine according to Appendix B10 has a simple configuration in which a load generating portion that generates an elastic force is provided in the distribution portion. It is possible to obtain the timing of distributing the above multiple times.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B9 or Appendix B10, wherein the load generating portion (944 or the like) is provided so as to project from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B11, since the load generating portion is projected on the rotation shaft, the rotation cycle of the distribution portion can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the launch timing of the game ball, which is expected to be distributed to the second passage, and the timing when the game ball is actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B11, wherein the load generating portion (944 or the like) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B12, when the load generating unit is operated by a malicious player, the distribution unit is in a posture in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage, that is, a so-called goto action is performed. Can be prevented.

[Appendix B13]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B9 to B12, wherein the load generating portion (944 or the like) includes a leaf spring.

[Appendix B14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B13, wherein the leaf spring (944 or the like) extends from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B15]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B9 to B12, wherein the load generating unit (9442I, 9443I) includes a compression coil spring.

[Appendix B16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B15, wherein the compression coil springs (9442I, 9443I) are fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B17]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B9 to B12, wherein the load generating portion includes a torsion coil spring.

[Appendix B18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B17, wherein the torsion coil spring is fixed to a support portion (9441I) extending from the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B19]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B9 to B12, wherein the load generating portion (9452V, 9462V) includes a spiral spring.

[Appendix B20]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B19, wherein the spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) are wound along a peripheral surface of the rotating shaft (941).

[Appendix B21]
The spiral springs (9452V, 9462V) have a first spiral spring (9452V) whose one end is fixed to the rotary shaft (941) and wound in the first direction, and one end thereof is the rotary shaft (941). The gaming machine according to Appendix B20, comprising: a second spiral spring (9462V) fixed to and wound in the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B13 to the appendix B21, the distribution portion is rotated in the first direction by a simple configuration using the elastic force of a known spring such as a leaf spring, a compression coil spring, a torsion coil spring, and a spiral spring. The distribution unit can be rotated in the second direction, and the distribution unit can be rotated in the first direction by rotating the distribution unit in the second direction.

[Appendix B22]
The sorting device (92) interferes with the load generating section (944 or the like) when the sorting section (94 or the like) is rotated in the first direction or the second direction, and the sorting section (94 or the like) 94) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B11 to B21, further comprising a rotation regulating means (945 or the like) for restricting rotation in the first direction or the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B22, since the rotation of the distribution unit is regulated by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to prevent the distribution unit from rotating more than necessary. Further, since the load generating portion can be elastically deformed when the rotation of the distribution portion is regulated by the rotation regulating means, the load generating portion has a simple configuration in which the rotation of the load generating portion is regulated by the rotation regulating means. Elastic force can be generated appropriately. In addition, by restricting the rotation of the distribution unit by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to make the maximum rotation angle of the distribution unit uniform, so that the rotation cycle of the distribution unit should be stabilized. Becomes possible. As a result, the player can easily launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix B23]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B22, wherein the rotation regulating means (945 or the like) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B23, by operating the rotation control unit by a malicious player, it is possible to prevent the distribution unit from performing a goto action in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage. ..

[Appendix B24]
A load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) that rotates the distribution unit (94, etc.) in the second direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B23, further comprising.

The gaming machine according to Appendix B24 is provided with a load acting unit that generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution unit in the second direction by rotating the distribution unit in the first direction. A configuration in which such a load acting portion is provided can be easily realized, and the same effect as that of the gaming machine according to Appendix B23 in which the load generating portion is provided in the distribution portion can be obtained.

[Appendix B25]
The load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) rotates the distribution unit (94) in the first direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution unit (94) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to Appendix B24, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B25, since the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction, an elastic force for rotating the distribution unit in the first direction is generated in the load acting unit, so that the distribution unit is the first. It is rotated by repeating the rotation in the second direction and the rotation in the first direction, triggered by the rotation of the game ball in the first direction by the distribution of the game ball to the passage. Further, since the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction triggered by the rotation in the second direction, the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction again after the rotation in the first direction. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the appendix B23 also has the same effect as the gaming machine according to the appendix B9.

[Appendix B26]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B25, wherein the load acting portion (961J, 962J, etc.) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B26, when the load acting unit is operated by a malicious player, the distribution unit is in a posture in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage, that is, a so-called goto action is performed. Can be prevented.

[Appendix B27]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B24 to B26, wherein the load acting portion includes a leaf spring (9611O, 9612O, etc.).

[Appendix B28]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B24 to B26, wherein the load acting portion includes a compression coil spring (961J, 962J, etc.).

[Appendix B29]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B24 to B26, wherein the load acting portion includes a torsion coil spring (961N, 962N).

[Appendix B30]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B24 to B26, wherein the load acting portion includes a spiral spring (946W, 947W).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix B27 to the appendix B30, the distribution portion is rotated in the first direction by a simple configuration using the elastic force of a known spring such as a leaf spring, a compression coil spring, a torsion coil spring, and a spiral spring. The distribution unit can be rotated in the second direction, and the distribution unit can be rotated in the first direction by rotating the distribution unit in the second direction.

[Appendix B31]
The distribution unit (94, etc.) further includes a load input unit (940J, etc.) that interferes with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.). The described gaming machine.

[Appendix B32]
The load input unit (940J, etc.) is characterized in that it is elastically deformed by interference with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution unit (94J, etc.). The gaming machine according to Appendix B31.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix B31 and Appendix B32, when the load acting unit interferes with the load input unit, the elastic force generated in the load acting unit to rotate the distribution unit is input from the load input unit. At this time, the load input portion is elastically deformed, so that an elastic force for rotating the distribution portion is generated in the load input portion. Therefore, in the gaming machines according to the appendices B31 and B32, the impact at the time of interference between the load acting portion and the load generating portion can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of both the load acting portion and the load generating portion, so that the load acting portion and the load generating portion are generated. It becomes possible to improve the life of the part. In addition, the elastic force generated by the elastic deformation at the time of interference between the load acting portion and the load generating portion can be used for the rotation of the distribution portion. In addition, since the distribution member distributes the game ball to the first aisle during the opening time at the game hall, the game is played in the second aisle as compared with the case where the game ball is passed through the first aisle, for example. When it is advantageous for the player to pass the ball, it is possible to take measures against so-called morning, which is a state advantageous for the player when the game hall is opened.

[Appendix B33]
The gaming machine according to Appendix 31 or Appendix 32, wherein the load input unit (940J or the like) is provided so as to project from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B33, since the load input portion is projected from the rotation shaft, the rotation cycle of the distribution portion can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the launch timing of the game ball, which is expected to be distributed to the second passage, and the timing when the game ball is actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix B34]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A29, wherein the load input unit (940J or the like) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B34, when the load input unit is operated by a malicious player, the distribution unit is in a posture in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage, that is, a so-called goto action is performed. Can be prevented.

[Appendix B35]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B31, wherein the load input unit (944T) has a cam surface (9441T, 9442T) on which the load acting unit (961O, 961U) slides.

[Appendix B36]
The gaming machines according to Appendix B1 to Appendix B35, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) is visible from the outside.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B36, since the distribution section is visible from the outside, the player confirms the rotation operation of the distribution section and waits for the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage. You can launch a ball.

[Appendix B37]
A winning opening (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
Passage detecting means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), and
When the passage detecting means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) is triggered. ) Is restricted from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation) in which the game ball passing through the second passage (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). Movable accessory member (93) that operates in position) and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B36.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B37, when the passage detecting means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening. Determines whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, the player pays attention to the timing at which the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which triggers the determination of the transition to the special game state when the game ball is distributed to the second passage, and launches the game ball. It will be possible. As a result, the player can proceed with the game in such a way that his / her skill is advantageous to him / her. In other words, the player can have an opportunity to receive a decision to shift to a large number of special games with a small number of launch balls.

[Appendix C1]
A launch control means (41) capable of launching a game ball at a predetermined interval (Th), and
The first direction (counterclockwise direction) centered on the introduction port (920), the first passage (921), the second passage (922), and the rotation axis (941), and the first direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution unit (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the distribution unit (94, etc.). Alternatively, a distribution device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction, and
With
When the distribution unit (94) starts from the first switching point (P1) that switches the rotation direction from the first direction to the second direction, the distribution unit (94) changes the rotation direction from the second direction to the first direction. The unit rotation cycle (Ts) until the first switching point (P1) is reached again via the second switching point (P2) to be switched is a positive integer multiple or substantially positive of the predetermined interval (Th). A gaming machine characterized by being an integral multiple (for example, within ± 15% of a positive integer multiple of a rotation cycle).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the gaming balls are distributed to the second passage because the unit rotation cycle (Ts) is a positive integer multiple of the firing interval (predetermined interval (Th)) of the gaming balls or a value close to it. It becomes easy to link the state in which it is easy to be struck (the state in which it can be sorted) and the launch timing of the game ball. In addition, if the launch timing of the game ball and the timing of distribution to the second passage of the distribution device can be matched, the game ball can be distributed to the second passage with a high probability by performing a stop after that. Is also possible. For example, after matching the launch timing of the game ball with the timing of distribution to the second passage of the sorting device, by repeating the launch of one ball and the stop of one ball, the game is played in the second passage with high probability. It is also possible to allow the balls to be sorted. When a plurality of launch intervals of the game ball are set by the launch control means, the unit rotation cycle is set to a positive integer multiple of the shortest launch interval among the plurality of launch intervals or a value close to it. ..

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, wherein the unit rotation cycle (Ts) is in the range of ± 15%, which is a positive integer multiple of the predetermined interval (Th).

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the unit rotation cycle (Ts) is 1.6 to 2.4 times the predetermined interval (Th).

In the gaming machines according to Appendix C2 and Appendix C3, even if the unit rotation cycle (Ts) deviates from a positive integer multiple of the firing interval (Th) of the gaming ball, the deviation is within a predetermined range. For example, the same effect as that of the gaming machine according to Appendix C1 can be obtained.

[Appendix C4]
The distribution unit (94) can be rotated in the second direction by a rotational force in the second direction obtained by rotating in the first direction. The game machine described in Crab.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C4, when the distribution unit rotates in the first direction by distributing the game ball to the first passage by the distribution unit, a rotational force for rotating the distribution unit in the second direction is generated. .. Therefore, since the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction when it is rotated in the first direction, it may be possible to distribute the game ball to the second passage, so that the player distributes the game ball. It is possible to distribute more game balls to the second passage by launching the game balls at the timing when the unit distributes the game balls to the second passage. As a result, it is not just unlucky, but the distribution ratio of the game ball to the second passage depending on the skill level of the player, which is whether the game ball can be launched at the launch timing of the game ball which is easy to be distributed to the second passage. Will fluctuate, which will improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix C5]
The appendix C4, wherein the distribution unit (94 or the like) is rotatable in the first direction by a rotational force in the first direction obtained by rotating in the second direction. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5, the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction by the elastic force generated by being rotated in the first direction, and then is rotated in the second direction to obtain the first direction. It is rotated in the first direction by the rotational force to. That is, the distribution unit is rotated by repeating the rotation in the second direction and the rotation in the first direction, triggered by the rotation of the game ball in the first passage in the first direction. .. Therefore, when the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction due to the distribution of the game ball to the first passage, the distribution unit can be repeatedly rotated with this as an opportunity. As a result, the player can obtain the timing of distributing the game ball to the second passage a plurality of times by distributing the game ball to the first passage once, so that even a player with low skill can be assigned to the distribution unit. On the other hand, it becomes easy to launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the second passage.

Further, the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction triggered by the rotation of the distribution unit in the second direction, so that the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction again after the rotation in the first direction. NS. Therefore, even after the game balls are distributed to the second aisle, the distribution unit may be in a state of distributing the game balls to the second aisle. Therefore, the rotation operation of the distribution unit triggered by the distribution of the game balls to the second aisle. In the above, by launching the game ball at an appropriate timing by a stop hit or the like, it is possible to continuously distribute the game ball to the second passage. This also improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4, wherein the distribution unit (94 or the like) is rotatable in the second direction by an elastic force obtained by rotating in the first direction.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C6, wherein the distribution unit (94 or the like) is rotatable in the first direction by an elastic force obtained by rotating in the second direction.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices C6 and C7, the distribution portion can be rotated in the second direction by the simple principle of utilizing the elastic force, and thus the distribution portion can be rotated in the second direction. Therefore, it has a simple configuration. Will be feasible.

[Appendix C8]
The distribution unit (94) is a load generation unit (944,944A, 944E, 944F, 944P1,944Q1,944Q2) that generates an elastic force for rotating in the second direction by being rotated in the first direction. , 9442I, 9443I, 9452V, 9462V).

The gaming machine according to Appendix C8 can provide a situation in which a gaming ball can be distributed to the second passage by the distribution unit by a simple configuration in which a load generating unit that generates an elastic force is provided in the distribution unit.

[Appendix C9]
The load generating portion (944, etc.) exerts an elastic force for rotating the distributing portion (94, etc.) in the first direction by rotating the distributing portion (94, etc.) in the second direction. The gaming machine according to Appendix C5, which is characterized in that it occurs.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C9 has a simple configuration in which a load generating portion that generates an elastic force is provided in the distribution portion, and the player can distribute the game ball to the first passage at one time to allow the player to play the game ball in the second passage. Since it is possible to obtain the timing of distributing the game balls a plurality of times, even a player with a low skill can easily launch the game ball at the timing of distributing the game ball to the second passage with respect to the distribution unit.

[Appendix C10]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C8 or Appendix C9, wherein the load generating portion (944 or the like) is provided so as to project from the rotating shaft (941).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C10, since the load generating portion is projected on the rotation shaft, the rotation cycle of the distribution portion can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the launch timing of the game ball, which is expected to be distributed to the second passage, and the timing when the game ball is actually distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix C11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C10, wherein the load generating portion (944 or the like) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C11, when the load generating unit is operated by a malicious player, the distribution unit is in a posture in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage, that is, a so-called goto action is performed. Can be prevented.

[Appendix C12]
The sorting device (92) interferes with the load generating section (944 or the like) when the sorting section (94 or the like) is rotated in the first direction or the second direction, and the sorting section (94 or the like) 94) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C8 to C11, further comprising a rotation regulating means (945 or the like) for restricting rotation in the first direction or the second direction.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C12, since the rotation of the distribution unit is regulated by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to prevent the distribution unit from rotating more than necessary. Further, since the load generating portion can be elastically deformed when the rotation of the distribution portion is regulated by the rotation regulating means, the load generating portion has a simple configuration in which the rotation of the load generating portion is regulated by the rotation regulating means. Elastic force can be generated appropriately. In addition, by restricting the rotation of the distribution unit by the rotation regulating means, it is possible to make the maximum rotation angle of the distribution unit uniform, so that the rotation cycle of the distribution unit should be stabilized. Becomes possible. As a result, the player can easily launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix C13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C12, wherein the rotation regulating means (945 or the like) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C13, by operating the rotation control unit by a malicious player, it is possible to prevent the distribution unit from performing a goto action in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage. ..

[Appendix C14]
A load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) that rotates the distribution unit (94, etc.) in the second direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution unit (94, etc.) is rotated in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C8 to C13, further comprising.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C14 is provided with a load acting unit that generates an elastic force for rotating the distribution unit in the second direction by rotating the distribution unit in the first direction. A configuration in which such a load acting portion is provided can be easily realized, and the same effect as that of the gaming machine according to Appendix C8 in which the load generating portion is provided in the distribution portion can be obtained.

[Appendix C15]
The load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) rotates the distribution unit (94) in the first direction by an elastic force generated when the distribution unit (94) is rotated in the second direction. The gaming machine according to Appendix C14, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, since the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction, an elastic force for rotating the distribution unit in the first direction is generated in the load acting unit, so that the distribution unit is the first. It is rotated by repeating the rotation in the second direction and the rotation in the first direction, triggered by the rotation of the game ball in the first direction by the distribution of the game ball to the passage. Further, since the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction triggered by the rotation in the second direction, the distribution unit is rotated in the second direction again after the rotation in the first direction. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the appendix C15 also has the same effect as the gaming machine according to the appendix C9.

[Appendix C16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C15 or Appendix C16, wherein the distribution unit (94, etc.) further includes a load input unit (940J, etc.) that interferes with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.).

[Appendix C17]
The load input unit (940J, etc.) is characterized in that it is elastically deformed by interference with the load acting unit (961J, 962J, etc.) to generate an elastic force that rotates the distribution unit (94J, etc.). The gaming machine according to Appendix C16.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix C16 and Appendix C17, when the load acting unit interferes with the load input unit, the elastic force generated in the load acting unit to rotate the distribution unit is input from the load input unit. At this time, the load input portion is elastically deformed, so that an elastic force for rotating the distribution portion is generated at the load input portion. Therefore, in the gaming machines according to the appendices C16 and C17, the impact at the time of interference between the load acting portion and the load generating portion can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of both the load acting portion and the load generating portion, so that the load acting portion and the load generating portion are generated. It becomes possible to improve the life of the part. In addition, the elastic force generated by the elastic deformation at the time of interference between the load acting portion and the load generating portion can be used for the rotation of the distribution portion.

[Appendix C14]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C17, wherein the load acting portion (961J, 962J, etc.) is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C14, when the load acting unit is operated by a malicious player, the distribution unit is in a posture in which the game ball is distributed to the second passage, that is, a so-called goto action is performed. Can be prevented.

[Appendix C15]
The gaming machines according to Appendix C1 to Appendix C14, wherein the distribution unit (94 or the like) is visible from the outside.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, since the distribution section is visible from the outside, the player confirms the rotation operation of the distribution section and waits for the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage. You can launch a ball.

[Appendix C16]
A driving means (973X) that applies a driving force for rotating the distribution unit (94) in the first direction or the second direction.
The drive control means (41) that controls the drive means (973X) and rotates the distribution unit (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the distribution unit (94). )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C3.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C16 can exert the effect of the gaming machine according to Appendix C1 when the distribution unit is provided with a distribution device that is rotated by an external power.

[Appendix C17]
A winning opening (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
Passage detecting means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), and
When the passage detecting means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) is triggered. ) Is restricted from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation) in which the game ball passing through the second passage (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). Movable accessory member (93) that operates in position) and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C17.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C17, when the passage detecting means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening. Determines whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, the player pays attention to the timing at which the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which triggers the determination of the transition to the special game state when the game ball is distributed to the second passage, and launches the game ball. It will be possible. As a result, the player can proceed with the game in such a way that his / her skill is advantageous to him / her. In other words, the player can have an opportunity to receive a decision to shift to a large number of special games with a small number of launch balls.

[Appendix D1]
The first direction (counterclockwise direction) centered on the introduction port (920), the first passage (921), the second passage (922), and the rotation axis (941), and the first direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution unit (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the distribution unit (94, etc.). Alternatively, a distribution device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction, and
A position indicating unit (923) indicating to the player that the distribution unit (94) is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage (922).
An instruction state that controls the position indicating unit (923) and indicates to the player that the distribution unit (94) is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage (922), and the instruction state. Is a position indicator control means (51) that controls switching between different non-instruction states, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, the position indicating unit is controlled by the position indicating unit controlling means, so that the player is notified that the distribution unit is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball with the indicated state of the position indicating unit as a guide. As a result, it is easier for the player to find out the launch timing of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage, as compared with the case where the game ball is launched while visually checking the rotation direction and posture of the distribution portion. Therefore, even a player with a low skill can easily launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix D2]
The position indicating unit (923) is set to the indicated state by being lit when the distribution unit (94) is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage (922). 923) The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, which comprises 923).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D2, since the position indicating unit is put into the indicated state and the non-instructed state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, the position indicating unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix D3]
The game according to Appendix D2, wherein the sorting device (92) further includes a visual recognition assisting unit (925) for facilitating the distinction between the lighting state and the extinguishing state of the light emitting unit (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D3, if the position indicating unit has a light emitting unit, there is a concern that it may be difficult to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting unit due to the lighting of lamps other than the position indicating unit. By providing the unit, it becomes easier to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting unit, and the above concern is eliminated.

[Appendix D4]
The sorting device (92) further includes a position detecting means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting unit (94).
The position indicating unit control means (51) controls switching between the indicated state and the non-instructed state of the position indicating unit (923) based on the detection result of the position detecting means (95). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D3, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, the indicated state and the non-instructed state of the position indicating unit are switched based on the detection result by the position detecting means, so that the instruction appropriately reflects the rotation position (posture) of the distribution unit. A state and a non-instructed state can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the distribution unit is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix D5]
A driving means (97X) that applies a driving force for rotating the distribution unit (94) in the first direction or the second direction.
The drive control means (41) that controls the drive means (97X) and rotates the distribution unit (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the distribution unit (94). )When,
With more
The position indicating unit control means (51) has the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the position instruction unit (923) based on the control state of the drive control means (41) with respect to the drive means (97X). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D4, characterized in that switching is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the position indicating unit are switched based on the control state of the drive means by the drive control means, so that the rotation direction (posture) of the distribution unit is appropriately reflected. It is possible to realize the indicated state and the non-instructed state. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the distribution unit is in a position where the game ball can be distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix D6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D5, wherein the position indicating unit (923) is provided in the sorting device (92).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D6, since the position indicating unit is provided in the distribution device, the player can grasp the timing at which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage without diverting the line of sight from the distribution device. Therefore, the player confirms the distribution device and measures the launch timing of the game ball, and greatly moves the line of sight as to whether the game ball introduced in the distribution device is distributed to the first passage or the second passage. You can check it without letting it. As a result, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the launch timing of the game ball by the player and the distribution result for the launch of the game ball at that timing while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix D7]
A winning opening (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
Passage detecting means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), and
When the passage detecting means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) is triggered. ) Is restricted from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation) in which the game ball passing through the second passage (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). Movable accessory member (93) that operates in position) and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D7, when the passage detecting means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening. Determines whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, the player pays attention to the timing at which the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which triggers the determination of the transition to the special game state when the game ball is distributed to the second passage, and launches the game ball. It will be possible. As a result, the player can proceed with the game in such a way that his / her skill is advantageous to him / her. In other words, the player can have an opportunity to receive a decision to shift to a large number of special games with a small number of launch balls.

[Appendix E1]
The first direction (counterclockwise direction) centered on the introduction port (920), the first passage (921), the second passage (922), and the rotation axis (941), and the first direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution unit (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the distribution unit (94, etc.). Alternatively, a distribution device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction, and
A launch instruction unit (923) indicating the launch timing of the game ball in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage (922), and
The launch instruction unit (923) is controlled to control switching between an instruction state indicating that the launch timing is such that the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage (922) and a non-instruction state different from the instruction state. Launch instruction unit control means (51)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, the launching instruction unit is controlled by the launching instruction unit control means, so that the player is informed that the distribution unit can distribute the game ball to the second passage. Be notified. Therefore, the player can launch the game ball using the instruction state of the launch instruction unit as a guide. As a result, it is easier for the player to find the launch timing of the game ball in which the game ball is easily guided to the second passage, as compared with the case where the game ball is launched while visually checking the rotation direction and posture of the distribution portion. Therefore, even a player with a low skill can easily launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix E2]
The launch instruction unit (923) has a light emitting unit (923) that is turned on when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage (922) at the launch timing. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E2, since the launch instruction unit is set to the instructed state and the non-instructed state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, the launch instruction unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix E3]
The game according to Appendix E2, wherein the sorting device (92) further includes a visual recognition assisting unit (925) for facilitating the distinction between the lighting state and the extinguishing state of the light emitting unit (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E3, if the launch instruction unit has a light emitting unit, it may be difficult to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting unit due to the lighting of lamps other than the firing instruction unit. By providing the unit, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting unit, so that the above concern is eliminated.

[Appendix E4]
The sorting device (92) further includes a position detecting means (95) for detecting the position of the sorting unit (94).
The launch instruction unit control means (51) controls switching between the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the position instruction unit (923) based on the detection result of the position detection means (95). The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E3, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the launch instruction unit are switched based on the detection result by the position detection means, so that the instruction appropriately reflects the rotation position (posture) of the distribution unit. A state and a non-instructed state can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the distribution unit is the launch timing of the game ball capable of distributing the game ball to the second passage.

[Appendix E5]
A driving means (973X) that applies a driving force for rotating the distribution unit (94) in the first direction or the second direction.
The drive control means (41) that controls the drive means (973X) and rotates the distribution unit (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the distribution unit (94). )When,
With more
The launch instruction unit control means (51) has the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the launch instruction unit (923) based on the control state of the drive control means (41) with respect to the drive means (973X). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E4, characterized in that switching is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the position indicating unit are switched based on the control state of the drive means by the drive control means, so that the rotation direction (posture) of the distribution unit is appropriately reflected. It is possible to realize the instructed state and the non-instructed state. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the distribution unit is the launch timing of the game ball capable of distributing the game ball to the second passage.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E5, wherein the launch instruction unit (923) is provided in the distribution device (92).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6, since the launch instruction unit is provided in the distribution device, the player can grasp the launch timing at which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage without diverting the line of sight from the distribution device. .. Therefore, the player confirms the distribution device and measures the launch timing of the game ball, and greatly moves the line of sight as to whether the game ball introduced in the distribution device is distributed to the first passage or the second passage. You can check it without letting it. As a result, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the launch timing of the game ball by the player and the distribution result for the launch of the game ball at that timing while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix E7]
A winning opening (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
Passage detecting means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), and
When the passage detecting means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) is triggered. ) Is restricted from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation) in which the game ball passing through the second passage (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). Movable accessory member (93) that operates in position) and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E7, when the passage detecting means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening. Determines whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, the player pays attention to the timing at which the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which triggers the determination of the transition to the special game state when the game ball is distributed to the second passage, and launches the game ball. It will be possible. As a result, the player can proceed with the game in such a way that his / her skill is advantageous to him / her. In other words, the player can have an opportunity to receive a decision to shift to a large number of special games with a small number of launch balls.

[Appendix F1]
The first direction (counterclockwise direction) centered on the introduction port (920), the first passage (921), the second passage (922), and the rotation axis (941), and the first direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution unit (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the distribution unit (94, etc.). Alternatively, a distribution device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction, and
A direction indicating unit (923, 923L, 923R) indicating the rotation direction of the distribution unit (94), and
An instruction state that controls the direction instruction unit (923, 923L, 923R) and indicates that the distribution unit (94) is rotating in the first direction or the second direction, and the instruction state. A direction indicator control means (51) that controls switching to a non-instruction state different from the above, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, the direction indicating unit is controlled by the direction indicating unit controlling means, so that the player is notified of the rotation direction of the distribution unit. Therefore, it is possible to launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage, using the instruction state of the direction indicating unit as a guide. As a result, it is easier for the player to find the launch timing of the game ball in which the game ball is easily guided to the second passage, as compared with the case where the game ball is launched while visually checking the rotation direction and posture of the distribution portion. Therefore, even a player with a low skill can easily launch the game ball at a timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage.

[Appendix F2]
The direction indicating unit (923, 923L, 923R) is set to the instruction state by being turned on when the distribution unit (94) is in the state of rotating in the first direction or the second direction. The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, which has a light emitting unit (923, 923L, 923R).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F2, since the direction indicating unit is put into the indicated state and the non-instructed state by turning on and off the light emitting unit, the direction indicating unit is realized by a simple configuration having the light emitting unit.

[Appendix F3]
The game according to Appendix F2, wherein the sorting device (92) further includes a visual recognition assisting unit (925) for facilitating the distinction between the lighting state and the extinguishing state of the light emitting unit (923). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F3, if the direction indicating unit has a light emitting unit, there is a concern that it may be difficult to visually recognize the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting unit due to the lighting of lamps other than the direction indicating unit. By providing the unit, it becomes easy to visually distinguish between the lit state and the extinguished state of the light emitting unit, so that the above concern is eliminated.

[Appendix F4]
The direction indicator (923L, 923R) is
When the distribution unit (94) is rotated in the first direction, the instruction unit control means (51) sets the instruction state, and when the distribution unit (94) is rotated in the second direction, the instruction unit control means. The first direction indicator (923L), which is set to the non-instruction state by (51),
When the distribution unit (94) is rotating in the second direction, the instruction unit control means (51) sets the instruction state, and when the distribution unit (94) is rotating in the first direction, the instruction unit control means. The second direction indicator (923R), which is set to the non-instruction state by (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F3.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F4, since the direction indicating unit includes two of the first direction indicating unit and the second direction indicating unit, the rotation direction of the distribution unit is determined according to the indicated state and the non-instructed state of one direction indicating unit. Compared to the case of grasping, it becomes easier to accurately grasp the rotation direction of the distribution part. Further, without paying attention to the directions of the instruction and non-instruction states of the direction indicator, for example, the lighting state of the first direction indicator and the lighting state of the second direction indicator, the first direction indicator and the first. Since the rotation direction of the distribution unit can be grasped by paying attention only to the instruction state of the two-direction instruction unit, it becomes easy to accurately grasp the rotation direction of the distribution unit. As a result, it becomes easy to launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage, so that even a player with low skill can play the game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the second passage. It becomes possible to improve the probability of being able to launch.

[Appendix F5]
The distribution device (92) further includes a detection means for detecting the rotation direction of the distribution unit (94).
The appendix F1 characterized in that the direction indicating unit control means (51) controls switching between the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the direction instruction unit (923) based on the detection result of the detection means. The gaming machine described in any of Appendix F4.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F5, since the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the direction indicating unit are switched based on the detection result by the detection means, the instruction state that appropriately reflects the rotation direction (posture) of the distribution unit. And the non-instructed state can be realized. Therefore, the skill of the player is appropriately reflected because it is possible to launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage based on the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the direction indicating unit. It is possible to provide a game machine having a playability to be played.

[Appendix F6]
A driving means (973X) that applies a driving force for rotating the distribution unit (94) in the first direction or the second direction.
The drive control means (41) that controls the drive means (973X) and rotates the distribution unit (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the distribution unit (94). )When,
With more
The direction indicating unit control means (51) has the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the (9233, 923L, 923R) based on the control state of the drive control means (41) with respect to the drive means (973X). The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices F1 to F5, which is characterized by controlling the switching of the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F6, the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the direction indicating unit are switched based on the control state of the drive means by the drive control means, so that the rotation direction (posture) of the distribution unit is appropriately reflected. It is possible to realize the indicated state and the non-instructed state of the direction indicating unit. Therefore, the skill of the player is appropriately reflected because it is possible to launch the game ball at the timing when the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage based on the instruction state and the non-instruction state of the direction indicating unit. It is possible to provide a game machine having a playability to be played.

[Appendix F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F6, wherein the direction indicating unit (923, 923L, 923R) is provided in the distribution device (92).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F7, since the direction indicating unit is provided in the distribution device, the player can grasp the rotation direction of the distribution unit without diverting his / her line of sight from the distribution device. Therefore, the player confirms the rotation direction of the distribution unit in the distribution device and measures the launch timing of the game ball, and the game ball introduced in the distribution device is placed in either the first passage or the second passage. You can check whether it has been sorted without moving your line of sight significantly. This makes it easier to grasp the relationship between the launch timing of the game ball by the player and the distribution result for the launch of the game ball at that timing while minimizing the movement of the line of sight.

[Appendix F8]
A winning opening (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
Passage detecting means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), and
When the passage detecting means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) is triggered. ) Is restricted from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation) in which the game ball passing through the second passage (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). Movable accessory member (93) that operates in position) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the appendices F1 to F7, further comprising.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F8, when the passage detecting means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening. Determines whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, the player pays attention to the timing at which the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which triggers the determination of the transition to the special game state when the game ball is distributed to the second passage, and launches the game ball. It will be possible. As a result, the player can proceed with the game in such a way that his / her skill is advantageous to him / her. In other words, the player can have an opportunity to receive a decision to shift to a large number of special games with a small number of launch balls.

[Appendix G1]
The first direction (counterclockwise direction) centered on the introduction port (920), the first passage (921), the second passage (922), and the rotation axis (941), and the first direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution unit (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the distribution unit (94, etc.). Alternatively, a distribution device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction, and
A driving means (973X) that applies a driving force for rotating the distribution unit (94) in the first direction or the second direction.
The drive control means (41) that controls the drive means (973X) and rotates the distribution unit (94) alternately in the first direction and the second direction to rotate the distribution unit (94). )When,
With
The drive control means (41) controls the rotation pattern of the distribution unit (94) according to the distribution status of the game ball to the second passage (922) in the distribution device (92). A game machine featuring.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, the rotation pattern of the distribution unit is controlled by the drive control means according to the distribution status of the game balls to the second passage. That is, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, the distribution unit is not rotated at regular intervals, but the expected degree of distribution of the game balls to the second passage is determined according to the distribution status of the game balls to the second passage. It will be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of adjusting the difficulty level of firing the gaming balls at the timing when the gaming balls are distributed to the second passage according to the skill of the player. As a result, the unfairness to the player with low skill can be reduced, while the difficulty of the firing timing of the game ball for distributing the game ball to the second passage is further increased for the player with high skill. Can provide playability.

[Appendix G2]
The rotation pattern is
The first expected value for the distribution ratio of the game balls to the first passage (921) in the continuous firing game in which the game balls are continuously fired at the minimum firing interval, and the second passage (922) in the continuous firing game. ), And the first rotation pattern in which the second expected value with respect to the distribution ratio of the game balls to) is equal to or substantially the same.
A second rotation pattern in which the second expected value is larger than a predetermined value as compared with the first expected value.
Including
The drive control means (41)
When the absolute value of the distribution ratio difference between the distribution ratio of the game balls to the first passage and the distribution ratio of the game balls to the second passage is equal to or less than a specific value (for example, 0.4: 0.6 to 0.6: In the case of 0.4), the distribution unit (94) is controlled by the first rotation pattern, and the distribution unit (94) is controlled by the first rotation pattern.
The appendix G1 is characterized in that when the distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value (for example, when it exceeds 0.6: 0.4), the distribution unit (94) is controlled by the second rotation pattern. Described gaming machine.

[Appendix G3]
The second rotation pattern is the rotation direction of the distribution unit from the second direction to the first direction from the first switching point for switching the rotation direction of the distribution unit from the first direction to the second direction. The time required for the distribution unit to rotate in the second direction to the second switching point for switching is such that the distribution unit rotates in the first direction from the second switching point to the first switching point. The gaming machine according to Appendix G2, which is characterized in that it is longer than the time required for.

[Appendix G4]
When the absolute value of the distribution ratio difference is equal to or less than a specific value, the total number of game balls introduced into the distribution device at a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.) Of these, the case where the distribution ratio of the game balls to the first passage is 0.4 to 0.6 and the distribution ratio of the game balls to the second passage is 0.6 to 0.4.
The distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value when the distribution ratio of the game balls to the first passage exceeds 0.6 and the distribution ratio of the game balls to the second passage is less than 0.4. The gaming machine according to the appendix G2 or the appendix G3, characterized in that.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices G2 to G4, when the distribution of the game balls to the first passage is excessive with respect to the distribution of the game balls to the second passage, the game balls are easily distributed to the second passage. The distribution part is rotated in a two-rotation pattern. Therefore, by rotating the distribution unit in the second rotation pattern, it is possible to reduce unfairness to a player with low skill.

[Appendix G5]
The rotation pattern is
The first expected value for the distribution ratio of the game balls to the first passage (921) in the continuous firing game in which the game balls are continuously fired at the minimum firing interval, and the second passage (922) in the continuous firing game. ), And the first rotation pattern in which the second expected value with respect to the distribution ratio of the game balls to) is equal to or substantially the same.
A third rotation pattern in which the second expected value is smaller than a predetermined value as compared with the first expected value.
Including
The drive control means (41)
When the absolute value of the distribution ratio difference between the distribution ratio of the game balls to the second passage and the distribution ratio of the game balls to the first passage is equal to or less than a specific value (for example, 0.4: 0.6 to 0.6: In the case of 0.4), the distribution unit (94) is controlled by the first rotation pattern, and the distribution unit (94) is controlled by the first rotation pattern.
When the distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value (for example, when it exceeds 0.6: 0.4), the distribution unit (94) is controlled by the third rotation pattern. The gaming machine described in any of the appendices G4.

[Appendix G6]
The third rotation pattern is the rotation direction of the distribution unit from the second direction to the first direction from the first switching point for switching the rotation direction of the distribution unit from the first direction to the second direction. The time required to rotate the distribution unit in the second direction to the second switching point for switching is such that the distribution unit is rotated in the first direction from the second switching point to the first switching point. The gaming machine according to Appendix G5, which is characterized in that it is shorter than the time required for.

[Appendix G7]
When the absolute value of the distribution ratio difference is equal to or less than a specific value, the total number of game balls introduced into the distribution device at a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds, etc.) Of these cases, the distribution ratio of the game balls to the first passage is 0.4 to 0.6, and the distribution ratio of the game balls to the second passage is 0.6 to 0.4.
The distribution ratio difference exceeds the specific value when the distribution ratio of the game balls to the first passage is less than 0.4 and the distribution ratio of the game balls to the second passage exceeds 0.6. The gaming machine according to Appendix G5 or Appendix G6, characterized in that it is present.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices G5 to G7, when the distribution of the game balls to the second passage is excessive with respect to the distribution of the game balls to the first passage, the game balls are easily distributed to the first passage. The distribution portion is rotated in a three-rotation pattern. Therefore, by rotating the distribution portion in the third rotation pattern, the difficulty level of the launch timing of the game ball for distributing the game ball to the second passage is further increased for the player with high skill. Can provide playability.

[Appendix G8]
A winning opening (315) that gives an opportunity to determine whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by entering the game ball.
Passage detecting means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), and
When the passage detecting means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the winning opening (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (922) is triggered. ) Is restricted from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation) in which the game ball passing through the second passage (922) is allowed to enter the winning opening (315). Movable accessory member (93) that operates in position) and
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G7, further comprising.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G8, when the passage detecting means detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage, the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening, and the gaming ball can be entered into the winning opening. Determines whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. In other words, the player pays attention to the timing at which the game ball can be expected to enter the winning opening, which triggers the determination of the transition to the special game state when the game ball is distributed to the second passage, and launches the game ball. It will be possible. As a result, the player can proceed with the game in such a way that his / her skill is advantageous to him / her. In other words, the player can have an opportunity to receive a decision to shift to a large number of special games with a small number of launch balls.

[Appendix H1]
The first direction (counterclockwise direction) centered on the introduction port (920), the first passage (921), the second passage (922), and the rotation axis (941), and the first direction opposite to the first direction. It has a distribution unit (94, etc.) that can rotate in two directions (clockwise direction), and a game ball introduced from the introduction port (920) is transferred to the first direction of the distribution unit (94, etc.). Alternatively, a distribution device (92) that distributes to the first passage (921) or the second passage (922) by rotation in the second direction, and
A winning opening (314L) where a game ball can enter,
Passage detecting means (319') for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), and
When the passage detecting means (319') detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922), the ball has passed through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922). The winning opening of a game ball that has passed through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) from the first position (standby position) where entry of the game ball into the winning opening (315) is restricted. A movable accessory member (93) that operates at a second position (operating position) where the ball is allowed to enter (315), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, both the game ball passing through the first passage and the game ball passing through the second passage by the movable accessory member are movable accessories. Depending on the member, it is possible to enter the winning opening. That is, the movable accessory member simultaneously restricts the entry of the game ball into the winning opening and allows the entry of the game ball to the winning opening for the game ball passing through the first passage and the game ball passing through the second passage. Therefore, the movable accessory member that restricts and permits the entry of the game ball passing through the first passage into the winning opening, and the movable accessory member that restricts and permits the entry of the game ball passing through the second passage into the winning opening are restricted and permitted. Compared to the case where the movable accessory member is provided separately, the restrictions and allowances for the entry of the game balls in the first passage and the second passage into the winning opening can be realized by a simpler configuration, and also movable. Control of accessory members is also simplified.

[Appendix H2]
The movable accessory member (93) triggered by the first gaming state (mode B) and the detection by the passage detecting means (319') that the game ball has passed through the second passage (922). A second gaming state (mode B) whose operating time is longer than that of the first gaming state, and a gaming state transition means (41) for shifting the gaming state between a plurality of gaming states including the first gaming state are further provided. The gaming machine according to Appendix H1.

[Appendix H3]
In the second gaming state, as compared with the first gaming state, when the movable accessory member (93) is activated, the gaming ball passing through the first passage (921) is the movable accessory member ( 93) The gaming machine according to Appendix H2, which is characterized by being easily entered into a ball.

[Appendix H4]
The plurality of gaming states further include a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (mode B) and the second gaming state (mode E).
In the first gaming state (mode B) and the second gaming state (mode E), whether to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the winning opening (315). Further provided with a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to use
The gaming state transition means (41) shifts to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) when the determination result in the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state). ,
The second gaming state (mode E) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) by the determination means (41) than the first gaming state (mode B). The gaming machine according to Appendix H2 or Appendix H3.

According to the gaming machines according to the appendices H2 to H4, the operating time of the movable accessory member differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and when the movable accessory member operates, the gaming ball to the winning opening The ease of entering the ball, in particular, the ease of entering the game ball into the winning opening of the game ball passing through the first passage is different. Therefore, the ease of entering the game ball into the winning opening depends on whether it is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and whether it has passed through the first passage or the second passage of the sorting device. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having different game characteristics.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H4, wherein the sorting device (92) is provided at a position where a gaming ball to be launched is introduced in a region on the right side of the gaming board (31). ..

[Appendix H6]
Appendix H5 is further provided with a guide portion (31Y) for guiding all of the game balls launched into the right region of the game board (31) to the introduction port (920) of the distribution device (92). Described gaming machine.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices H5 and H6, the gaming ball is introduced into the sorting device by launching the gaming ball into the right region of the gaming board, so-called right-handing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game property in which a gaming ball is inserted into a winning opening by using a distribution device in a specific gaming state among a plurality of gaming states.

[Appendix H7]
The movable accessory member (93) is
A first guide unit (931A, 932G) that guides a game ball passing through the first passage (921) toward the winning opening (315) at the second position, and
A second guide portion (932A, 933G) that guides the game ball passing through the second passage (922) toward the winning opening (315) at the second position.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H7, the movable accessory member having the first guide portion and the second guide portion has a simple structure, and when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the gaming ball and the second passage in the first passage are used. It becomes possible to guide both the game ball in the passage to the winning opening.

[Appendix H8]
The movable accessory member (93) is provided between the first guide portion (931A) and the second guide (932A), and the gaming ball enters the winning opening (315) at the second position. The gaming machine according to Appendix H7, further comprising a through hole (933A) that allows a ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H8, in addition to the first guiding portion and the second guiding portion, the gaming ball in the first passage and the gaming ball in the second passage are provided by a movable accessory member having a simple structure having a through hole. It becomes possible to enter the ball into the winning opening.

[Appendix H9]
The first induction unit (932G) and the second induction unit (933G) are
To the winning opening (315) of a game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) with the winning opening (315) in a closed state in a state of being close to each other at the first position. Restrict the entry of game balls,
To the winning opening (315) of the game ball passing through the first passage (921) and the second passage (922) with the winning opening (315) in a state of being separated from each other at the second position. The gaming machine according to Appendix H8, which allows the entry of the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H9, the game of the first passage when the movable accessory member is in the second position by the movable accessory member having a simple configuration having the first guide portion and the second guide portion that can be separated from each other. It becomes possible to guide the ball and the game ball in the second passage to the winning opening.

[Appendix H10]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H9, wherein the distribution units (94D to 94G) are fixed at positions where the gaming balls introduced from the introduction port (920) interfere with each other. ..

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H10, the distribution portion of the distribution device is fixed at a position where the game balls introduced from the introduction port interfere with each other. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage (individual difference between the gaming machines) by the distribution unit. As a result, the player can find the launch position of the game ball in the second passage by adjusting the launch position of the game ball and making trial and error. It is fun to search for the launch position of the game ball where the game ball is easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the game ball swings from those game machines to the second passage. It will be possible to enjoy exploring easy-to-understand gaming machines.

[Appendix H11]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H10, wherein the distribution portion (94F, 94G) has a fixed portion that is immovable and cannot rotate.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H11, it is determined by an accidental factor such as the collision position of the gaming ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix H12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H11, wherein the fixing portion (942E, 941G) has one end fixed and at least a part other than the one end portion can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix H13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H12, wherein the fixing portion (942E, 941G) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H11 to H13, wherein the fixing portion (942E, 941G) is a nail.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices H12 to H14, at least a part of the fixed portion of the distribution portion can be plastically changed, so that the fixed portion is set to the initial position when the position of the fixed portion deviates from the initial set value. It will be possible to bring it back. This makes it possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix H15]
The distribution unit (94G) has a plurality of nails and has a plurality of nails.
The plurality of nails are characterized in that, in front view, one nail (941G) is at the top, and the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with respect to a vertical line passing through the one nail (941G). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H11 to H14.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H15, by adjusting the nail on the top, it is possible to improve the bias of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix H16]
The distribution unit (94E) has a rotating body (941E) rotatably fixed by the fixing unit (942E).
The rotating body (941E) has a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (921) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is played toward the second passage (922). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H11 to H14, characterized in that the ball can be rotated in a second direction for moving the ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H16, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix H17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H16, wherein the rotating body (941E) can freely rotate in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix H18]
The distribution unit (94D) is in the first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (921) and in the direction opposite to the first direction, and is toward the second passage (922). The gaming machine according to Appendix H10, which includes a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in a second direction for moving the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix H17 and the appendix H18, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as a distribution part, and this rotating body also causes an accidental element such as a collision position of a game ball with the rotating body. Determined by. Therefore, the game ball is randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by an accidental element, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 314: First start port 315: Second start port 316b: Variable winning opening 319': Through gate 41: MPU
92: Sorting device 920: Introduction port 921: First passage 922: Second passage 923: Synchronous lamp 924: Housing 925: Lighting mark 9251: Translucent area 9252: Mask area 93, 93A to 93F: Electric support member 93G : Electric tulip accessory device 931E: Through hole 931F: Through portion 932S: Left wing member 933S: Right wing member 94, 94A, 94B, 94E, 94F, 94H to 94J, 94P1, 94P2, 94Q1, 94Q2, 94R1 to 94R3 94S1,94S2,94T, 94V to 94Y: Distribution member 940, 940J, 944R1,944R2,944S1,944S2,944T, 944Y: Load input unit 941: Rotation shaft 942: Ball receiving guide piece 942L: Left ball receiving guide piece 942R : Right ball receiving guide piece 943: Eccentric part 944,944A, 944E, 944F, 944I, 944P1,944P2,944Q1,944Q2,944V, 961O: Load generating part 945W, 961J to 961O, 961P1,961Q1,961U: Load acting part 9452V, 9462V, 9462W, 9472W: Input piece 946: Support part 947: Base part 948, 949: Regulation piece 94D: Roller 94E: Windmill 941E: Rotating body 941F: Top 942E: Nail 94F: Mountain-shaped fixing part 94G: Triangular nail 941G : Top nail 95: Detection unit 9611O, 9611P1, 9611P3, 9611Q1, 9611Q3: Leaf spring 99: Game ball

Claims (1)

The first ball entry area where game balls can enter, and
A second ball entry area, which allows the entry of a game ball and has a function different from that of the first ball entry area,
Guidance means to guide the game ball to a predetermined flow path,
With
The guiding means
A first guiding means that forms a first guiding state in which a game ball can enter the first ball entry region and a second guiding state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the first ball entry region. ,
A second guiding means that is continuous with the first guiding means and can allow the game ball to flow down toward the first guiding means in the second guiding state of the first guiding means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images